JP6830745B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine").

Conventionally, as seen in Patent Document 1, for example, a gaming machine is known in which a lottery is performed based on a prize at a starting port, and when the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit game in which a prize ball is paid out is executed. There is.

That is, in the game machine described in Patent Document 1, when a game ball is won at the starting port, a lottery process is performed in which a big hit or the like is drawn, and at this time, a special symbol is displayed on a predetermined display. Is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined fluctuation time. Then, when the above-mentioned special symbol is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the jackpot when the predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, the jackpot game is executed and many prize balls are paid out to the player.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2010-187791 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-078502

However, Yu Technical's, there is a possibility that the Xing flavor drops.

This invention has been made in view of these circumstances, and an object thereof is to suppress a decrease in Xing flavor.

Means 1: A gaming machine having a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the result of a lottery by the lottery means, and the lottery of the lottery means. A variable display executing means for executing variable display based on the above, a movable structure operably provided at a standby position and an effect position, and an advantage for the player when a special result is derived as a lottery result by the lottery means. A special game execution means that can be controlled to a special game state, and an advantageous game state control means that can control an advantageous game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the special game state is executed. When controlled to the advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, the derivation of the lottery result by the lottery means is relatively shorter than the normal gaming state, and the derivation of the lottery result by the lottery means is shorter than the normal gaming state. Also has a period effect executing means capable of executing a series of display effects over a period in which the derivation of the lottery results is executed a plurality of times in the advantageous gaming state in which the derivation of the lottery result by the lottery means is relatively shortened. in the period in which the series of display effect by the period effect execution means is capable of executing in the advantageous gaming state, and configured to execute a structure operation effect for operating said movable structure in the derivation of the extraction election results When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the player is notified that the movable structure is controlled to the special gaming state by operating the movable structure at the effect position, and the player is informed that the special gaming state is controlled. In the series of display effects that can be executed by the period effect executing means over a period in which the derivation of the lottery result is executed a plurality of times, the execution of the series of display effects is started with the end timing determined. In the advantageous gaming state, when the movable structure is moved to the effect position in order to notify the player that the special gaming state is controlled, the combination of decorative symbols is a specific combination in parallel. A game machine characterized in that it does not perform a symbol variation effect .

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame. It is a rear perspective view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the figure of (A) viewed from below. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the operation of the lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view seen from the right rear of the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of a door frame seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in a door frame base unit from the rear. It is an enlarged perspective view which shows the state of the wiring which electrically connects a door frame and a main body frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the right side decoration unit disassembled and viewed later. (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decoration unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the left side decoration unit disassembled and viewed later. It is sectional drawing of the left side decoration unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the light emitting mode of the left side decoration unit by a photograph. It is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the upper decoration unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the upper decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. It is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in a door frame. (A) is a front view showing the periphery of the slit-shaped notch, and (B) is a plan view showing the periphery of the slit-shaped notch. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit and looked at afterwards. It is sectional drawing which cut at the part of the ball-renting unit of the dish unit in a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the upper right front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation unit and looked at from the lower right front. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the pressing operation part in the operation unit in a pressed state. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device disassembled and viewed from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a front view which shows with the front cover of a foul cover unit removed. It is a front view of the antistatic mechanism. It is a perspective view when the door frame which shows the state which provided the antistatic mechanism is seen from the back. It is a rear view of the main part of the door frame which shows the state which provided the antistatic mechanism. FIG. 5 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. It is a rear view of the ball feed unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit after removing the rear case. (A) is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feed unit, (B) is a front view of the fraud prevention member, (C) is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member as viewed from the front, and (D). Is an explanatory view showing the operation of the fraud prevention member. It is sectional drawing which shows by cutting the door frame substantially in the center in the vertical direction. It is a front view which shows the arrangement of LED for light-emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view which shows the system of LED for light emitting decoration in a door frame. It is a front view of the main body frame. It is a rear view of the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. It is a left side view of the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and looked at from the front. It is a perspective view which disassembled the main body frame and looked at afterwards. It is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. It is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the prize ball unit and looked at later. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the rear by disassembling the relationship between a prize ball tank and a tank rail unit in a prize ball unit. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the prize ball device in a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in a prize ball device. It is sectional drawing which shows the rolling passage of a ball in a prize ball unit. It is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in a main body frame, and the foul cover unit in a door frame. It is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the substrate unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at after disassembling the substrate unit. It is a perspective view explaining the operation of the standing wall part of the power supply board box in a board unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. (A) is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the line AA shown in (A). (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing which shows the part of the fastening mechanism in the back cover enlarged. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the fastening mechanism in the back cover and looked at from the rear side. (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. (A) is a rear perspective view of the lock device, and (B) is a rear perspective view showing a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base of the lock device. It is a figure, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). It is an exploded perspective view after disassembling the lock device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the sliding rod for a glass door and the sliding rod for a main body frame in a locking device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the fraud prevention member in a lock device. It is a front view which shows the game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of a pachinko machine removed. It is a front view of a game board. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board and looked at later. (A) is an enlarged front view showing a function display unit in a game board while attached to a pachinko machine, and (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 105, which is viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. It is sectional drawing which cut the game panel in the game board of FIG. 108 in the vertical direction. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a front component of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 108, which is viewed from the front by disassembling. FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear. It is a partial cross-sectional view which shows the security structure on the shaft support side of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view seen from the rear side with the game board housed in the main body frame. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, and is a view in which a ball procession can be confirmed in front of the second prize opening. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is a perspective view seen diagonally from the rear by disassembling each of the main members constituting the game board. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in the main control board. It is a block diagram of a door frame base board, a peripheral side relay terminal board, an abnormal audio signal blocking board, and a lower speaker. It is a circuit diagram which shows the circuit of the abnormal audio signal cutoff board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power failure occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special control process. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot game start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the example of the ordinary control processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the example of the gate part passing processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the example of the normal symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the processing procedure about the example of the processing performed by the peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the 16ms steady-state processing which is executed every 16ms in the sub-main processing. It is a front view of the game board which shows an example of the production in the probability change time shortening game state. It is a front view of the game board which shows an example of the production in the probability change time shortening game state.

[Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine] Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 3 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame that make up the pachinko machine, and FIG. 7 is an outer frame, main body frame, and game board that make up the pachinko machine. , It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame.

In FIGS. 1 to 7, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is pivotally supported by an outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall and an outer frame 2 so that the front side is opened. A player has a box-shaped main body frame 3, a game board 4 having a game area 1100 mounted and fixed to the main body frame 3 from the front side and a game ball as a game medium is driven into the main body frame 3, and the front surface of the main body frame 3 and the game board 4. It is provided with a door frame 5 that is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3 so as to be closed from the side. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1, a game window 101 formed so that the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be seen from the player side, and a game ball arranged below the game window 101 are stored. It includes a plate-shaped upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and a handle device 500 operated by a player to drive a game ball stored in the upper plate 301 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4.

As shown in the figure, the housing of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in which the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 extend in the vertical direction, respectively, in the front view. The horizontal width in the horizontal direction is substantially the same, and the vertical width in the vertical direction is formed so that the dimensions of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are slightly shorter than those of the outer frame 2. A decorative cover 23 with decoration is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2 at a position below the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the front surface of the outer frame 2 is provided by the door frame 5 and the decorative cover 23. Is completely closed. Further, the outer frame 2, the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 are arranged so that the upper ends are substantially aligned with each other, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be rotated at a position on the front side of the left end of the outer frame 2. It is supported, and is opened by moving the right ends of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 to the front side with respect to the outer frame 2.

In the front view of the pachinko machine 1, a game area 1100 in which a game ball is driven through a substantially circular game window 101 is desired, and the pachinko machine 1 projects forward to the lower side of the game window 101. Two upper plates 301 and lower plates 302 are arranged one above the other. Further, a handle device 500 for the player to operate is arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 5, and the player operates the handle device 500 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301. When the rotation operation is performed, the game ball in the upper plate 301 is driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with the hitting strength corresponding to the rotation angle, and the game can be played.

Although the details will be described later, the game window 101 of the door frame 5 is closed by the transparent glass unit 590, and the player can visually recognize the inside of the game area 1100, but the player can see the inside of the game area 1100. It is not possible to touch the game ball, the obstacle nail, various winning openings, the accessory, etc. in the game area 1100 by inserting a hand or the like into the game area. Further, on the rear side of the main body frame 3, various control boards are provided, and a cover body 1250 that closes so as to cover the rear of the game board 4 is provided.

[Outer Frame] The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. FIG. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame. 11 is a rear perspective view of the outer frame, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure of the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame and the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame. 14 (A) is an exploded perspective view showing an attached state of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and (B) is a perspective view of the figure of (A) viewed from below. .. FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member. Further, FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and the left and right sides extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. The frame plates 12, 13 and four connecting members 14 for connecting the ends of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 are provided, and the connecting members 14 are used to connect the frame plates 10, 11, 12, 13 respectively. By connecting them together, they are assembled into a vertically long rectangular shape (square). The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in the outer frame 2 of this example are made of solid wood (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness, and are vertically and vertically located substantially in the center of the left and right ends in the front-rear direction. An engaging notch portion 15 is provided which penetrates the surface and is recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. A mounting step portion 10a recessed from other general surfaces is formed on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion of the upper frame plate 10, and the upper support metal fitting 20 described later is attached to the mounting step portion 10a. It has become like.

On the other hand, the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of a lightweight metal mold material (for example, an aluminum alloy) having a constant cross-sectional shape, the outer side surface is a substantially flat surface, and the inner side surface projects inward to the rear end portion. A projecting portion 16 having a cavity penetrating in the vertical direction (extrusion direction) is provided, and the strength and rigidity are enhanced (see FIGS. 9 and 113). In addition, a plurality of grooves extending in the vertical direction are formed on the outer side surface and the inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13, and when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island equipment of the game hall, the operator It can be used as a finger hook to make it easier to hold the pachinko machine 1, and the design of the appearance can be enhanced. For convenience, there is also a drawing in which a plurality of grooves formed on the side surfaces of the side frame plates 12 and 13 are omitted.

The connecting member 14 in the outer frame 2 of this example is formed by bending and plastically deforming a metal plate having a predetermined thickness by press molding or the like, and is fixed to the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11 in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped horizontal piece 17 extending vertically, a plate-shaped vertical piece 18 extending vertically from the outer end of the horizontal piece 17 to one side in the vertical direction and fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13, and the opposite of the vertical piece 18. It has a plate-shaped engaging piece 19 that extends in the direction and can be inserted and engaged in the engaging notch 15 of the upper frame plate 10 or the lower frame plate 11. In this example, the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the right side frame plate 13 are left-right asymmetrical, respectively. In addition to being formed in the shape of, the vertical piece 18 is formed separately in the front and rear. On the other hand, the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the left side frame plate 12 and the connecting member 14 that connects the lower frame plate 11 and the right side frame plate 13 are formed in symmetrical shapes. Has been done.

In the connecting member 14, the upper surface and the lower surface of the horizontal piece 17 are in contact with the lower surface and the upper surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, and the engaging piece 19 is an engaging notch of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame are screwed into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 by penetrating the horizontal piece 17 and the engaging piece 19 and screwing a predetermined screw into the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 in a state of being inserted and engaged in the portion 15. It is fixed to the plate 11. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the upper end inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected to each other. The vertical piece 18 on the rear side of the connecting member 14 fixed to the upper frame plate 10 is fixed to the side frame plates 12 and 13 in a state of being inserted into the protruding portions 16 of the side frame plates 12 and 13. It has become like. Further, the connecting member 14 fixed to the lower frame plate 11 penetrates the side frame plates 12 and 13 with a predetermined screw in a state where the vertical piece 18 is in contact with the lower end inner side surface of the side frame plates 12 and 13. Is screwed into the vertical piece 18, so that the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be connected, and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are connected by the four connecting members 14. , And the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be assembled in a frame shape.

The outer frame 2 of this example is arranged so as to face the upper support metal fitting 20 fixed to the upper surface of the left end of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper support metal fitting 20, and is fixed at a predetermined position inside the lower part of the left side frame plate 12. The lower support metal fitting 21 to be formed, the reinforcing metal fitting 22 arranged to support the lower surface of the lower support metal fitting 21 and fixed so as to connect the left and right side frame plates 12, 13 and fixed to the front surface of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. It is provided with a decorative cover 23. The upper support metal fitting 20 and the lower support metal fitting 21 are for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 so as to be openable and closable.

First, the upper support metal fitting 20 includes a plate-shaped fixing piece 20a fixed to the upper frame plate 10, a support projecting piece 20b protruding forward from the front end of the fixing piece 20a to the front end of the upper frame plate 10, and a support protrusion. A support hook hole 20c formed by being cut out from the right end near the front end of the piece 20b toward the center of the tip, and a side frame on the left side that hangs downward from the left end of the fixing piece 20a and the support projecting piece 20b. A plate-shaped hanging fixing piece 20d (see FIG. 14A) that abuts on the outer side surface of the plate 12, and a hanging wall 20e that hangs along the outer edge of the supporting protruding piece 20b that is continuous with the hanging fixing piece 20d (FIG. 14 (A)). 14) and a stop hanging portion 20f (see FIG. 15) that is continuous with the hanging wall 20e and is inclined inward at the inlet end of the support hook hole 20c. A shaft support pin 633 (see FIG. 68) of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 in the main body frame 3 described later is detachably engaged with the support hook hole 20c in the upper support metal fitting 20. Further, the upper support metal fitting 20 is configured to be able to connect the upper frame plate 10 and the left side frame plate 12 by the fixing piece 20a and the hanging fixing piece 20d.

In the upper support metal fitting 20, the strength of the support protrusion 20b is increased by the hanging wall 20e hanging from the outer edge of the support protrusion 20b, and the details will be described later, but when viewed from the front, the support protrusion 20b The lock member 27 arranged on the back surface of the lock member 27 can be concealed so as not to be visible from the player side, so that the appearance of the lock member 27 can be improved. Further, the support hook hole 20c formed in the support projecting piece 20b is bent in a dogleg shape so as to be inclined from the side on the opposite side (right side) where the hanging wall 20e is not formed toward the center of the tip. The width of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c is set to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 633.

On the other hand, the lower support metal fitting 21 is a horizontal fixing piece 21a that is placed and fixed on the reinforcing metal fitting 22, and a vertical fixing piece that rises upward from the left end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a and is fixed to the inner side surface of the left side frame plate 12. 21b, a plate-shaped support projecting piece 21c projecting forward from the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 from the front end of the horizontal fixing piece 21a, and a pin-shaped projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the support projecting piece 21c. The support projection 21d and the like are provided. The main body frame shaft support formed on the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 (see FIG. 71 and the like) of the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21. After inserting the support protrusion 21d of the support metal fitting 21 into the support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the main body frame 3, the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 is locked in the support hook hole 20c. As a result, the main body frame 3 can be easily opened and closed.

Further, in the outer frame 2 of this example, as shown in the figure, two closing plates 24 and 25 arranged apart from each other by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction are attached and fixed inside the right side frame plate 13. These closing plates 24 and 25 are formed in a substantially L shape in a plan view, and the closing plate 25 arranged on the lower side has a rectangular opening 25a penetrating in the front-rear direction (FIG. 9). The closing plates 24, 25 and the hook portion 1054, 1065 (see FIG. 98) of the lock device 1000, which is attached along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. The hook portion 1054, 1065 and the closing plates 24, 25 are disengaged by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it in one direction, which will be described in detail later. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a guide plate 26 fixed to the upper surface of the right end of the reinforcing metal fitting 22. The guide plate 26 is for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and is replaceably mounted and fixed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14 and the like, the outer frame 2 of this example further includes a lock member 27 supported on the back surface of the support projecting piece 20b in the upper support metal fitting 20, and is attached to the support projecting piece 20b by the rivet 28. On the other hand, it is rotatably supported. The lock member 27 is made of synthetic resin and is shorter than the stopper portion 27a that protrudes forward from the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 and the stopper portion 27a to the right from the position that is pivotally supported by the rivet 28. The operating portion 27b that protrudes, the elastic piece 27c that protrudes from the side opposite to the position pivotally supported by the rivet 28 with respect to the operating portion 27b, and the tip of the stopper portion 27a are formed so as to bulge forward. It is provided with an arc-shaped tip surface 27d. As shown in the figure, the lock member 27 is formed in a substantially L shape by the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b. Further, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is formed to have a width narrower than that of the stopper portion 27a and the operation portion 27b, and is formed so as to extend forward as the distance from the stopper portion 27a increases to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 14B and 15, when the lock member 27 is supported by the support protruding piece 20b of the upper support metal fitting 20 (normal state), the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 27c is a hanging wall. It is in contact with the inner surface of the 20e, and the stopper portion 27a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. The head space portion of the above is not closed, and a space is formed in the head space portion of the support hook hole 20c into which the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 can be inserted. ..

In the support mechanism of the shaft support pin 633 using the upper support metal fitting 20 and the lock member 27 of this example, the shaft support pin 633 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, and the stopper portion 27a A state in which the tip side faces the stop hanging portion 20f at the entrance end (in this state, there is a slight gap between the tip side side of the stopper portion 27a and the stop hanging portion 20f, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c formed by bending and the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a, respectively. The centers are offset in the diagonal direction and face each other. Then, in this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 633 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support hook hole 20c, so that the shaft support pin 633 Since the load on the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27. Since the tip of the stopper portion 27a is provided with an arcuate tip surface 27d, the lock member 27 rotates smoothly when the operation portion 27b is rotated to rotate the lock member 27. It has become. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the tip surface 27d is the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 633 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 27d, the acting force F is applied to the shaft support. The component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the tip surface 27d) acting on the contact portion between the pin 633 and the arc-shaped tip surface 27d, and one side of the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 633 and the support hook hole 20c. When the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface is divided, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 28 (the center of rotation of the lock member 27), so that the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 The moment for rotating the tip portion in the direction away from the support protrusion piece 20b (clockwise direction in the figure) does not work, and the shaft support pin 633 is attached to the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 and the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c. Holds the state of being sandwiched between the inner surface on one side. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 633 is applied to the lock member 27, the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27 is not constantly loaded, and the elasticity is integrally formed of the synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 27c, and prevent the shaft support pin 633 from falling out of the support hook hole 20c for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the tip of the stopper 27a of the lock member 27 is rotated in a direction away from the support protrusion 20b (clockwise in the figure), one side of the tip of the stopper 27a Does not rotate in the direction of contacting the stop hanging portion 20f and further disengaging, so that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 20b.

Even if the shape of the tip surface 27d of the stopper portion 27a is not arcuate, the tip portion of the lock member 27 faces the outside of the support protrusion piece 20b at a position where a rotational moment is not generated by the action of the above-mentioned component force F1. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 27 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 28) at a position where a rotational moment is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 27c of the lock member 27, and the lock member 27 is locked. The applicant applies that the lock member 27 does not protrude to the outside of the support protruding piece 20b because the one side of the tip of the stopper portion 27a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 20f even if the member 27 rotates. I'm checking.

The operation of the lock member 27 of this example will be specifically described with reference to FIG. As a premise that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, a lower support bracket is provided in a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) formed in the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 (see FIG. 68) of the main body frame 3. It is necessary that the support protrusion 21d of 21 is inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, by pushing the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 of the main body frame 3 into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27, FIG. As shown in 16 (B), since the lock member 27 rotates the elastic piece 27c counterclockwise while deforming it, the shaft support pin 633 can be inserted into the support hook hole 20c. Then, when the shaft support pin 633 reaches the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16C, the shaft support pin 633 and the tip side surface of the stopper portion 27a do not come into contact with each other. Therefore, the lock member 27 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 27a of the lock member 27 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 20c at the same time. The tip portion of the stopper portion 27a faces the shaft support pin 633 so that the shaft support pin 633 does not fall out of the support hook hole 20c.

Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 633 from the support hook hole 20c, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 20b, and the operation portion 27b of the lock member 27 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 27 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 27c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 27a is in a state of being retracted from the support hook hole 20c. Therefore, the shaft support pin 633 is supported by the support hook. It can be taken out from the hole 20c. After that, the main body frame 3 is lifted to disengage the main body frame shaft support hole formed in the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 from the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21, so that the main body frame 3 is attached to the outer frame 2 It can be removed from.

As described above, in the outer frame 2 of this example, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are made of wood as in the conventional case, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of lightweight metal ( For example, since it is an extruded material of aluminum alloy), when installing the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment lined up in the amusement park, it is necessary to perform the work of fixing it at a predetermined angle to the vertical surface of the island. However, since such work is performed by driving nails to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the island, it is possible to make the nails easier to drive, and the pachinko machine 1 can be installed on the existing island equipment without any problem. It can be installed. Further, since the side frame plates 12 and 13 are extruded materials of lightweight metal (for example, aluminum alloy), it is possible to form a thin wall thickness while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wooden outer frame. The left and right width when viewed from the front of the peripheral wall portion 605 (see FIG. 68 and the like) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 can be widened, and the game board 4 having a large size in the left and right direction. Can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and at the same time, the game area 1100 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

Further, the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer shell of the outer frame 2 are connected by the connecting member 14, and the connecting member 14 is the side frame plate 12 and 13. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surface and is fixed in a state where the connecting member 14, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the assembling strength of the outer frame 2 can be increased and it is sturdy. It can be used as a rectangular framework. Further, after connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 by the connecting member 14, when the upper support metal fitting 20 is attached to a predetermined position, as shown in FIG. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility in a game hall (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, for example) It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lending machine).

[Overall Configuration of Door Frame] Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 23. 17 is a front view of the door frame, FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame, and FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right. Further, FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the left front, and FIG. 21 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the right rear. Further, FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 23 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back.

As shown in the figure, the door frame 5 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a door frame having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and an inner peripheral shape having a slightly vertically long circular shape (elliptical shape). The base unit 100, the right side decoration unit 200 attached to the right outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the left side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 facing the right side decoration unit 200. It includes a left side decorative unit 240 attached to the outer periphery, and an upper decorative unit 280 attached to the upper outer periphery of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100.

Further, the door frame 5 penetrates the plate unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, the operation unit 400 attached to the upper center of the plate unit 300, and the plate unit 300. A handle device 500 attached to the lower right corner of the frame base unit 100 for driving a game ball, and a rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 arranged behind the dish unit 300 with the door frame base unit 100 in between. The foul cover unit 540 attached to the door frame, the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the foul cover unit 540, and the game window 101 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close. The glass unit 590 and the door are provided.

[Door Frame Base Unit] Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28. FIG. 24A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame, and FIG. 24B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame base board cover and the wiring holding member in the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 28 shows a state of wiring for electrically connecting the door frame and the main body frame. It is an enlarged perspective view.

As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 of this example has a door having a game window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner circumference is formed in a vertically long substantially elliptical shape so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The frame base main body 110, a pair of side speakers 130 arranged on both the lower left and right outer sides of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base main body 110, and a speaker bracket 132 for fixing the side speakers 130 to the door frame base main body 110. And a handle bracket 140 attached to the lower right corner of the front view on the front surface of the door frame base body 110 to support the handle device 500.

The door frame base unit 100 covers the side surface of the side speaker 130 and the front side of the wiring (not shown) connected to the right side decoration unit 200 or the like on the outside of the side speaker 130 on the right side when viewed from the front. A cover member 134 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 is further provided. The cover member 134 can guide the wiring along the outer circumference of the speaker mounting portion 111, and can hold the wiring so that the wiring does not get in the way when attaching or detaching the side speaker 130. It has become.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 is such that the metal frame-shaped reinforcing unit 150 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 and the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 cover the lower part of the game window 101. The security cover 180 to be attached, the glass unit locking member 190 rotatably attached to a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101 on the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the left side (open side) from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the rear. ), And the launch cover 191 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 along the lower end of the game window 101, and the rotation position of the handle device 500 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110 under the launch cover 191. A handle device relay board 192 that relays the connection between the detection sensor 512 and the main control board 4100, a handle device relay board cover 193 that covers the rear side of the handle device relay board 192, and a launch cover 191 that sandwiches the center in the left-right direction. Door frame base board 194, which is arranged on the opposite side of the handle device relay board 192, etc. (on the right side (shaft support side) from the center in the left-right direction in the rear view) and attached to the rear surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base. The door frame base board cover 195 that covers the rear side of the board 194, and the wiring 196 that is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the door frame base board cover 195 and connects the door frame 5 side and the main body frame 3 side (FIG. 28). A wiring holding member 197 that holds a part of the above) is provided.

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the rigidity of the entire door frame base unit 100 is increased by fixing a reinforcing unit 150 obtained by assembling a metal sheet metal with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition, it has enough strength to sufficiently support the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like.

The door frame base board 194 in the door frame base unit 100 is connected to the side speakers 130 and the upper speakers 222 and 262 of the left and right side decoration units 200 and 240, and is a peripheral control unit provided in the game board 4 described later. It is connected to the 4140 and includes an amplifier circuit that amplifies the acoustic signal sent from the peripheral control unit 4140 and outputs it to each speaker 130. In this example, the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the decorative boards 430, 432 provided on the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, the dial drive motors 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b provided on the operation unit 400, The wiring 196 that connects the 432c, the handle device relay board 192, the ball rental unit 360 of the dish unit 300, the payout control board 4110, the peripheral control unit 4140, etc. is on the right side (shaft support) of the door frame base board 194 in the rear view. After being aggregated and bundled at the position of (side), the details will be described later, but it is held by the wiring holding member 197 and extends backward, and the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the main body frame 3 (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the door frame base body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of this example is formed in a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin, and penetrates in the front-rear direction and has a vertically long inner shape. The substantially elliptical game window 101 is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. As shown in the figure, the game window 101 has a continuous smooth curved shape on the left and right side and an upper inner peripheral edge, while the lower inner peripheral edge is formed on a straight line extending to the left and right. ing. Further, on the inner peripheral edge of the door frame base body 110 on the lower side of the game window 101, a square notch 101a through which the first ball outlet 544a of the foul cover unit 540 can be inserted on the shaft support side (left side in front view). Is formed. The width of the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base body 110 formed by the game window 101 is the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base main body 110 in the front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a game area 1100 wider than that of the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become like.

In addition to the game window 101, the door frame base main body 110 is arranged on both the left and right outer sides of the lower side of the game window 101, and mounts and fixes the speaker mounting portion 111 for mounting and fixing the side speaker 130 and the ball feed unit 580. The ball feed unit mounting recess 112 (see FIG. 26) and the game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and is stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 to the ball feed unit 580. A ball feed opening 113 for supplying and a handle attachment for attaching the handle bracket 140, which is arranged in the lower right corner when viewed from the front and is inclined diagonally so that the right (open side) end of the front surface that bulges forward is retracted. The portion 114, the wiring passage port 115 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a predetermined position of the handle mounting portion 114 and allows the wiring from the handle device 500 to pass through, and a tubular shape that extends shortly forward on the upper side of the handle mounting portion 114. It is provided with a lock hole 116 which is formed and into which a cylinder lock 1010 described later can be inserted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 26, the door frame base body 110 includes a relay board mounting portion 117 for mounting the handle device relay board 192 on the lower side in the ball feed unit mounting recess 112, and the door frame base body 110 when viewed from the rear. The board mounting portion 118 for mounting the door frame base board 194, which is arranged on the lower right side (shaft support side), and the speaker mounting portion 111 on the left side (open side) of the lower end of the game window 101 when viewed from the rear.
The security cover mounting portion 119 for mounting the security cover 180 mounting elastic piece 185 and the door frame base body 110 projecting rearward from the arrangement closer to the center, substantially along the inner circumference of the game window 101 on the rear side. In order to rotatably support the glass unit support step 110a that is recessed to the front side and the front outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 590 can be brought into contact with the glass unit, and the glass unit locking member 190 that protrudes rearward from a predetermined position on the outer periphery of the game window 101. The two locking member mounting portions 110b and the like are further provided.

Further, the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a door frame projecting piece 110c projecting rearward by a predetermined amount from the lower side thereof, and the door frame projecting piece 110c is provided with an engaging groove 603 of the main body frame 3 described later. It is designed to be inserted inside. As a result, the door frame 5 can be positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3, and an illegal tool such as a piano wire can be inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the gap between the door frame 5 and the lower side of the main body frame 3. Even so, the door frame projecting piece 110c engaged with the engaging groove 603 can prevent the tool from entering, and the security function of the pachinko machine 1 is enhanced. Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, a positioning protrusion 110d that protrudes rearward from a position slightly lower right than the lock hole 116 when viewed from the rear and fits with the fitting groove 612 of the main body frame 3 is provided. By fitting the positioning protrusion 110d with the fitting groove 612, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are positioned at the correct positions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 25, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110e projecting forward for fixing the decorative units 200, 240, 280, the dish unit 300, and the like on the front surface thereof. At the same time, a large number of mounting holes for mounting the handle bracket 140 and the like are formed at appropriate positions. Further, in the door frame base main body 110, a mounting boss portion 110g for mounting the speaker bracket 132 for mounting the side speaker 130 and a mounting hole 110h for mounting the side speaker cover 338 (see FIG. 18 and the like) are appropriately positioned. It is formed in each.

Further, in the door frame base main body 110, between the ball feed unit mounting recess 112 and the board mounting portion 118, the lower plate ball supply port 310 g in the plate unit base 310 of the plate unit 300 and the foul cover unit 540, which will be described later, A rectangular ball passage port 110f penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a position corresponding to the two-ball outlet 544b.

Further, the door frame base main body 110 is formed on the upper side of the left and right speaker mounting portions 111 on the front side thereof, and includes a shallow dish-shaped security recess 120 recessed rearward in a substantially triangular shape. A security member 121 formed in a shallow box shape is inserted into the security recess 120 from the front side. The crime prevention member 121 is formed in a shallow box shape in which the front side is opened by bending a metal plate. As a result, in order to cheat the inside of the pachinko machine 1, for example, a hole is made from the joint portion between the side decoration units 200 and 240 and the dish unit 300 by a thin drill or the like. It can be prevented by the crime prevention member 121, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, although detailed illustration of the pair of side speakers 130 in the door frame base unit 100 is omitted, the intersection of the central axes thereof is a predetermined distance (for example, 0.2 m to 1) from the center of the game area 1100 to the front in front view. It is fixed diagonally so as to be at the position of .5 m), so that the sound reaches the player who is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 most efficiently. Further, the side speaker 130 is designed to mainly output sound in the mid-high range, and is arranged at a position as far as possible in the left-right direction from the pachinko machine 1, so that the left and right side speakers 130 can be used. By outputting related different sounds from the side speaker 130, it is possible to output a sound with a high stereo feeling.

The outer periphery of these side speakers 130 is sandwiched between a substantially annular speaker bracket 132 arranged on the front side and a speaker mounting portion 111 of the door frame base main body 110 arranged on the rear side, whereby the door frame It can be attached to the base body 110. The speaker bracket 132 can be attached to the attachment boss portion 110g of the door frame base main body 110 from the front side by a predetermined screw.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 to 27, the door frame base substrate cover 195 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a thin box shape with the front side open, and is vertically oriented on the rear surface on the rear side. It is provided with a stepped portion 195a that is recessed forward at a position slightly lower than the center of the door. The wiring holding member 197 is rotatably attached to the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the wiring holding member 197 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a plate shape extending in the lateral direction and has an I-shaped cross section. , It is made of a relatively hard synthetic resin. Further, as shown in the drawing, the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a plurality of holding holes 197a (three in each of the upper and lower sides in this example) at predetermined intervals along the longitudinal direction at both upper and lower ends. In the wiring holding member 197, the end portion on the side where the door frame 5 is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 in the state where the door frame 5 is assembled is vertically attached to the step portion 195a on the rear surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. It is rotatably supported around the extended shaft, and although detailed illustration is omitted, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 rotates toward the door frame base board cover 195 side, so that the wiring holding member 197 can be formed. It can be accommodated in the step portion 195a of the door frame base substrate cover 195.

The wiring holding member 197 has a predetermined binding band in the holding holes 197a paired up and down with the wiring 196 for electrically connecting the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 along the rear surface side. The wiring 196 can be held by inserting the 198 and tightening the wiring 196 together with the wiring holding member 197 by the binding band 198 (see FIGS. 1 and 28).

When the wiring holding member 197 of this example is rotated with respect to the main body frame 3 in the direction of closing the door frame 5, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 extends from the free end side of the wiring 196 to the main body frame 3. The door frame is pushed forward and rotates in a direction approaching the door frame base substrate cover 195 side. As a result, as the door frame 5 is closed, the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 approaches the door frame base substrate cover 195, and the wiring 196 extending from the free end of the wiring holding member 197 to the main body frame 3 side is free end. The bend becomes large (sharp) in the vicinity. Then, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring 196 is folded in two in the lateral direction on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197.

On the other hand, when the door frame 5 closed to the main body frame 3 is opened, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are relatively far apart, so that the wiring is held by the wiring 196 connected to the main body frame 3 side. The free end side of the member 197 is pulled backward, and the wiring holding member 197 rotates smoothly so that the free end side moves away from the door frame base substrate cover 195 (direction of the main body frame 3). As a result, the wiring 196 folded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197 is expanded so as to extend straight, and the door frame 5 can be opened without being hindered by the wiring 196.

As described above, according to this example, the door frame base board cover 195 moves the end portion of the wiring holding member 197 on the same side as the side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported so that the free end side moves toward the main body frame 3. A part of the wiring 196 that electrically connects the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 is held so as not to move in the vertical direction while being rotatably supported on the rear surface. On the other hand, when opening and closing the door frame 5, the wiring 196 can be laterally folded and unfolded on the free end side of the wiring holding member 197, and the wiring 196 is caught or pinched when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. It is possible to prevent problems (disconnection of wiring 196, disconnection of connection connector, etc.) from occurring.

Further, according to this example, since the wiring holding member 197 is formed of a relatively hard and highly rigid synthetic resin, even if a force acts through the wiring 196 when opening and closing the door frame 5, it moves up and down. It is possible to prevent the wiring from blurring in the direction, and the wiring 196 can be reliably folded in the lateral direction to prevent the occurrence of a defect.

Further, as described above, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 makes a state in which a bridge is built between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5, and the wiring 196 Since a part of the wiring is bridged by the wiring holding member 197, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down even if the door frame 5 is opened and closed, and the wiring 196 hangs down and is caught by another member to break the wire. It is possible to prevent problems such as wiring and the door frame 5 from being unable to be closed, and the main control board 4100, peripheral control unit 4140, payout control board 4110, etc. as the main body side electrical equipment, and the door side. There is a problem with the wiring 196 that connects each decorative board 214,216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, speaker 130, 222, 262, ball rental unit 360, handle device 500, etc. as electrical equipment. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the occurrence of the above as much as possible.

Further, a part of the wiring 196 is held by the rotatable wiring holding member 197, and even if the wiring 196 is forcibly pulled when the door frame 5 is opened, the wiring holding member 197 rotates. Since the force can be released, it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from being pulled and causing a problem such as disconnection or disconnection of the connector. it can. Further, since a part of the wiring 196 is held by the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 is only partially bent with the rotation of the wiring holding member 197, the conventional one (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-23675). ), The wiring 196 does not slide, and it is possible to prevent the wiring 196 from rubbing and causing problems such as electric leakage and disconnection.

Further, in the wiring holding member 197, the binding band 198 is inserted into a plurality of penetrating holding holes 197a arranged at predetermined intervals in the longitudinal direction, and the wiring 196 is held by the binding band 198. It is possible to prevent the held binding band 198 from moving (sliding) in the longitudinal direction of the wiring holding member 197 by the holding hole 197a, and reliably prevent the wiring 196 from falling off from the wiring holding member 197 together with the binding band 198. can do.

Further, even if the position where the wiring 196 extends from the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is arranged at a position away from the side side on which the door frame 5 is pivotally supported, the wiring 196 is provided by the wiring holding member 197 as described above. Since it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the wiring 196 from hanging down when the door frame 5 is opened and closed by guiding the door frame 5, the main body frame 3 having increased strength and rigidity on the side side of the door frame 5 supported by the shaft. The door frame 5 and the door frame 5 can be used, and the pachinko machine 1 having high crime prevention against fraudulent activities can be used.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with ridges protruding from both ends in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction at least toward the side along which the wiring 196 is aligned, wiring is performed by a pair of ridges and the plate surface of the wiring holding member 197. It is possible to surround the three sides of the 196, and it is possible to easily hold the wiring 196 along the wiring holding member 197. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided with a ridge, the bending rigidity of the plate-shaped wiring holding member 197 can be increased, and the wiring holding member 197 is prevented from bending when the door frame 5 is opened and closed. Therefore, the door frame 5 can be opened and closed in good condition.

Further, the length from the base end to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is set to be substantially the same as the distance from the axis of the door frame 5 to the axis of the base end, and the main body frame 3 in the wiring 196 is extended. The predetermined position is the position on the axial center side of the door frame 5 with respect to the tip of the wiring holding member 197 in the state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, and the axial center of the door frame 5 and the wiring holding member. Since a pantograph-shaped link is formed at the axis of 197, the tip of the wiring holding member 197, and the position where the wiring 196 extends in the main body frame 3, wiring when opening and closing the door frame 5 The movement of the holding member 197, the wiring 196, etc. can be smoothed, and the opening / closing work can be facilitated. At the same time, the application of an unreasonable force to the wiring 196, etc. is reduced, and problems such as disconnection occur. Can be prevented. Further, a pantograph-shaped link is formed, and when the door frame 5 is closed, the portion of the wiring 196 extending from the tip of the wiring holding member 197 is folded back on the tip side along the wiring holding member 197. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring 196 can be folded and compactly assembled, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be reduced.

Further, the door frame base board cover 195 of the door frame 5 that pivotally supports the wiring holding member 197 is recessed so as to open toward the main body frame 3 side with the door frame 5 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. A step portion 195a capable of accommodating the wiring holding member 197 is provided, and when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame base board cover 195. Since it is housed in the portion 195a, the protrusion of the wiring holding member 197 from the door frame 5 side to the main body frame 3 side can be almost eliminated, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring holding member 197 can be easily closed. The wiring 196 can be compactly organized, and the wiring 196 can be prevented from being caught by other members to prevent a problem from occurring.

Further, the wiring 196 is held with respect to the main body frame 3 with the door frame 5 closed along the surface of the wiring holding member 197 facing the main body frame 3 side. When the door frame 5 is closed, the wiring holding member 197 can be brought as close as possible to the door frame 5 side (door frame base board cover 195 side). Therefore, the wiring from the door frame 5 is also possible. The protrusion of the holding member 197 can be reduced, the door frame 5 can be easily closed, and the space related to the wiring holding member 197 and the wiring 196 can be made as small as possible.

Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided on the door frame 5 side for moving (opening / closing), the wiring holding member 197 can be easily rotated by an inertial force or an impact force for opening / closing the door frame 5, which is described above. It is possible to surely produce the effect. Further, since the wiring holding member 197 is provided in the door frame 5 and it is not necessary to secure a space for providing the wiring holding member 197 in the main body frame 3, a space for relatively holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 is provided. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of holding a game board 4 having a larger game area 1100 by increasing the size, and having a large game board 4 and strongly attracting the attention of the player. it can.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the handle bracket 140 in the door frame base unit 100 has a cylindrical tubular portion 141 extending in the front-rear direction and a shaft of the tubular portion 141 from the rear end of the tubular portion 141. On the other hand, an annular flange portion 142 extending outward in the perpendicular direction and a plurality of (three in this example) ridges protruding into the tubular portion 141 and arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. It is provided with 143 and reinforcing ribs 144 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 141 and the front surface of the flange portion 142 and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 141. The handle bracket 140 is attached to the handle mounting portion 114 with a predetermined screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 142 is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting portion 114 in the door frame base main body 110. Although not shown, the shaft of the tubular portion 141 substantially coincides with the wiring passage port 115 in the state of being attached to the handle mounting portion 114.

The handle bracket 140 is provided with one ridge 143 on the upper side and two ridges 143 on the lower side in the tubular portion 141, and these ridges 143 are formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical portion of the handle base 502 in the handle device 500. It is arranged and formed at a position corresponding to the three groove portions 502a. Then, the cylindrical portion of the handle device 500 can be inserted into the tubular portion 141 only when the three ridges 143 of the handle bracket 140 and the three groove portions 502a of the handle device 500 match. There is. Therefore, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 inserted and supported by the handle bracket 140 is supported in a state in which it cannot rotate relative to the handle bracket 140.

By attaching the handle bracket 140 to the diagonally inclined handle mounting portion 114, the shaft of the tubular portion 141 is mounted so as to extend toward the right side (open side) as it faces forward in front view. The shaft of the handle device 500 supported by the handle bracket 140 in this state is also tilted at an angle.

Subsequently, the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110 and a door frame base main body, mainly as shown in FIGS. 25 and 26. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 attached along the back surface of the shaft support side side portion 110, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 attached along the back surface of the open side side portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110. It is provided with a lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 that is attached along the lower back surface of the game window 101, and they are fastened to each other with screws, rivets, or the like to form a square shape.

As shown in FIG. 25, the reinforcing unit 150 has an upper shaft support portion 156 having a shaft pin 155 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. It is integrally provided with a lower shaft branch 158 having a shaft pin 157 (see FIG. 18). Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 155 and 157 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fittings 630 and the lower shaft support metal fittings 640 formed above and below the shaft support side of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. It is designed to be pivotally supported so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and is formed on the lower long side edge of the long side edge thereof. A lower bent projectile 159 bent forward (see FIG. 25) and an upper bent projectile 160 bent forward toward the right side (open side) of the upper long side edge in front view. A vertically bent projecting piece 161 that is bent rearward and extended in the vertical direction is provided at the central portion of the upper long side edge. The strength of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is increased by the lower bent projectile piece 159, the upper bent projecting piece 160, and the like. Further, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed so as to engage and lock with the locking piece 592b formed at the lower end of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, which will be described later. When the unit 590 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5, the vertically bent projecting piece 161 locks the locking piece 592b of the unit frame 592 in the glass unit 590, so that the lower end of the glass unit 590 moves in the left-right direction. It is possible to regulate the movement to the rear. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 is formed with a notch 162 that substantially corresponds to the notch 101a of the door frame base main body 110.

Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153 of the reinforcing unit 150 includes an open side outer bent projecting piece 163 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. It is provided with an open side inwardly bent projectile 164, and as shown in the figure, the open side inwardly bent projectile 164 is formed so as to extend backward longer than the open side outer bent projectile 163. ing. Further, a hook cover 165 that comes into contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later, is provided in the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is provided with a U-shaped shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 that extends rearward to the outer end of the long side thereof and is open to the outside of the shaft support side (FIG. FIG. See 113). Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 is provided with bent projecting pieces 167 bent rearward on both sides of its long side.

Since the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150 is mounted and supported only at two points above and below the upper shaft support portion 156 and the lower shaft support portion 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side If an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a bar is inserted between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large and illegal. Although there is a risk that the action may be facilitated, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of this example is provided with the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166, so that the strength of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is further increased. , The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is difficult to bend. Further, in the shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152, the front end piece 952b of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 described later is inserted into the U shape (FIG. (Refer to 113), it is possible to prevent the insertion of the tool, and it is possible to prevent only the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 from bending, so that the crime prevention function of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

Next, the security cover 180 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26. The security cover 180 is provided with a security function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 590 to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. It is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 590 arranged between the reinforcing sheets 152 and 153 of the above, and the upper side portion thereof is formed in an arc shape substantially along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 1112 of the game board 4. It includes a formed contact recess 181 and a security rear projection piece 182 that projects rearward along the upper end of the contact recess 181. Further, both the left and right ends of the security cover 180 are provided with security rear end projecting pieces 183 that project rearward along the shape of the ends. It should be noted that the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the right side (shaft support side) in the rear view is in a form of extending backward longer than the crime prevention rear end projecting piece 183 on the opposite side (open side). On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 180, a security front projecting piece 184 projecting along the downward shape of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 with the security cover 180 attached, and left and right outside the security front projecting piece 184. A U-shaped mounting elastic piece 185 that projects forward is provided at the lower end of the.

In this security cover 180, the mounting elastic piece 185 on the right side (open side) is mounted on the security cover mounting portion 119 of the door frame base unit 100 when viewed from the front, and the mounting elastic piece 185 on the opposite side (shaft support side) is mounted on the plate. By attaching it to the security cover attachment portion 364 of the unit 300, it can be detachably attached to the back surface side of the door frame 5. In the state where the security cover 180 is attached to the door frame 5, detailed illustration is omitted, but the security front projection piece 184 is fitted to the lower outer circumference of the unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590, and is also fitted. The rear surface of the lower end portion of the unit frame 592 comes into contact with the vertically bent projecting piece 161. Further, when the door frame 5 is closed, the crime prevention rear projection piece 182 projecting rearward is inserted into the lower side surface of the inner rail 1112 whose shaft support side half is fixed to the game board 4, and the open side half is front. It is in a state of being inserted into the rail security groove 1118 of the inner rail 1112 of the component member 1110. As a result, even if an illegal tool is to be intruded into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, the intrusion can be prevented by the crime prevention rear projection piece 182 inserted under the inner rail 1112. ..

Since the security cover 180 can cover the lower front portion of the ball striking guide passage formed by the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 with the door frame 5 closed by the back surface thereof. , It is possible to prevent the hit ball that flies or reverses the guide passage portion from colliding with the glass plate 594.

As a result, in this example, since the security cover 180 covers the outer periphery of the lower rear side of the glass unit 590 (game window 101) in the door frame 5, the game window 101 and the glass unit 590 are displayed from the front side of the door frame 5. Insert a highly flexible tool between the doors and inside the pachinko machine 1 (game area 1)
Even if you try to cheat on (within 100), the security cover 180 can prevent the tool from entering, and you can make the pachinko machine 1 more safe against cheating. ing.

Subsequently, the four glass unit locking members 190 in the door frame base unit 100 are rotatably fitted to the locking member mounting portion 110b protruding rearward from the door frame base main body 110 with the fitting portion 190a. A locking piece 190b for locking the locking projecting piece 451f of the glass unit 590 extending in a direction perpendicular to the axial direction of the fitting portion 190a is provided. In the glass unit locking member 190, a retaining screw is fixed to the tip of the locking member mounting portion 110b in a state where the locking member mounting portion 110b of the door frame base main body 110 penetrates the fitting portion 190a. By doing so, it is rotatably supported by the locking member mounting portion 110b.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the locking piece 190b of the glass unit locking member 190 has a ridge protruding rearward, and the ridge rotates when the glass unit 590 is attached or detached. It is a finger hook when operating.

Further, the launch cover 191 of the door frame base unit 100 is fixed to the rear side of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the reinforcing unit 150. Further, the handle device relay board cover 193 and the door frame base board cover 195 are fixed at predetermined positions on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, respectively. When the launch cover 191 and the handle device relay board cover 193 and the ball feed unit 580 are attached to the door frame base unit 100, their rear surfaces are substantially identical to each other. It is possible to cover the front surface of the ball launching device 650 attached to the main body frame 3.

[Right Side Decorative Unit] Next, the right side decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 to 31. FIG. 29A is a front perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame, and FIG. 29B is a rear perspective view of the right side decoration unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the right side decorative unit disassembled and viewed later.

As shown in the figure, the right side decoration unit 200 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the right half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, and the inside is the game window 101. It is formed in an arc shape along the outside, and the outside is formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100. The right side decoration unit 200 includes a side lens 210 that forms an outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200 and has a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a side inner lens 212 that is arranged behind the side lens 210. The decorative substrate 214 on the right side, which is arranged from the substantially center to the upper side in the vertical direction on the rear side of the side inner lens 212 and has a plurality of LEDs 214a (full color LED) and 214b (white LED) mounted on the surface, and the side inner on the lower side. The rear side of the right side lower decorative substrate 216 and the right side upper decorative substrate 214, which are arranged from substantially the center to the lower side of the lens 212 in the vertical direction and have a plurality of LEDs 216a (full color LED) and 216b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The right side upper decorative board cover 218 attached to the side inner lens 212 so as to sandwich the right side upper decorative board 214, and the side so as to cover the rear side of the right side lower decorative board 216 and sandwich the right side lower decorative board 216. It includes a lens 210 and a decorative substrate cover 220 on the lower right side that is attached to the side outer cover 202.

Further, the right side decoration unit 200 is arranged on the front surface of the side lens 210 and at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 with the side outer cover 202 attached to the upper right corner of the side lens 210, and is an abbreviation for the game window 101. A plurality of side flash lenses 204 extending radially around the center, a side upper inner lens 206 arranged between the upper left portion of the side inner lens 212 and the side lens 210, and a side upper inner lens 206 are side inner lenses. It includes an inner lens bracket 208 for attaching to 212, and an upper right speaker 222 attached to the upper side inner lens 206.

In the right side decorative unit 200, a side outer cover 202, a side flash lens 204, a side upper inner lens 205, an inner lens bracket 208, a side lens 210, and a side inner lens 212 are formed of a translucent member. The side outer cover 202, the side upper inner lens 205, the inner lens bracket 208, the side lens 210, and the side inner lens 212 are substantially colorless and transparent, and the side flash lens 204 is colored and transparent (red in this example).

Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the surfaces of the side inner lens 212 and the side upper inner lens 206 so that light can be diffusely refracted. Therefore, the LEDs 214a and 214b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged behind the side lens 210, the side inner lens 212, and the upper side inner lens 206. The 216a, 216b, etc. cannot be clearly seen from the player side. Further, the front surface of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 is white, and the right side decorative unit 200 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the mounted LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a, 216b and the like. In addition to being able to do this, the decorative substrates 214 and 216 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 214a, 214b, 216a and 216b are not lit. The upper right side decorative substrate 214 and the lower right decorative substrate 216 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, and 216a are connected by a drive signal (light emission drive signal) from the peripheral control unit 4140. , 216b can be appropriately made to emit light, and the right side decoration unit 200 can be made to emit light.

As shown in the figure, the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 of this example has the right end and the upper end formed in a straight line along the outer circumference of the door frame base main body 110 when viewed from the front, and the left end is the game window 101. It is formed in a curved shape along the outer circumference on the right side of the door. The side lens 210 includes a peripheral lens portion 210a composed of a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, and a plurality of peripheral lens portions 210a that are divided into a plurality in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and extend substantially concentrically with the game window 101. It is provided with a radiation lens portion 210b made of the prism surface of the above. As shown in the figure, the plurality of radiation lens portions 210b of the side lens 210 are formed so as to extend above the radiation centered on the lower center of the game window 101 in front view, and are formed from the front surface of the peripheral lens portion 210a. Is also formed in a state of being recessed rearward, and the side flash lens 204 is inserted into the recess.

Further, the side lens 210 is provided with a side diffusion lens portion 210c extending in the front-rear direction and arranged in the vertical direction on the right side surface. The side diffusing lens portion 210c makes it possible to widely diffuse the light from the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 in the right direction and the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. Although detailed illustration is omitted, a plurality of through holes are formed in the portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the lower side of the upper right speaker, so that the sound from the upper right speaker can be satisfactorily transmitted to the player side. It is designed to be transmitted.

The side inner lens 212 is substantially colorless and transparent, and is inserted and fitted into the side lens 210 from the rear side. As shown in the figure, a portion of the side lens 210 corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a is formed in a wrinkle shape. In addition, the portion corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b is formed in a flat surface shape. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, in the side inner lens 212, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed in a wrinkled portion corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 and protruding forward. The side inner lens 212 can diffusely refract and reflect light by the wrinkled portion and a plurality of small diameter lenses, and cooperates with the side lens 210 arranged on the front side to make the appearance of the right side decoration unit 200 glitter. At the same time, it is possible to make the perspective look unclear and mysterious.

The right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 of the right side decorative unit 200 have a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs mounted on their surfaces, and are arranged at positions corresponding to the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210. As the LEDs 214a and 216a, those having a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) are used, and the LEDs 214b and 216b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portion 210b of the side lens 210 are relatively irradiated. A lens having a narrow angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used. The LED 214c of the decorative substrate 214 on the right side is a red and green LED in this example.

The upper right speaker 222 of the right side decoration unit 200 outputs sound in the mid-high range like the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position by a side upper inner lens 206 in a predetermined direction. ing. The side upper inner lens 206 that supports the upper right speaker 222 is provided with a cylindrical horn portion that extends diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front, and is provided on the back side of the upper end of the horn portion. The upper right speaker 222 is fixed so that the upper right speaker 222 cannot be seen from the player side when viewed from the front.

The upper right speaker 222 of this example is emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player by the horn part of the upper side inner lens 206, and is caused by noise with respect to other pachinko machines. It has become difficult to do. Similar to the side inner lens 212, the front side of the side upper inner lens 206 is also formed in a wrinkled shape, and a plurality of small diameter lenses are formed in a mountain portion protruding forward in the wrinkled portion. The wrinkled portion and a plurality of small-diameter lenses allow light to be diffusely refracted and diffusely reflected.

The side flash lens 204 of the right side decoration unit 200 is inserted and arranged on the front side of the radiation lens portion 210b recessed to the rear of the side lens 210, and imitates a rugged rocky area by a plurality of spindle-shaped curved surfaces. It is possible to add an accent to the side lens 210. Further, the side flash lens 204 can produce a radial light emission effect by emitting light from the LEDs 214b and 216a of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 and the right side lower decorative substrate 216 arranged on the rear side, and the peripheral lens portion 210a. Can be divided in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 to emphasize each of them.

[Left Side Decorative Unit] Next, the left side decoration unit 240 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 36. FIG. 32 (A) is a front perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 32 (B) is a rear perspective view of the left side decorative unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the left side decorative unit as viewed after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 35 is a cross-sectional view of the left side decorative unit, and FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a light emitting mode of the left side decorative unit with a photograph.

As shown in the figure, the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 in the present embodiment decorates the left half of the front outer circumference of the game window 101 excluding the lower part in the front view, and the right side is the game window 101. Along with the arc shape, the left side and the upper side are formed linearly along the outer circumference of the door frame base unit 100, and are asymmetrically formed with the right side decoration unit 200. The left side decoration unit 240 has an elliptical shape arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and the large window frames 242a having a width substantially the same as the width of the right side decoration unit 200. A frame-shaped lower side decorative frame 242 having the small window frame 242b of the above, two large window frames 244a which are continuously arranged on the upper side of the lower side decorative frame 242 in the circumferential direction of the game window 101, and a large window frame 244a. It includes a frame-shaped side upper decorative frame 244 having one elliptical small window frame 244b arranged between the window frames 244a.

Further, the left side decorative unit 240 has a side flash lens 246 fitted from the rear side with respect to the small window frames 242b and 244b of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side flash lens 246 on the rear side. A transparent side lens 250 having a plurality of peripheral lens portions 250a fitted from the rear side with respect to the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244, and the side lens 250. An inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side of the peripheral lens portion 250a and having a plurality of slits 251a extending in the circumferential direction of the game window 101 and having a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface, and the rear side of the inner decorative member 251. It is provided with a side inner lens 252 having a diffusion portion 252a formed by a plurality of strip-shaped lenses extending radially around the lower left and right center of the game window 101.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the side inner lens 252 from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the upper side, and a plurality of LEDs 254a (full color LED) and 254b (white LED) are mounted on the surface of the left side decoration unit 240. A substrate 254 and a decorative substrate 256 on the lower left side, which is arranged on the lower side from substantially the center of the side inner lens 252 in the vertical direction and has a plurality of LEDs 256a (full-color LED) and 256b (white LED) mounted on the surface. The left side upper decorative board cover 258, which covers the rear side of the left side upper decorative board 254 and is attached to the side inner lens 252 so as to sandwich the left side upper decorative board 254, and the left side, which covers the rear side of the left side lower decorative board 256. It includes a left side lower decorative board cover 260 attached to the side lens 250 so as to sandwich the lower decorative board 256.

Further, the left side decoration unit 240 is a transparent transparent unit 240 that supports the upper left speaker 262 arranged on the front side of the side inner lens 252 and on the upper right portion of the front view and the upper left speaker 262 and is attached to the front upper right portion of the side inner lens 252. A diffuser formed by a plurality of strip-shaped lenses attached to the front surface of the upper speaker bracket 264 and the upper speaker bracket 264, inserted from the rear side into the inner decorative member 251 on the upper right side of the front view, and extending radially around the lower left and right centers. It includes an upper right inner lens 266 having 266a. The upper left speaker 262 is attached to the upper speaker bracket 264 so as to sandwich a protective plate 268 made of a metal plate capable of transmitting sound.

In the left side decorative unit 240, the lower side decorative frame 242, the upper side decorative frame 244, the upper left side decorative substrate cover 258, and the lower left side decorative substrate cover 260 are formed of a translucent member, and the inner The surface of the decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer of a predetermined color (silver in this example). Further, the side flash lens 246 is translucent and is entirely made of a milky white synthetic resin. The side lens 250, the side inner lens 252, the upper speaker bracket 264, and the upper right inner lens 266 are made of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin.

In this example, the small windows on both sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b in the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 (small windows with respect to the radial axis direction centered on the lower left and right center of the game window 101). On both sides of the frames 242b and 244b), opening frames 242c and 244c are formed so as to penetrate to the side surfaces of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 in a notched state, and the small window frames 242b and 244b and The opening frames 242c and 244c on both sides are closed by the side flash lens 246 from the rear side. Therefore, from the player side, the rear sides of the small window frames 242b and 244b and the opening frames 242c and 244c of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 cannot be visually recognized by the milky white side flash lens 246. ..

On the other hand, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 is inserted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 to be closed, and the transparent peripheral lens portion is closed. The inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side through the 250a can be visually recognized from the player side. A diffusing portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is located on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251. Light is diffusely refracted by the diffusing portion 252a to pass through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and behind the side inner lens 252. The side cannot be clearly seen. That is, the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b mounted on the surface (front surface) of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lens 252 through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. Etc. are not clearly visible from the player side.

Further, the front surface of the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 is white, and the left side decorative unit 240 is efficiently emitted and decorated by the mounted LEDs such as 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b. In addition to being able to do so, the decorative substrates 254 and 256 are inconspicuous when the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a and 256b are not lit. The upper left side decorative substrate 254 and the lower left decorative substrate 256 are connected to the peripheral control unit 4140, respectively, and the LEDs 254a, 254b, 256a, and 256b are driven by drive signals (light emission drive signals) from the peripheral control unit 4140. Can be appropriately emitted to emit light to decorate the left side decoration unit 240.

The side lower decoration frame 242 in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example has a form extending in the vertical direction along the left outer circumference of the game window 101, and is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the rear side open. The side lower decorative frame 242 is arranged between a plurality of large window frames 242a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction and the large window frames 242a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a window frame 242b and an opening frame 242c arranged on both sides of the small window frame 242b (on the game window 101 side and outside the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side surface, and is made of synthetic resin. It is formed.

In the side lower decorative frame 242, the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 242a from the rear side, and the side flash lens 246 corresponding to the small window frame 242b and the opening frame 242c. Is fitted from the rear side. That is, the side lower decorative frame 242 can form the peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively.

Further, the side upper decorative frame 244 in the left side decorative unit 240 has a substantially triangular shape in front view extending from the upper left outer circumference to the upper outer circumference of the game window 101 continuously to the upper end of the side lower decorative frame 242. It is formed in a U-shaped cross section with the side open. The side upper decorative frame 244 is a substantially elliptical small window frame arranged between two large window frames 244a extending along the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction and the large window frames 244a and penetrating in the front-rear direction. It is provided with 244b and an opening frame 244c arranged on both sides of the small window frame 244b (on the side of the game window 101 and outside of the pachinko machine 1) and penetrating in the front-rear direction and notched to the side surface, and is formed of synthetic resin. ing.

In this side upper decorative frame 244, the peripheral lens portion 250a corresponding to the side lens 250 is fitted into the large window frame 244a from the rear side, and the side flash lens corresponding to the small window frame 244b and the opening frame 244c. The 246 is fitted from the rear side. That is, the decorative frame 244 on the side can form the peripheral frame of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the corresponding side lens 250 and the outer peripheral frame of the side flash lens 246, respectively. The side upper decorative frame 244 forms a continuous design with the side lower decorative frame 242 when assembled as the left side decorative unit 240.

In this example, the lower side decorative frame 242 and the upper side decorative frame 244 are colored black, and the side lenses facing from the large window frames 242a and 244a, the small window frames 242b and 244b, and the opening frames 242c and 244c. The 250 and the side flash lens 246 are emphasized and visible.

Further, the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 has a size obtained by combining the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244, and has a size extending to the left side of the center on the left side and the upper side of the game window 101. There is. The side lens 250 has a shape in which the peripheral lens portion 250a fitted from the rear side into the large window frames 242a and 244a of the side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 and the peripheral lens portion 250a are recessed to the rear side. It is provided with a radiation lens portion 250b formed on the front side and a side flash lens 246 is arranged on the front side. The side lens 250 is formed by one curved surface in which the peripheral lens portion 250a is smoothly curved, and the radial lens portion 250b is formed by a substantially flat surface. Further, the side lens 250 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the rear side can be visually recognized.

Further, the inner decorative member 251 in the left side decorative unit 240 is arranged behind each peripheral lens portion 250a in the side lens 250, and includes a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer periphery of the game window 101 and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing. As shown in the figure, the inner decorative member 251 also has a plurality of slits 251a extending along the outer circumference of the game window 101 and concentrically centered on the center of the game window 101 in the width direction thereof. Multiple are provided. Further, in the inner decorative member 251, the front surface on which the plurality of slits 251a are formed is formed in a curved shape substantially along the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250. The inner decorative member 251 of this example has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface, and can be visually recognized from the player side through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250. ..

Further, the side inner lens 252 in the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the rear side of the inner decoration member 251 and has substantially the same size and outer shape as the side lens 250, and is formed of a substantially colorless and transparent synthetic resin. There is. The side inner lens 252 is formed with a diffused portion 252a that bulges forward so that a portion corresponding to the inner decorative member 251 is inserted into each inner decorative member 251 from the rear side. The diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 is formed with a plurality of band-shaped lenses extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 on the front surface, and the inner band-shaped lens is arranged in the extending direction on the front side. It intersects (substantially orthogonally) with respect to the extending direction of the slit 251a of the decorative member 251.

In the side inner lens 252, the diffuser portion 252a is visible from the player side through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251. However, the light is diffusely refracted by the plurality of band-shaped lenses formed in the diffuser portion 252a, so that the light is diffused. The rear side is not clearly visible through the portion 252a. Further, as shown in the figure, the side inner lens 252 has a substantially flat surface between the diffusion portions 252a, and the light from the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged on the rear side. Can be transmitted forward without being diffused or refracted.

Further, the left side upper decorative substrate 254 and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 of the left side decorative unit 240 are equipped with a plurality of high-brightness color LEDs on the surface, and the large side lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244 are mounted. The LEDs 254a and 256a arranged at positions corresponding to the window frames 242a and 244a (peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250) have a relatively wide irradiation angle (for example, 60 ° to 180 °) and are used on the side. The LEDs 254b, arranged at positions corresponding to the small window frames 242b, 244b and the opening frames 242c, 244c (the radiation lens portion 250b of the side lens 250, that is, the side flash lens 246) of the lower decorative frame 242 and the side upper decorative frame 244. As 256b, a lens having a relatively narrow irradiation angle (for example, 15 ° to 60 °) is used.

The upper left speaker 262 of the left side decoration unit 240 outputs sound in the mid-high range like the side speaker 130, and can be attached to a predetermined position in a predetermined direction by the upper speaker bracket 264. There is. The upper speaker bracket 264 that supports the upper left speaker 262 includes a cylindrical horn portion (not shown) that projects diagonally forward and downward at the center of the left and right sides of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front. The upper left speaker 262 is fixed to the back side of the upper end of the horn portion of the upper speaker bracket 264 via the protective plate 268 so that the upper left speaker 262 cannot be seen from the player side in the front view. It has become. Further, the protective plate 268 made of a metal plate can prevent mischief from being mischievous by the upper left speaker 262 or breaking the cone of the upper left speaker 262 and inserting an unauthorized tool into the pachinko machine 1. It has become. The upper left speaker 262 of this example is designed to be emitted from the upper part of the pachinko machine 1 toward the lower player, and is less likely to be noisy than other pachinko machines.

Next, a characteristic light emitting effect in the left side decoration unit 240 of this example will be described. As described above, the left side decoration unit 240 is arranged on the surface of the side lens 250 having a transparent peripheral lens portion 250a that forms the outer surface of the left side decoration unit 240 and is curved, and is arranged behind the peripheral lens portion 250a. An inner decorative member 251 having a metal-gloss plating layer and having a plurality of slits 251a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an inner decorative member 251 arranged on the rear side of the inner decorative member 251 and extending in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a. A side inner lens 252 having a diffuser portion 252a composed of a plurality of band-shaped lenses, a left side upper decorative substrate 254 and a left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lens 252 and mounted with a plurality of LEDs 254a and 256a. And (see FIG. 35 and the like). As a result, in the left side decoration unit 240, when the LEDs 254a and 256a are made to emit light, the light emitted forward is diffused by the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 and then passes through the slit 251a of the inner decoration member 251. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 is irradiated to the player side, and the peripheral lens portion 250a of the left side decoration unit 240 can be light-emittingly decorated.

By the way, the light radiated to the front (side lens 250 side) through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 passes through the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 and is radiated to the player side. At the same time, the remaining light is reflected on the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a to illuminate the front surface of the inner decorative member 251. Since the inner decorative member 251 is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface, the light reflected from the inner surface of the peripheral lens portion 250a toward the inner decorative member 251 is the surface of the inner decorative member 251. At (front surface), the light is reflected toward the peripheral lens portion 250a, and a part of the light reflected on the surface of the inner decorative member 251 is transmitted through the peripheral lens portion 250a and irradiated to the player side.

At this time, in this example, as shown in FIG. 35, the peripheral lens portion 250a, the front surface of the inner decorative member 251 and the diffusion portion 252a of the side inner lens 252 are each smoothly curved, so that the inner surface side ( The light reflected on the rear surface side) is converged and the light reflected on the outer surface side (front surface side) is diffused, and the peripheral lens portion 250a is provided with the direct light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 and the peripheral surface. The indirect light reflected from the front surface of the lens portion 250a and the inner decorative member 251 is irradiated to the positions shifted from each other. Further, the light passing through the slit 251a of the inner decorative member 251 is diffused and intersected in a striped manner with respect to the extending direction of the slit 251a by the diffusing portion 252a formed by the plurality of band-shaped lenses in the side inner lens 252. It is diffused in the direction (approximately orthogonal). Therefore, the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 extends in a direction intersecting the extending direction of the slit 251a, which is longer than the width of the slit 251a, and is irradiated (projected) with a plurality of striped lights having different shades. As a result, it is possible to make a fantastic luminescent decoration with a sense of perspective (see FIG. 36).

[Upper decoration unit] Next, the upper decoration unit 280 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40. FIG. 37 is a front perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame, and FIG. 38 is a rear perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit disassembled and viewed from the rear.

As shown in FIG. 17 and the like, the upper decorative unit 280 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is located at the upper center of the front surface of the door frame 5, between the upper end edges of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 on the central side. It is attached between them and decorates between them. As shown in the figure, the upper decorative unit 280 includes an annular central frame 281a penetrating in the front-rear direction, a frame-shaped upper extension frame 281b that extends from the upper part of the central frame 281a to the left and right and becomes thinner toward the tip. A front decorative member 281 having a frame-shaped lower extending frame 281c that extends from the lower part of the central frame 281a to the left and right toward the tip, and an upper extending frame 281b and a lower portion arranged behind the front decorative member 281. A transparent upper lens 282 having a through hole 282a having a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the central frame 281a while closing the inside of the extension frame 281c, and a tubular shape inserted into the through hole 282a of the upper lens 282. A central sleeve 283, an upper central lens 284 inserted into the central sleeve 283 and bulging forward, and a plate-shaped diffuser lens 285 arranged behind the upper central lens 284 and having a plurality of fine prisms formed on the surface. An annular lens support member 286 that holds the outer circumference of the diffuser lens 285 and is supported on the rear side of the upper lens 282, and a cylinder that is arranged on the rear side of the lens support member 286 and has substantially the same diameter as the inner diameter of the lens support member 286. A light-shielding member 287 having a portion 287a, a plurality of LEDs 288a arranged at a position corresponding to the inside of the tubular portion 287a of the light-shielding member 287 arranged behind the light-shielding member 287, and a position corresponding to the outside of the tubular portion 287a. A plurality of LEDs 288b arranged in the above are provided with an upper central decorative substrate 288 mounted on the front surface.

Further, the upper decorative unit 280 includes a unit base 289 that supports the front decorative member 281, the upper lens 282, the light shielding member 287, and the upper central decorative substrate 288 from the rear side, and a plurality of upper decorative units 280 arranged on the rear side of the unit base 289 and on the front surface. 290 The lower side of the mounting bracket 292, the upper lower cover 293 mounted on the lower side of the mounting bracket 292 and extending rearward from the lower rear end of the front decorative member 281, and the lower side of the upper lower cover 293 have a large amount of translucency and are predetermined. It is provided with a top and bottom decorative cover 294 that is shaped into a shape.

Further, the upper decorative unit 280 is attached to the substrate cover 291 and extends rearward from the upper rear end of the front decorative member 281 in a plate shape, and has a notch 295a whose rear end side is open in the center in the left-right direction. It includes a cover 295, a plate-shaped lid member 296 that closes the notch 295a of the upper upper cover 295, and a decorative member 297 that is attached to the right side surface of the unit base 289 and shaped into a predetermined shape. ..

In the upper decorative unit 280 of this example, a plating layer having a silver metallic luster is formed on the surface of the front decorative member 281 so that the front decorative member 281 shines with light from the outside. Further, the upper lens 282 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin, and has a central ring lens portion 282b facing into the central frame 281a of the front decorative member 281 at the outer periphery of the through hole 282a and an upper extension of the front decorative member 281. It is provided with an extension frame lens portion 282c facing the frame of the frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c. In the upper lens 282, a plurality of strip-shaped lenses extending radially on the rear surface of the central ring lens portion 282b are arranged in a row in the circumferential direction, and the axial core of the through hole 282a is centered on the front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c. A plurality of prisms extending concentrically are formed. As a result, the light can be diffusely refracted by the plurality of prisms and band-shaped lenses of the upper lens 282, and the rear side of the upper lens 282 cannot be clearly seen.

The upper center lens 284 of the upper decorative unit 280 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The upper center lens 284 has a smooth spindle shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of lenses concentric on the rear side are formed, and light can be diffusely refracted, so that the rear side is clear. It is invisible to the lens.

Further, in the upper central decorative substrate 288 of the upper decorative unit 280, a plurality of LEDs 288a and 288b mounted on the front surface are each full-color LEDs, and within the frame of the central frame 281a of the upper central lens 284 and the front decorative member 281. The outer periphery of the upper center lens 284 can be individually illuminated and decorated. Further, in the upper side decorative substrate 290 of the upper decorative unit 280, a plurality of LEDs 290a mounted on the front surface are each full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 290a are the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c in the front decoration member 281. It is arranged at the position corresponding to each of the frames. The upper side decorative substrate 290 can illuminate the upper extension frame 281b and the lower extension frame 281c of the front decorative member 281 by appropriately emitting light from the LED 290a.

[Plate Unit] Subsequently, the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 46. FIG. 41 is a front perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame, and FIG. 42 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 43 is a view showing the periphery of the slit-shaped notch formed in the upper plate upper panel, where (A) is a front view and (B) is a plan view. Further, FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. FIG. 46 is a cross-sectional view cut at a portion of the ball rental unit of the dish unit in the door frame.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment bulges from the front surface of the outer frame 2 toward the front (player side), and also stores the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 described later. The upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 are provided, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 described later via the ball feeding unit 580. As shown in FIGS. 44 and 45, the dish unit 300 of this example includes a substantially plate-shaped dish unit base 310 extending in the left-right direction fixed to the lower front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish unit base 310. The dish-shaped upper plate body 312, which is fixed in the center of the front surface and the upper and rear sides are opened and the left side (shaft support side) of the front view bulges forward greatly, and the upper outer circumference of the upper plate body 312 are covered and the front end is viewed from the front The upper plate upper panel 314 formed in a curved shape so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward, the upper plate front decorative member 316 attached to the upper front edge of the upper plate upper panel 314, and the upper plate front decoration. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 arranged between the member 316 and the upper plate upper panel 314 is continuous with the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and covers the upper right side of the upper plate upper panel 314. The plate upper right decorative member 319 is provided.

Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the lower surface of the upper plate upper panel 314 from the center on the left and right to the right side, and is attached to the plate-shaped substrate mounting base 320 on which a plurality of fine prisms are formed on the surface and the lower side of the substrate mounting base 320. It is provided with an upper plate decorative substrate 322 on which a plurality of LEDs 322a are mounted on the upper surface thereof. By appropriately emitting light of the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322, a part of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be light-emittingly decorated.

Further, the plate unit 300 is fixed to the front surface of the plate unit base 310 on the lower side of the upper plate body 312 to open the upper side and the rear side, and the center in the left-right direction bulges forward in the front view, and the front end moves to the center in the left-right direction. A dish-shaped lower plate main body 324 formed so as to become lower toward the direction, and a dish-shaped lower plate main body 324 fixed to the upper part of the lower plate main body 324 A plate-shaped lower plate top plate 326 that is curved so as to become higher toward the center, and a cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000, which will be described later, are located on a portion that covers the lower front end of the lower plate body 324 and extends to the right in front view. The lower plate cover 328 having the lock hole 328a facing the lower plate cover 328, and the upper opening 330a and the upper opening 330a coaxial with the lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 by decorating the right side from the position on the left and right center left side of the lower end of the lower plate cover 328. It includes a lower plate side cover 330 having a lower opening 330b that opens to the lower side and into which the handle device 500 is inserted from the front.

Further, the plate unit 300 is arranged at the lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332 extending diagonally to cover the left front end of the lower plate main body 324 and the left front end of the lower plate top plate 326, and the lower end of the lower plate upper left side cover 332. The lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate having an opening 334a penetrating in the direction, and the protective cover 336 made of a metal plate that closes the opening 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate from the rear side to allow sound to pass through, and protection. It is provided with a frame-shaped holding member 337 that holds the outer periphery of the cover 336 and is attached to the rear surface of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate. The right front end of the lower plate top plate 326 is covered with the upper plate front decorative member 316.

Further, the plate unit 300 is attached to the upper left and right ends of the plate unit base 310, and the lower ends of the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 and the upper ends of the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower plate upper left side cover 332 are designed. The side speaker cover 338 and the side speaker cover 338 have an opening 338a which is formed in a shape continuous with the door frame and has an opening 338a which penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the side speaker 130 attached to the door frame base unit 100. A cover body 339 having a plurality of holes in a disk shape that is gently curved so as to close the portion 338a from the rear side and bulge toward the front side is provided.

In this example, since the cover body 339 is formed of a predetermined punching metal, it is difficult to be deformed even if it is pushed or hit from the front side, and the side speaker 130 is possible. It can be protected as much as possible. Further, the side speaker cover 338 has a plating layer having a silver metallic luster formed on the surface thereof. The cover body 339 is colored black.

Further, the plate unit 300 includes an upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 for pulling out the game balls attached to the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate main body 312 and stored in the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302, and a lower plate main body 324. A lower plate ball pulling mechanism 350 attached to the lower surface for pulling out the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 downward, and a lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 attached to the upper left side of the plate unit base 310 and installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. It includes a ball lending unit 360 that operates a ball lending machine (also referred to as CR unit 6, not shown).

The plate unit 300 of this example constitutes an upper plate 301 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, an upper plate main body 312, an upper plate upper panel 314, and the like. Further, the plate unit 300 constitutes a lower plate 302 capable of storing game balls by a part of the plate unit base 310, a lower plate main body 324, a lower plate top plate 326, a lower plate cover 328, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 44, the dish unit base 310 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a substantially plate shape extending in the left-right direction, and a decorative portion 310a having a predetermined shape is formed on the upper end edge extending to the left and right. It is equipped. A ball-renting unit mounting portion 310b for mounting the ball-renting unit 360 is formed at the left end of the decorative portion 310a so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. The plate unit base 310 is arranged below the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b (near the upper left corner when viewed from the front), and has a horizontally long rectangular upper plate ball supply port 310c that penetrates in the front-rear direction and an upper plate ball supply port 310c. An upper plate ball discharge port 310d that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends in the vertical direction to the lower side near the right end of the decorative portion 310a on the lower side of the mouth 310c (approximately the middle in the height direction of the plate unit base 310), and the upper plate It is provided with a pair of lower plate support portions 310e arranged directly below the ball discharge port 310d and the upper plate ball supply port 310c and projecting forward and having the same upper surface. The upper plate ball discharge port 310d is continuously formed up to an intermediate position in the front-rear direction on the upper surface of the lower plate support portion 310e arranged directly below.

Further, the plate unit 300 is arranged between a pair of lower plate support portions 310e and is fitted with the rear ends of the lower plate main body 324 and the lower plate top plate 326 to form a horizontally long rectangular ring-shaped lower plate support in a front view. It is provided with a groove 310f and a rectangular lower plate ball supply port 310g arranged in the lower part on the right side of the center of the portion surrounded by the lower plate support groove 310f and penetrating in the front-rear direction. Further, as shown in FIG. 45, the dish unit base 310 has a lower dish ball supply gutter 310h extending rearward in a tubular shape so as to be continuous with the lower dish ball supply port 310g, and an open side of the lower dish ball supply gutter 310h. It is provided with a notch 310i formed on the side surface and having a size through which a game ball can pass.

The upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit base 310 is a foul cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit via the notches 101a and 162 of the door frame base main body 110 and the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the first ball outlet 544a of the unit 540. The front end of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is provided with an induction recess 310j that extends long to the right in the front view and is recessed rearward. The guide recess 310j is inclined so that the right end side in the front view is slightly lower in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the front end side is lower in the front-rear direction. As a result, the height difference between the front end of the guide recess 310j and the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 becomes higher toward the right end of the guide recess 310j, and the right end of the guide recess 310j is equal to the bottom surface of the upper plate body 312. The height difference of is slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball.

Therefore, in this example, when the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c is closed by the game ball stored in the upper plate 301, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 via the foul cover unit 540 is Since it is not possible to linearly exit the upper plate 301 in front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c, the dispensed game ball comes into contact with the game ball that has closed the front side of the upper plate ball supply port 310c and rolls. The direction changes, the guide is guided to roll in the guide recess 310j to the right in front view, and the ball is discharged from the vicinity of the right end of the guide recess 310j to the upper side of the game ball stored in the upper plate 301. Become. As a result, the game balls can be automatically stored in the upper and lower two stages in the upper plate 301, so that the player does not pull the game balls by hand when the game balls block the front of the upper plate ball supply port 310c. However, it is possible to continue to supply (release) the paid-out game balls into the upper plate 301, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by the storage of the game balls in the upper plate 301. , It is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest in the game by devoting himself to the operation of driving the game ball and the game by the driven game ball, and to increase the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301. Can be done.

The upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 provides an opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 in the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 and a ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. It communicates with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 via the door frame base unit 100. Further, in the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, the lower plate ball supply trough 310h extending rearward from the rear side penetrates the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 and extends rearward. Above, while being connected to the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100, the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply trough 310h is formed in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340. It is connected to the ball removal flow path 344c of the upper plate ball removal base 344.

In this example, as shown in the figure, the front end of the lower plate ball supply port 310 g is provided with an opening portion 310k that expands to the left in front view, and the lower plate ball supply port is provided by the expansion portion 310k. The front end of 310 g is in a state of spreading in the left-right direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent early ball clogging at the lower plate ball supply port 310 g due to the game balls in the lower plate 302 accumulated on the front side of the lower plate ball supply port 310 g, and more games can be played. The ball can be supplied into the lower plate 302.

The upper plate body 312 of the plate unit 300 functions as a wall portion that stands above the upper plate 301 that can store game balls, and the left side (shaft support side) from the center bulges forward in front view. , The bottom surface is formed so as to be lower on the left end side (open side) and the rear end side as a whole. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 312 has a rear end on the shaft support side near the bottom of the upper plate ball supply port 310c in the plate unit base 310, and a rear end on the open side of the upper plate ball discharge port 310d in the plate unit base 310. The game balls are formed so as to be located near the intermediate positions in the vertical direction, and the game balls supplied from the upper plate ball supply port 310c to the upper plate main body 312 (upper plate 301) are guided to the upper plate ball discharge port 310d. It has become so.

A metal upper plate rail 313 that can come into contact with the game ball is attached to the upper plate main body 312 from the center in the left-right direction to the open side at the rear end of the bottom surface. Although not shown, the precision rail 313 is electrically grounded so that the static electricity charged on the game ball can be removed.

The upper plate upper panel 314 of the plate unit 300 extends in a curved shape from the upper end of the upper plate main body 312 so that the center in the left-right direction of the door frame 5 projects forward, and is outside the open side of the upper plate main body 312. A mounting hole 314a is formed which penetrates in the vertical direction and into which the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 described later is attached. The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed in a stepped shape at the front end one step lower than the upper front end of the upper plate main body 312, and is a decorative mounting portion 314b for attaching the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318. An operation unit mounting portion 314c for mounting the operation unit 400, which will be described later, is provided in a stepped shape at the center in the left-right direction in front of the upper plate body 312 and further lowered from the decorative mounting portion 314b. There is.

The upper plate upper panel 314 is formed with slit-shaped notches 3141, 3142, 3143, for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 to 43. These notches 3141, 3142, 3143 are formed as regions that can sandwich and hold a plate-shaped object such as a mobile phone, a smartphone, or a tablet computer. Specifically, the upper plate 301 is formed from the player side. The groove is formed so that the direction toward the side (that is, from the outside to the inside) is the longitudinal direction.

The notch portions 3141, 3142, 3143 formed in this way are not newly provided for the pachinko machine 1 as a holder for setting a mobile phone, but are notches for the upper plate upper panel 314 which has been conventionally provided. Since only processing is performed, it is possible to easily provide a portion on which a plate-shaped portable item carried by a player can be set without designing for providing in a narrow space. Moreover, since the notches 3141, 3142, 3143 formed in the upper plate upper panel 314 are only a part of the design applied to the pachinko machine 1, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 is not spoiled. In particular, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a decorative cover 23 with decoration is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 2, and the above-mentioned cutouts 3141, 3142, 3143 are only a part of many decorations. Therefore, even when the above-mentioned portable items are not held at all, they function as a mere part of the design, so that there is no unnatural appearance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player without inviting an increase in the load of design and development and spoiling the appearance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Further, the bottom portion 3141a of the notch portion 3141 (see FIGS. 2 and 17) is formed so as to be inclined downward from the player side toward the upper plate 301 side. As a result, even if the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 enters between the notches 3141, the game ball flows down to the side of the upper plate 301 due to the action of gravity, and the game ball is released from the plate unit 300. It is possible to suppress the situation of jumping out to the outside. Although the bottom portion 3141a of the notch portion 3141 has been described here, the bottom portion of the notch portion 3142 and the bottom portion of the notch portion 3143 (both bottoms are unsigned) are similarly directed from the player side to the upper plate 301 side. It is formed so as to be inclined downward.

By the way, the thickness of portable items that can be carried by a player varies widely. In particular, in recent years, there are a wide variety of computers such as mobile phones, smartphones, and tablet computers, and their thicknesses are usually different. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the three notches 3141, 3142, and 3143 have different sizes in the width direction from each other. Then, the player can hold the portable item by selecting the notch portion that matches the thickness of the portable item owned by the player himself / herself from the three notch portions 3141, 3142, 3143. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, three notches having a function of holding a player's portable item are formed, but it goes without saying that the number of the notches is not limited to three.

Further, of the notches 3141, 3142, 3143, the surface of the plate-shaped player's portable item that comes into contact with the player's portable item when the plate-shaped player's portable item is held has a thin wall that functions as a protective member for protecting the player's portable item. Rubber sheet is attached. As a result, when the player's portable item is held in the cutouts 3141, 3142, 3143, it is possible to prevent the player's portable item from being damaged by the contact with the inner surface of the notch 3141, 3142, 3143. In particular, when the player's portable items are held in the notches 3141, 3142, 3143, the player carries the player's mobile phone from the end of the notches 3141, 3142, 3143 on the player side toward the upper plate 301. Since it is considered that there is a strong tendency to push the product, the inner surface of the notch 3141, 3142, 3143 and the player's portable product slide. Therefore, of the notches 3141, 3142, 3143, by attaching a thin rubber sheet to the surface that comes into contact with the plate-shaped player's portable item, the inner surface of the notch 3141, 3142, 3143 and the player's portable item can be attached to each other. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of flaws in the technician's portable items that may occur due to sliding. The above-mentioned protective member is not necessarily limited to a thin rubber sheet, and may cause defects in the player's portable item due to sliding between the inner surface of the notch 3141, 3142, 3143 and the player's portable item. If it can be suppressed, the material is not limited.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 43, plate-shaped members 31411,31412 are formed on both sides of the cutout portion 3141 in the width direction. Specifically, both surfaces in the width direction of the notch 3141 that comes into contact with the player's portable item when the player's portable item is sandwiched in the notch 3141 (that is, the longitudinal direction of the notch 3141 (upper plate 301 from the player side). The surfaces on both sides along the direction toward) are formed by the plate-shaped members 31411,31412. Further, when the player's portable item is sandwiched between the cutouts 3141, slit-shaped notches 31413 and 31414 are also formed on the side of the plate-shaped member 31411,31412 opposite to the surface that comes into contact with the player's portable item. Therefore, the plate-shaped member 31411,31412 is formed with a gap having a predetermined width on the side opposite to the surface that comes into contact with the player's portable item, whereby the plate-shaped member 31411,31412 becomes the player's portable item. On the other hand, it functions as an elastic body, and can be gripped by sandwiching the player's portable item. In the present embodiment, plate-shaped members 31411,31412 having a predetermined gap are formed on both sides of the cutout portion 3141 in the width direction on the side opposite to the side that comes into contact with the player's portable item. It is not necessary that the plate-shaped members are formed on both sides of the cutout portion 3141 in the width direction, and the above-mentioned plate-shaped members may be formed on either side. Even in such an embodiment, it is possible to press the player's portable item from either side by the elastic effect. Although the cutout portion 3141 has been described here, plate-shaped members (none of the plate-shaped members are unsigned) are similarly formed on both sides of the cutout portion 3142 and the cutout portion 3143 in the width direction.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 19, 41 and 43 (B), the notches 3141, 3142, 3143 in the present embodiment have the longitudinal direction toward the upper plate 301 with respect to the surface of the game area 1100. Is tilted. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, both surfaces of the cutout portions 3141, 3142, 3143 in the width direction of the cutout portions 3141, 3142, 3143 are inclined with respect to the surface of the game area 1100. .. As a result, the player's portable item 5000 can be sandwiched between the notches 3141, 3142, and 3143 at an angle that makes it easy for the player to see the display surface of the player's mobile item 5000. Is easier to see from the player side. As a result, for example, when the ringtone sounds, the player can easily notice it, so that the player does not need to pay close attention to the portable device of the game machine and can concentrate on the game. In FIGS. 19 and 41, the player's portable product 5000 is sandwiched and held in the notch 3142.

The upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin in a shape extending in a curved shape in the left-right direction along the front end of the upper plate upper panel 314. The upper plate front decorative member 316 is formed in a smooth shape on the left side from the position on the right side of the center in the left-right direction, while the right side is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape. It is formed in a rugged shape like this. Further, although detailed illustration of the upper plate front decorative member 316 is omitted, a plurality of small-diameter lenses are formed on the rear surface on the right side formed by the plurality of curved surfaces, and light can be diffusely refracted. The rear side is not clearly visible from the player side. The upper plate upper inner decorative member 318 is arranged behind the smoothly formed portion on the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316, and is provided with a plating layer having a silver metallic luster on the surface. ing. As a result, in the assembled state of the upper plate upper inner decorative member 318, the portion visible through the left side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 is clearly visible from the player side, whereas the right side of the upper plate front decorative member 316 is clearly visible. The part that can be seen through is unclear from the player's side, and the sense of distance is uncertain.

The upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin. The surface of the upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces curved in a spindle shape, similar to the portion on the right side of the front decorative member 316 of the upper plate. It is formed in an integral shape with the right side portion, and the upper right end side is formed so as to decorate the outer periphery of the upper plate ball removing button 341 of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 described later. Further, the upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate has a plurality of small-diameter lenses formed on the back surface (lower surface), so that light can be diffusely refracted and the lower side cannot be clearly seen from the player side. There is. The upper plate decorative substrate 322 is arranged on the rear side of the right side portion of the upper plate front decorative member 316 and on the lower side of the upper plate upper right decorative member 319, and the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is used. By appropriately emitting light, the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 can be appropriately emitted.

The lower plate main body 324 of the plate unit 300 has a bottom plate 324a formed so as to fan out forward in a plan view, the rear end is formed linearly in the left-right direction, and the substantially center of the upper surface is the lowest, and the center of the bottom plate 324a. It is provided with a lower plate ball punching hole 324b formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction, and a side plate 324c rising upward from the front end and the side end excluding the rear end of the bottom plate 324a. The side plate 324c of the lower plate main body 324 is formed in a curved shape so that the upper end rising upward from the side end of the bottom plate 324a is the lowest on the front side and becomes higher toward the rear side, and the bottom plate 324a. The upper end rising upward from the side end is formed in a straight line, and the left and right ends of the lower plate top plate 326 are placed and connected to the straight portion of the upper end.

In the lower plate main body 324, the rear ends of the bottom plate 324a and the side plate 324c are inserted and supported in the lower plate support groove 310f formed on the front surface of the plate unit base 310. Further, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the opening / closing shutter 352 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 arranged on the back surface side of the bottom plate 324a.

The lower plate cover 328 is made of black synthetic resin. On the other hand, the lower plate side cover 330 is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a silver-colored and metallic plating layer (a matte state as if sandblasted instead of a mirror surface) on the surface. The lower plate side cover 330 includes a plate-shaped portion that forms a part of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300 that extends rearward from the lower end. The lock hole 328a of the lower plate cover 328 and the upper opening 330a of the lower plate side cover 330 are formed at positions corresponding to the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 attached to the main body frame 3, and are formed in the main body frame 3. On the other hand, when the door frame 5 is closed, the lock hole of the cylinder lock 1010 faces from the lock hole 328a and the upper opening 330a.

Further, the upper left side cover 332 of the lower plate is provided with a plating layer which is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and has a silver metallic luster on the surface. Further, the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate is formed of a predetermined synthetic resin and is provided with a plating layer having a red metallic luster on the surface, and is one of the bottom surfaces of the plate unit 300 extending rearward from the lower end. It has a plate-shaped part that forms a part. The opening 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate is formed at a position corresponding to the front surface of the lower speaker 821 (speaker for bass) provided in the main body frame 3 described later, and the player can hear the sound from the lower speaker 821. It is designed to be transparent to the side. The protective cover 336 that closes the opening 334a of the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate is made of punching metal having a plurality of holes formed in the metal plate to prevent unauthorized tools from being inserted inside. ..

In the plate unit 300 of this example, the bottom surface excluding the center in the left-right direction is closed by the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate, and the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower left side cover of the lower plate are closed. The bottom surface between the 334 and the lower plate is closed by the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 described later.

The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 is used for the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341 and the upper plate ball removing button 341 that are vertically attached to the mounting hole 314a of the upper plate upper panel 314. The operating piece 342, which moves up and down more than the vertical movement of the upper plate ball removal button 341 and is supported on the front side of the plate unit base 310, and the operating piece 342 are operably supported and the plate unit base 310. A contact piece that slides in the vertical direction by the vertical movement of the mounting base 346 mounted on the front surface of the mounting base 346 and the operating piece 342 supported by the mounting base 346, and comes into contact with the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 described later. The upper plate ball removing slider 343 provided with 343a and arranged behind the plate unit base 310 and the upper plate ball removing slider 343 are slidably supported in the vertical direction and attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 310. It is provided with a punching base 344.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 has an operating piece 342 that moves up and down together with the upper plate ball removing button 341 so that the upper plate ball removing button 341 is located at the upper moving end. It is urged upward by a coil spring. Further, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 is in a state of being urged upward by a coil spring provided between the upper plate ball removal slider 343 and the upper plate ball removal base 344.

The upper plate ball removal base 344 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 closes the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and at the same time communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d and opens forward 344a (FIG. (See 44) and the ball guidance flow path 344b (FIGS. 42 and FIG. 42) which guides the game ball that has passed through the opening 344a and the opening 344a on the back surface side of the upper plate ball removal base 344 downward and then guides the game ball backward. 45), and after extending downward from the lower side of the ball guiding flow path 344b, extending substantially along the lower side of the upper plate ball removing base 344 toward the right end (shaft support side) in rear view. It is provided with a ball removal flow path 344c, which allows the game ball to roll.

In the upper plate ball removing base 344, the opening 344a communicates with the upper plate ball discharge port 310d, and the lower end of the ball guiding flow path 344b communicating with the opening 344a is the ball of the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100. The game ball stored in the upper plate 301 is communicated with the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 attached to the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 via the feed opening 113, and the ball feed unit 580 is used. Can be supplied to.

Further, in the ball pulling flow path 344c of the upper plate ball pulling base 344, the upper end adjacent to the ball guiding flow path 344b communicates with the ball pulling port 581b of the ball feeding unit 580 via the ball feeding opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110. At the same time, the lower end extending toward the shaft support side communicates with the notch 310i of the lower plate ball supply trough 310h in the plate unit base 310, and the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 581b of the ball feed unit 580 is inserted. It can be guided to the lower plate 302. The lower part of the rear end of the ball removal flow path 344c is closed by the upper plate ball removal flow path cover 345.

When the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 downward against the urging force of the coil spring, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward and the contact piece 343a protruding rearward also Move down. Then, in the operating rod 583c of the ball pulling member 583 in the ball feeding unit 580 that comes into contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 rotates in a predetermined direction as the contact piece 343a moves downward. It moves, and the partition between the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b partitioned by the partition 583a is released, and the entrance 581a and the ball outlet 581b are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are sent from the upper plate ball discharge port 310d to the entrance 581a of the ball feed unit 580 via the opening 344a of the upper plate ball removal base 344 and the ball guidance flow path 344b. After entering, it is discharged from the ball outlet 581b to the ball ejection flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344, and is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 310g to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply trough 310h of the plate unit base 310. It can be discharged to.

Since the ball pulling member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 is in contact with the upper surface of the contact piece 343a in the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 whose operating rod 583c is urged upward by the coil spring, the ball pulling member 583 Even if the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 via the operating paddle 583c, and the ball pulling member 583 or the like can absorb the impact. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being damaged and to prevent the game ball from bouncing off at the partition portion 583a.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 in the plate unit 300 is arranged between the lower plate side cover 330 and the lower left side cover 334 of the lower plate on the lower side of the lower plate main body 324, and forms the central portion of the bottom surface of the plate unit 300. A plate-shaped opening / closing shutter 352 that is rotatably supported on the upper surface of the ball removing base 351 and the lower plate ball removing base 351 and can open / close the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324, and the opening / closing shutter 352 are rotated. It is provided with a lower plate ball removal slide 353 that is moved and supported on the upper surface of the lower plate ball removal base 351 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction, and a lower plate ball removal button 354 that is attached to the front end of the lower plate ball removal slide 353. ing.

The lower plate ball removing base 351 is provided with a base ball removing hole 351a penetrating in the vertical direction at a position facing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324. Further, the opening / closing shutter 352 has a closing portion 352a capable of closing the lower plate ball removing hole 324b, and a shutter ball removing hole arranged in front of the closing portion 352a and penetrating in the vertical direction substantially coincident with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b. 352b and the lower plate ball removal base 351 are urged by a coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a is positioned to close the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a. ..

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the open / close shutter 352 is provided with a contact pin capable of contacting the lower plate ball removing slide 353, and the contact pin abuts on the lower plate ball removing slide 353. The lower plate ball removal slide 353 rotates the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball removal hole 352b so as to move rearward, and the urging force of the coil spring 356 slides the lower plate ball removal slide 353 forward. You can do it.

Further, in the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350, the shutter ball removing hole 352b of the opening / closing shutter 352 substantially coincides with the lower plate ball removing hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 and the base ball removing hole 351a of the lower plate ball removing base 351. In order to hold the lower plate ball removing slide 353 in the moving position, a holding mechanism 355 for holding the lower plate ball removing slide 353 in a predetermined position is further provided.

The lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 is in a closed state in which the lower plate ball removing button 354 is moved to the front end in a state where the surface shape of the lower plate ball removing button 354 is continuous with the surface shape of the lower plate cover 328 or the like. The lower plate ball removal hole 324b of the lower plate main body 324 is closed by the closing portion 352a of the opening / closing shutter 352. In this state, the game ball can be stored in the lower plate main body 324 (lower plate 302). When the lower plate ball removal button 354 in the closed state is pressed backward, the lower plate ball removal button 354 and the lower plate ball removal slide 353 slide backward, and the lower plate ball removal slide 353 slides backward. The opening / closing shutter 352 rotates against the urging force of the coil spring 356 so that the closing portion 352a and the shutter ball extraction hole 352b move rearward.

Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates rearward, the shutter ball extraction hole 352b overlaps with the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b and the base ball extraction hole 351a, and eventually the shutter ball extraction hole 352b and the lower plate ball extraction hole 352b. It coincides with 324b, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged to the lower side of the plate unit 300 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 324b. When the lower plate ball removal slide 353 moves rearward to a position where the shutter ball removal hole 352b and the lower plate ball removal hole 324b substantially coincide with each other, the lower plate ball removal slide 353 is held by the holding mechanism 355. By locking (holding) the slide of the lower plate ball removal slide 353, the lower plate ball removal button 354 remains in the open state retracted rearward, and the shutter ball removal hole 352b is the lower plate ball. It is held in a state of matching with the withdrawal hole 3324b, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 302 can be discharged downward even if the lower plate ball extraction button 354 is not held down.

On the other hand, when closing the lower plate ball removal hole 324b, when the retracted open lower plate ball removal button 354 is further pressed backward, the holding of the lower plate ball removal slide 353 by the holding mechanism 355 is released, and the lower plate is released. The ball pulling slide 353 can slide, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the coil spring in the direction of closing the lower plate ball pulling hole 324b, and the closing portion 352a is urged by the urging force to close the lower plate. It will rotate in the direction of moving in the direction (forward) of the ball extraction hole 324b. Then, as the opening / closing shutter 352 rotates forward, the lower plate ball removing slide 353 slides forward, the lower plate ball removing hole 324b is closed by the closing portion 352a, and the lower plate ball removing button 354 is lowered. It returns to the closed position substantially coincided with the front surface of the plate cover 328 and the like, and the game ball can be stored in the lower plate 302.

The holding mechanism 355 of the lower plate ball removing mechanism 350 uses a known technique having the above-mentioned function, and the detailed mechanism thereof will be omitted.

The ball lending unit 360 in the plate unit 300 includes a ball lending button 361 and a return button 362 that can be pressed backward, and also includes a lending balance display unit 363 between the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362. The ball lending unit 360 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then presses the ball lending button 361 to release a predetermined number of game balls to the plate unit 300. You can rent (pay out) into the upper plate 301, and when you press the return button 362, the balance of the cash you put in after deducting the rest of the lent amount and the prepaid card will be returned. There is. In addition, the loan balance display unit 363 displays the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball lending machine.

The ball lending unit 360 is attached from the rear side to the ball lending unit mounting portion 310b formed on the decorative portion 310a at the upper end of the dish unit base 310. Further, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a security cover mounting portion 364 that projects rearward from the rear surface and mounts and locks the mounting elastic piece 185 on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of the security cover 180.

More specifically, the ball rental unit 360 is provided with a transparent ball rental unit front cover 365 that covers the front side of the rental balance display unit 363 and a rental balance display unit 363 that is arranged behind the ball rental unit front cover 365. The ball rental unit board 366 (see FIG. 46) to which a switch operated by operating the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 is attached, and the ball rental unit of the plate unit base 310 that covers the rear side of the ball rental unit board 366. It includes a rear cover 367 that is attached to the rear side of the attachment portion 310b. The security cover mounting portion 364 is provided on the rear surface of the rear cover 367.

The ball lending unit mounting portion 310b of the dish unit base 310 to which the ball lending unit 360 is mounted is formed between the circular button opening 310 m facing the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362 and the button openings 310 m for lending. It is provided with a rectangular display opening 310n closed by the ball unit front cover 365, and a protrusion 310o formed on the outer periphery of each of the two button openings 310m and projecting forward, and is transparent to close the display opening 310n. The rental balance display unit 363 arranged on the rear side through the front cover 365 of the ball rental unit can be seen from the player side. Further, as shown in FIG. 46, the protruding portion 310o of the dish unit base 310 has a rounded front end.

In the ball rental unit 360 of this example, as shown in the figure, the ball rental unit mounting portion 310b of the plate unit base 310 is arranged above the upper plate 301 and directly above the upper plate ball supply port 310c, and the front surface. It is arranged so that it faces. Further, in the ball lending unit 360, the return button 362 is arranged at a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the ball lending button 361. In this example, the ball rental button 361 and the return button 362 are colored in a color different from that of the plate unit base 310 (ball rental unit mounting portion 310b). This makes it easier for the player to recognize the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362.

Further, the ball lending unit 360 is provided with a protruding portion 310o protruding forward (on the player side) from the outer circumference of the ball lending button 361 and the return button 362, and when the player inserts his / her hand into the upper plate 301. Since the hand touches the protrusion 310o before touching the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362, the player can be made aware of the existence of the ball lending button 361 or the return button 362. It is possible to prevent erroneous operation of 361, the return button 362, and the like.

The plate unit 300 of this example is provided with an upper plate 301 and a lower plate 302, and can be a pachinko machine 1 having a feeling similar to that of a conventional pachinko machine equipped with two storage plates. The machine can be reminiscent of the machine, and even with the new pachinko machine 1 (new model pachinko machine), the feeling of anxiety given to the player can be reduced and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to play. It has become.

[Operation Unit] Next, the operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 51. FIG. 47 (A) is a front perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 47 (B) is a rear perspective view of the operation unit in the door frame. Further, FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the upper right front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the operating unit disassembled and viewed from the lower right front. Further, FIG. 50 is a cross-sectional view of the operation unit, and FIG. 51 is a cross-sectional view showing the pressing operation unit in the operation unit in a pressed state.

The operation unit 400 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment is arranged in front of the upper plate 301 at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the dial operation unit 401 that can be rotated by the player and the press that can be pressed by the player. It is equipped with an operation unit 405, and can accept the player's operation according to the game state and the dial operation unit 401 can be moved, so that the player can not only drive the game ball but also operate the game ball. , It is intended to be able to participate in the production during the game.

The operation unit 400 is an annular driven operation unit that is connected to an annular dial operation unit 401, a cylindrical pressing operation unit 405 inserted into the ring of the dial operation unit 401, and a lower end of the dial operation unit 401. A gear 410, a disk-shaped drive gear 412 that meshes with the driven gear 410, a dial drive motor 414 in which the drive gear 412 is fixed to a rotating shaft, an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and an annular gear rail 416a. The operation unit holding member 416 having a cylindrical button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the pressing operation unit 405 in the vertical direction, and the pressing operation unit 405 arranged in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416. A base member having an upward urging spring 418, a gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 and an opening 420a through which the button support cylinder 416b can pass, and the operation unit holding member 416 and the dial drive motor 414 being fixed to the lower surface. The base is attached so as to sandwich the base member 420 under the upper cover 422 and the upper cover 422 which covers the upper surface of the base member 420 and has an opening 422a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass. It mainly includes a member 420 and a lower cover 424 that covers the lower surface of the dial drive motor 414.

Further, the operation unit 400 is fixed to the base member 420 so as to cover the upper side of the upper cover 422 and extends outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a through which the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the opening 426a. A cover main body 426 having a fixing portion 426b for fixing to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a plating having a silver metallic luster on the surface while being arranged on the upper side of the cover main body 426 and formed into a predetermined shape. An inner cover 427 provided with a layer and a transparent surface cover 428 covering the upper surface of the inner cover 427 are provided. The inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 are formed with circular openings through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass.

Further, the operation unit 400 has an opening 430a attached to the upper surface of the base member 420 and through which the button support cylinder 416b of the operation unit holding member 416 and the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation unit 401 can pass through, and the dial operation unit 401 on the upper surface. A dial decorative substrate 430 on which a plurality of color LEDs 430b are mounted at positions corresponding to the annulus of the above, and a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a fixed to the lower side of the operation unit holding member 416 to detect the rotation of the dial operation unit 401. It includes a 432b, a pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressing operation unit 405, and a button decorative substrate 432 having a color LED 432d mounted on the upper surface directly below the pressing operation unit 405. The button decorative substrate 432 is locked and held on the lower surface of the operation unit holding member 416 by the substrate holding claw 416g of the operation unit holding member 416.

The dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 of this example is made of a translucent material, and has a tubular inner cylinder portion 401a extending in the vertical direction and the inner cylinder portion 401a from the upper end to the outside. An annular top plate 401b with a predetermined decoration on the extending surface, an outer cylinder 401c shorter than the inner cylinder 401a extending downward from the outer peripheral end of the top plate 401b, and an outer cylinder. It mainly includes a flange portion 401d extending outward from the lower end of the portion 401c in a ring shape. The outer diameter of the flange portion 401d of the dial operation portion 401 is larger than the inner diameter of the opening 422a of the upper cover 422. Further, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a connection locking portion (see FIG. 49) at the lower end of the inner cylinder portion 401a, and the dial operation unit 401 is locked by locking the connection locking claw 410b of the driven gear 410. The 401 and the driven gear 410 can be connected to each other.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 further includes a projecting portion 401f protruding from the inner wall of the inner cylinder portion 401a toward the center at a position lowered by a predetermined distance from the upper end. The protruding portion 401f of the dial operating portion 401 is formed in an annular shape along the inner circumference of the inner cylinder portion 401a. Although the details will be described later, the protruding portion 401f can come into contact with the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405, and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 protrudes from the dial operating portion 401. By contacting the portion 401f, it is possible to prevent the button cap 407 (pressing operation portion 405) from further immersing in the inner cylinder portion 401e (see FIG. 51).

As shown in the figure, the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation portion 401 and the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 in the pressing operation portion 405 are lowered so that their contact surfaces become lower toward the center of the dial operation portion 401. The surface is sloped so that the contact area when they come into contact with each other becomes large. As a result, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be more dispersed (released) to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the vibration from the dial operation unit 401 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side. It has become.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 is formed in a cylindrical shape with the upper end closed, and has a bottomed cylindrical button body 406, a button cap 407 that closes the upper end of the button body 406, and a button cap. It includes a cap inner 408 that is arranged inside the 407 and is sandwiched between the upper end of the button body 406 and the button cap 407. The button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 has a truncated cone shape in which the lower surface of the bottom portion narrows downward, and the upper end of the coiled spring 418 is inserted into the lower surface of the truncated cone shape. In addition, a through hole 406a penetrating in the vertical direction is provided in the center of the lower end surface of the truncated cone shape, and light from the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is irradiated to the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 through the through hole 406a. It has become like.

Further, the button body 406 has a pair of locking claws 406b whose lower end extends downward from the lower part of the outer circumference and protrudes outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the locking claws 406b are the operating portion holding member 416. By locking with the locking convex portion 416f (see FIGS. 50 and 51) formed in the button support cylinder 416b, the upward moving end is moved so that the button body 406 does not come off from the button support cylinder 416b. It can be regulated. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, a contact portion for preventing the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 from moving in the circumferential direction is provided in the button support cylinder 416b of the operation portion holding member 416. The button body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) is prevented from rotating in the button support cylinder 416b. A predetermined amount of gap is formed in the circumferential direction between the locking claw 406b of the button body 406 and the contact portion in the button support cylinder 416b, and the gap allows the button body 406 to have a predetermined angle. It can rotate within the range.

Further, the button body 406 includes a press detection piece 406c that can be detected by the press detection sensor 432c of the button decorative substrate 432 that extends downward from a position different from that of the locking claw 406b. When the button main body 406 (pressing operation unit 405) moves downward against the urging force of the spring 418, the pressing detection piece 406c is detected by the pressing detection sensor 432c.

Further, as shown in the figure, the button cap 407 of the pressing operation unit 405 has an outer diameter lower than the substantially center in the vertical direction and a smaller diameter than the upper side, and the step portion 407a is located between the upper side and the lower side. Is formed. The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) has a diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the protrusion 401f in the dial operation unit 401 on the lower side of the step portion 407a, and a dial operation unit on the upper side of the step portion 407a. The diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the 401 and is larger than the inner diameter of the protruding portion 401f. As a result, when the button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) is inserted into the inner cylinder portion 401a from above the dial operation unit 401, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. , The button cap 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401a (see FIG. 51).

Further, the button cap 407 and the cap inner 408 of the pressing operation unit 405 are formed of a material having a translucent ring. The word "Push" is displayed on the upper surface of the cap inner 408, and the word can be visually recognized from the outside through the button cap 407.

The driven gear 410 in the operation unit 400 is provided with a plurality of gear teeth that mesh with the drive gear 412 on the outer circumference of the annular shape. The inner diameter of the driven gear 410 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the button support cylinder 416b in the operating portion holding member 416, and the annular sliding surface abuts on the lower surface of the gear rail 416a of the operating portion holding member 416. It has a moving surface 410a. By inserting the driven gear 410 into the button support cylinder 416b and bringing the sliding surface 410a into contact with the gear rail 416a, the driven gear 410 can slide and rotate substantially concentrically with the button support cylinder 416b. It has become.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a pair of connecting locking claws 410b that extend upward from the opposite positions of the upper ends and then project inward, and the connecting locking claws 410b are used in the dial operation unit 401. By locking the inner cylinder portion 401a with the connection locking portion 401e, the driven gear 410 and the dial operation portion 401 are integrally rotatably connected.

Further, the driven gear 410 includes a plurality of rotation detection pieces 410c that project downward from the lower end and are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. These rotation detection pieces 410c are detected by a pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432, and details will be described later, but the rotation detection piece 410c and the rotation detection piece 410c are of each other. The slit 410d formed between them makes it possible to detect the rotation direction of the driven gear 410, that is, the dial operation unit 401 by the detection patterns of the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b with respect to the rotation detection piece 410c. In this example, the rotation detection piece 410c and the slit 410d have substantially the same length in the circumferential direction.

Further, as shown in the figure, the drive gear 412 in the operation unit 400 is a spur gear that meshes with the driven gear 410, and is fixed so as to be integrally rotatable with the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414. Further, the dial drive motor 414 is a known stepping motor capable of arbitrarily controlling the rotation direction, rotation speed, and rotation angle, and the dial drive motor 414 rotationally drives the drive gear 412 via the rotation shaft. Therefore, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated via the driven gear 410. Further, the dial operation unit 401 can be vibrated by repeating the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of the drive gear 412 (rotation shaft) in small steps by the dial drive motor 414. Further, by stopping the rotation of the dial drive motor 414 for a short time at each predetermined rotation angle based on the detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 342b, the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 is clicked. It is possible to give a feeling.

Further, the operation unit holding member 416 of the operation unit 400 includes an annular gear rail 416a that rotatably supports the driven gear 410, and a button body 406 of the operation unit 405 that protrudes upward from the inside of the gear rail 416a in a tubular shape. A button support cylinder 416b that slidably supports the button body 416b and a locking convex portion 416f that is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the button support cylinder 416b near the bottom and can be locked with the locking claw 406b of the button body 406. (See FIGS. 50 and 51) and a through hole 416c that penetrates the center of the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and sends light from the LED 432d mounted on the button decorative substrate 432 into the button support cylinder 416b (pressing operation unit 405). The opening 416d through which the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432 can pass through the bottom portion outside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction, and the bottom portion inside the button support cylinder 416b in the vertical direction. The opening 416e desired from above by the pressure detection sensor 432c attached to the button decorative substrate 432, and a pair of substrate holding claws 416g for locking and holding the button decorative substrate 432 extending downward from the lower surface. I have.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the operation unit holding member 416 is arranged in the button support cylinder 416b, forms a predetermined amount of gap in the circumferential direction with respect to the locking claw 406b of the button main body 406, and is locked. It further includes a plurality of contact portions capable of contacting the claw 406b. The contact portion allows the button body 406 (pressing operation portion 405) to rotate within a predetermined angle range and does not rotate around in the button support cylinder 416b. Further, although detailed description of the operation unit holding member 416 is omitted, screw holes for fixing to the base member 420, positioning bosses for positioning with the base member 420 and the button decorative substrate 432, and the like are appropriately positioned. Be prepared for.

The operation unit holding member 416 slides the driven gear 410 (dial operation unit 401) around a predetermined rotation axis by inserting the driven gear 410 on the outer circumference of the button support cylinder 416b and mounting it on the gear rail 416a. It can be supported so that it can move and rotate. Further, by inserting the button body 406 of the pressing operation unit 405 into the button support cylinder 416b, the pressing operation unit 405 can be slidably supported in the vertical direction via the button body 406. .. A coil-shaped spring 418 is arranged between the bottom of the button support cylinder 416b and the truncated cone-shaped lower surface of the button body 406. The spring 418 causes the button body 406 (pressing operation unit). 405) is in a state of being urged upward.

The base member 420 in the operation unit 400 is made of a metal such as an aluminum alloy, so that the operation unit 400 is not easily damaged even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit. The base member 420 penetrates the lower concave portion 420b, which is recessed upward so that the outer periphery of the operating portion holding member 416 can be fitted, and the bottom portion (ceiling portion) of the lower concave portion 420b in the vertical direction, and the operating portion holding member 416. An opening 420a having an inner shape through which the gear rail 416a of the above can pass, and an upper recess 420c arranged on the opposite side of the opening 420a from the lower recess 420b and recessed downward to accommodate at least the driven gear 410. It has. Further, as shown in FIG. 49, the base member 420 is opened downward to the outside of the lower recess 420b, and the motor mounting portion 420d for mounting the dial drive motor 414 and the lower recess 420b from the outside to the lower side. It is provided with a plurality of (four in this example) leg portions 420e protruding by a predetermined amount, and a positioning hole 420f that opens downward at the lower end of each leg portion 420e.

Further, the base member 420 has a plurality of cover fixing portions 420g for fixing the cover main body 426 arranged above the upper recess 420c, and the cover fixing portion 420g is upward from different positions outside the upper recess 420c. It is provided with a plurality of board mounting bosses 420h for mounting the dial decorative board 430 projecting to. Further, although detailed description is omitted, the base member 420 is formed with positioning bosses, mounting holes, and the like for positioning each member at appropriate positions on the upper surface and the lower surface thereof.

The base member 420 has a predetermined screw after fitting and inserting the operation portion holding member 416 into the lower recess 420b so that the button support cylinder 416b and the gear rail 416a pass from the lower side with respect to the central opening 420a. Is screwed into the operation portion holding member 416 from the upper side through the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, so that the operation portion holding member 416 can be supported. Although detailed illustration of the base member 420 is omitted, when the operation portion holding member 416 is supported, the upper end of the gear rail 416a is slightly above the upper surface of the ceiling portion of the lower recess 420b, that is, the bottom surface of the upper recess 420c. The driven gear 410 mounted on the gear rail 416a can slide and rotate in the upper recess 420c without any problem.

Further, in the leg portion 420e of the base member 420, the positioning hole 420f formed at the lower end thereof is fitted with the positioning projection 424a formed on the upper surface of the bottom portion of the lower cover 424 described later, and the base member 420. The 420 and the lower cover 424 can be positioned at positions determined to each other. Further, the board mounting boss 420h of the base member 420 protrudes to a position above the driven gear 410 housed and arranged in the upper recess 420c, and the dial decorative board 430 mounted on the board mounting boss 420h is driven. It is designed so that it does not come into contact with the gear 410.

Further, the base member 420 comes into contact with the upper surface of the dial drive motor 414 by attaching the dial drive motor 414 to the motor mounting portion 420d, and heat from the dial drive motor 414 is transferred to the base member 420 side. The heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be sufficiently transferred to the base member 420, and the heat of the dial drive motor 414 can be dissipated by the base member 420. As a result, overheating of the dial drive motor 414 can be suppressed, and it is possible to prevent a malfunction of the dial drive motor 414 or the like due to overheating.

The upper cover 422 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open lower portion, and has an inner diameter opening 422a through which the outer cylinder portion 401c of the dial operation portion 401 can pass and the collar portion 401d cannot pass through. ing. The upper cover 422 has a long direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1) connecting the axis of the pressing operation unit 405 (driven gear 410) and the axis of the dial drive motor 414 (drive gear 412) in a plan view. It is formed so as to extend, and is provided with engaging claws 422b protruding downward at both ends in the longitudinal direction thereof, and by engaging the engaging claws 422b with the engaging portion 424b of the lower cover 424, the upper part is formed. The cover 422 and the lower cover 424 can be assembled.

Further, the upper cover 422 extends downward from the outer circumference of one of the short axis directions (front-rear direction in the pachinko machine 1) (front side in the pachinko machine 1), and the lower end protrudes outward in a claw-shaped locking piece 422c. It has. The locking piece 422c can be locked to the upper plate front decorative member 316 of the plate unit 300, and by locking the locking piece 422c to the upper plate front decorative member 316, It is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from coming out of the operation unit mounting portion 314c upward.

The upper cover 422 has the operation unit holding member 416, the driven gear 410, the dial decorative substrate 430, the dial operation unit 401, and the like attached to the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 from below with respect to the opening 422a. By covering the upper part of the base member 420 so as to pass through, the opening 422a can prevent the dial operation unit 401 from coming out upward.

On the other hand, the lower cover 424 of the operation unit 400 has a box shape with an open upper part, and the outer peripheral shape is substantially the same as the outer peripheral shape of the upper cover 422, and the legs of the base member 420 are located at predetermined positions on the upper surface of the bottom. It is provided with a positioning protrusion 424a that can be fitted with the positioning hole 420f at the lower end of the 420e. The lower cover 424 is provided with engaging portions 424b capable of engaging with the engaging claws 422b of the upper cover 422 at the upper portions of both ends in the long axis direction (left-right direction in the pachinko machine 1), and the engaging portions 424b By engaging the engaging claw 422b, the upper cover 422 can be attached to the lower cover 424.

As shown in the figure, the cover body 426 of the operation unit 400 has an opening 426a through which the upper cover 422 can pass through in the vertical direction in the center, and an operation unit mounting of the dish unit 300 extending outward from both the left and right sides of the opening 426a. A fixing portion 426b fixed to the portion 314c and a fixing boss 426c fixed to the cover fixing portion 420g of the base member 420 extending downward from the lower surface of the outer circumference of the opening 426a are provided.

The operation unit 400 of this example is attached to the dish unit 300 via the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426, and although detailed illustration is omitted, it is attached to the operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300. In the state, the lower surface of the operation unit 400 (lower cover 424) is mounted in a state of being slightly above the upper surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c (for example, 0.5 mm to 2.0 mm), and the operation unit 400 is mounted. The cover body 426 is elastically deformed when the cover body is pressed or hit, so that the impact can be mitigated.

In the operation unit 400, with the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 removed, the fixing portion 426b of the cover main body 426 is attached to the operation unit attachment portion 314c of the dish unit 300 with a predetermined screw, and then. The structure is such that the inner cover 427 and the surface cover 428 are attached to the upper surface of the cover body 426.

In the operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the rotation detection piece 410c of the driven gear 410 that rotates together with the dial operation unit 401 has the length in the circumferential direction in the slit between the adjacent rotation detection pieces 410c and the circumference of the rotation detection piece 410c. The lengths in the directions are the same. Further, in the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b attached to the button decorative substrate 432, the circumferential distance corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 is 2.5 times the length in the circumferential direction of the rotation detection piece 410c. It is said that. As a result, although details will be described later, when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, a time lag occurs in the detection / non-detection of the rotation detection piece 410c by the pair of rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b, and each rotation detection From the detection pattern of the rotation detection piece 410c by the sensors 432a and 432b, it is possible to detect in which direction the dial operation unit 401 is rotating.

Further, although the details of the operation unit 400 of this example will be described later, the dial operation unit 401 can be rotated in the clockwise direction or the counterclockwise direction by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414. .. Further, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401 stepwise by the driving force of the dial drive motor 414 using the stepping motor, or when the player rotates the dial operation unit 401, the operation unit 400 rotates the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to assist the rotation, prevent it from rotating intentionally, and give a click feeling to the rotation. Further, the operation unit 400 can vibrate the dial operation unit 401 by repeatedly rotating the dial drive motor 414 in the forward and reverse directions in small steps.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, as shown in FIG. 51, when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed downward, the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 comes into contact with the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401, and the button cap Since the 407 (pressing operation unit 405) can no longer be immersed in the inner cylinder portion 401a, the load applied to the pressing operation unit 405 is dialed via the step portion 407a and the protruding portion 401f. It can be dispersed to the operation unit 401 side, and the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400) is not easily broken.

Further, in the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial drive motor 414 is moved in small steps in a state where the step portion 407a of the button cap 407 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 are in contact with each other by pressing the pressing operation unit 405. By repeating the rolling and reversing, the pressing operation unit 405 can be vibrated together with the dial operating unit 401, and the vibration of the pressing operation unit 405 can surprise the player and entertain the game and the production. It has become.

According to the operation unit 400 of this example, the dial operation unit 401 that the player can rotate and the pressing operation unit 405 that can be pressed are supported by the metal base member 420, and the operation unit 400 Since the strength can be increased, it is possible to prevent the operation unit 400 from being damaged even if the player or the like hits the operation units 401 and 405 strongly, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely used by the player. In addition to being able to operate, the operability of the operation units 401 and 405 can be improved, and the production using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered. it can.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is arranged at the center of the annular dial operation unit 401, and if the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the dial operation unit 401 is also likely to be hit, and the operation unit The force of hitting 401 and 405 can be distributed to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405, suppressing the concentration of the hitting impact and preventing the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300 from being damaged. Therefore, it is possible to make the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 able to withstand a bang, and the player can freely operate the operation units 401 and 405, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be freely operated. The operability of the 405 can be improved, and the production using the operation units 401 and 405 can be enjoyed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, the base member 420 of the operation unit 400 and the like are housed in the recessed operation unit mounting portion 314c of the dish unit 300, and a predetermined amount of gap is formed between the lower end of the base member 420 and the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. As described above, when the cover body 426 attached to the base member 420 is fixed to the upper surface of the dish unit 300 and the operation units 401 and 405 of the operation unit 400 are hit to give an impact or a load is applied. Until the lower end of the operation unit 400 comes into contact with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c, the impact and load can be absorbed by the elastic deformation of the cover body 426, and the lower end of the operation unit 400 is with the bottom surface of the operation unit mounting portion 314c. After the contact, the bottom portion (dish unit 300) of the operation unit mounting portion 314c can receive an impact or a load, so that the impact or the like from the operation units 401 or 405 is dispersed to prevent the impact or the like from concentrating. It is possible to improve the impact resistance and load resistance of the operation unit 400 and the dish unit 300.

Further, the base member 420 is provided with a plurality of leg portions 420e projecting downward from the positions supporting the operation units 401 and 405, and the leg portions 420e of the base member 420 are the operation unit in the dish unit 300. Even if the impact from the operation units 401 and 405 is applied to the base member 420 in contact with the bottom surface of the mounting portion 314c, the leg portion 420e is not arranged directly under the impact, so that the operation units 401 and 405 of the base member 420 The portion supporting the above is bent by the impact, and the base member 420 is bent (elastically deformed) so that the impact from the operation units 401 and 405 can be absorbed to some extent, and the base member 420 is applied to the dish unit 300. The impact can be reduced to prevent the dish unit 300 from being damaged.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is held by the operation unit holding member 416 attached to the base member 420 from below so that a part of the dial operation unit 401 overlaps with the base member 420 in a plan view. When the operation unit 401 is struck from above, even if the operation unit holding member 416 holding the dial operation unit 401 deviates from the base member 420 and moves downward, the dial operation unit 401 comes into contact with the upper surface of the base member 420. The base member 420 can restrict the downward movement of the dial operation unit 401, and can satisfactorily prevent the dial operation unit 401 from falling.

Further, since the dial operation unit 401 having the pressing operation unit 405 arranged at the center is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 according to the gaming state, the dial operation unit 401 rotates freely (rotational drive including vibration). As a result, the player can be surprised to pay attention to the production by the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can be entertained. At the same time, the dial operation unit 401 is appropriately driven by the dial drive motor 414 to appropriately drive the dial operation unit. It is possible to make the production using the 401 (pressing operation unit 405) more diverse and less likely to get bored, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is rotated by the dial drive motor 414 via the driven gear 410 and the drive gear 412, and the position of the rotation shaft of the dial drive motor 414 is probably set to the dial operation unit 401 (driven gear). Since the position can be eccentric with respect to the position of the rotation shaft of 410), even if the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is strongly hit, the impact is transmitted through the rotation shaft of the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 from being directly affected, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 (operation unit 400) from being damaged.

Further, since the opening 420a of the base member 420 has a smaller diameter than the dial operation unit 401 and the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the gear rail 416a of the operation unit holding member 416 through the opening 420a, the dial operation unit 401 is supported. Even if the gear rail 416a (operation unit holding member 416) moves downward due to an impact or load from 401, the dial operation unit 401 can come into contact with the upper surface of the opening 420a of the base member 420, and the dial operation unit 401 is the base member. It is possible to surely prevent the depression from being lower than 420. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 is supported by the annular gear rail 416a, the contact area between the dial operation unit 401 and the operation unit holding member 416 (gear rail 416a) can be increased, and the dial operation unit 401 can be increased. It is possible to prevent the operation unit holding member 416 from being damaged by dispersing the impact and the load from the operation unit.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 that rotationally drives the dial operation unit 401 is attached to the metal base member 420, the dial operation unit 401 is frequently rotationally driven by the dial drive motor 414, or the dial drive motor 414. Even if the amount of heat generated is increased due to an excessive load on the dial drive motor 414 due to the player forcibly stopping the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 even though the dial drive motor 414 is rotationally driven by the motor. The heat generated from the dial drive motor 414 can be satisfactorily dissipated and dissipated through the base member 420, and it is possible to prevent the dial drive motor 414 from malfunctioning due to overheating, and the dial drive motor 414 can be operated. With the pachinko machine 1 that can withstand a high load, can fully embody the effect of the dial operation unit 401 using the dial drive motor 414 as described above, and entertain the player. can do.

Further, the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection sensor 432c for detecting the press of the press operation unit 405 are provided, and the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 are provided. Since it is possible to detect the rotation operation and the pressing operation of, it is possible to perform an effect according to the operation of the player based on the detection signal, which is more suitable for the player who operates the operation units 401 and 405. It is possible to provide a sensational effect, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. Further, the dial decoration board 430 and the button decoration board 432 for illuminating the operation units 401 and 405 are provided, and the operation units 401 and 405 can be luminescently decorated. Therefore, the operation units 401 and 405 emit light. By doing so, the interest of the player can be attracted to the operation units 401 and 405, and the player can easily operate the operation units 401 and 405.

Further, when the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is pressed, the step portion 407a of the pressing operation unit 405 and the protruding portion 401f of the dial operation unit 401 come into contact with each other, so that the player can press the pressing operation unit 405. Is pressed, the dial drive motor 414 repeatedly rotates forward and reverse within a predetermined angle range to vibrate the dial operation unit 401, thereby vibrating the dial operation unit 401 via the step portion 407a in contact with the protrusion 401f of the dial operation unit 401. The pressing operation unit 405 can also be vibrated. Therefore, even if a vibrator or the like for vibrating the pressing operation unit 405 is not separately provided, the player can be given an operation feeling to the pressing operation unit 405, so that the effect using the operation unit 400 can be enjoyed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game. In addition, since the pressing operation unit 405 vibrates when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the pressing operation unit 405, which was thought not to move without permission, can greatly surprise the player, which is good. It is possible to make people think that there may be something, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest. Therefore, unlike the conventional operation unit, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can move freely to attract the player's attention to the operation unit 400, and the player can participate in the production using the operation unit 400. In addition to making it easier, the operation unit 400 can be positively operated by the player, and the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 is enjoyed, and the interest in the game is reduced. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operating unit 401 are brought into contact with each other when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, the force from the pressing operation unit 405 can be transmitted to the dial operation unit 401 side. Even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck hard, the load and impact applied to the pressing operation unit 405 can be dispersed to the dial operation unit 401 side as well, and the load resistance and impact resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be distributed. Can be enhanced. Therefore, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is struck hard, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from being damaged, so that the game is prevented from being interrupted due to the damage of the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit 400). It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered due to the interruption of the game.

Further, the pressing operation unit 405 is rotatably supported only within a predetermined angle range with respect to the circumference of the axial center extending in the vertical direction, and when the player presses the pressing operation unit 405, the dial is driven. Even if the dial operation unit 401 is rotationally driven by the motor 414, it is possible to prevent the pressing operation unit 405 from trying to rotate together with the dial operation unit 401, so that the player can operate the dial in the operation unit 400. The roles of the unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be reliably recognized, and the player can easily enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400, and the guide to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 405. The word "PUSH" does not rotate or tilt significantly, making it easier for the player to read, and making the player surely recognize that the pressing operation unit 405 is the pressing operation. be able to.

Further, the dial operation unit 401 is provided with a projecting portion 401f protruding from the inner circumference of the inner cylinder portion 401a toward the axial center, and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation unit 405 has a diameter smaller than a predetermined position in the vertical direction. Since the step portion 407a formed by the above is provided, the inner peripheral surface of the inner cylinder portion 401a of the dial operation portion 401 and the outer peripheral surface of the pressing operation portion 405 can be brought as close as possible to each other at the upper end of the operation unit 400. The gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be made as small as possible to improve the appearance, and the inside of the operation unit 400 can be improved through the gap between the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. It is possible to make it difficult for foreign matter such as dust and dirt to enter, and prevent the occurrence of problems such as the dial operation unit 401 becoming difficult to rotate or the pressing operation unit 405 becoming difficult to press due to the intrusion of foreign matter. be able to.

Further, the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operating unit 401 in the operating unit 400 is formed in an annular shape, and when the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed, which of the dial operating unit 401 is in the circumferential direction. Since the contact can be made even at the position, even if the pressing operation unit 405 is pressed (pressing a position deviated to the outer circumference from the center of the pressing operation unit 405), it is surely brought into contact with the dial operation unit 401. It is possible to reliably transmit the rotational drive from the dial drive motor 414 to the pressing operation unit 405 via the dial operation unit 401. Further, since the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 are in circular contact with each other, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be widely distributed to the dial operation unit 401 side, and the load resistance to the pressing operation unit 405 can be improved. Impact resistance can be further improved.

Further, since the contact portion between the pressing operation unit 405 and the dial operation unit 401 in the operation unit 400 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rotation axis of the dial operation unit 401, it may not be inclined. In comparison, the contact area can be relatively increased, and the driving force from the dial drive motor 414 can be easily transmitted to the pressing operation unit 405 side via the dial operation unit 401. Further, the load from the pressing operation unit 405 can be radially dispersed in the outward direction in the direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the rotation axis, preventing the load from concentrating, and the resistance of the operation unit 400. The load resistance and impact resistance can be surely increased, and the durability of the operation unit 400 can be increased, and the occurrence of defects during the game can be reduced as much as possible, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

Further, since the dial drive motor 414 of the operation unit 400 is a stepping motor capable of forward rotation and reverse rotation, the dial operation unit 401 is not only simply rotated, but can be easily stopped at a predetermined position, and forward rotation and reverse rotation can be performed. It can be easily vibrated by repetition, and the operation unit 400 (pachinko machine 1) that exerts the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely embodied.

Further, since the operation unit 400 is supported by the plate unit 300 provided with the upper plate 301 for storing the game balls, the strength and rigidity of the plate unit 300 is high in order to store a large number of game balls. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently cope with a bang on the operation unit 400 (pressing operation unit 405), and it is possible to easily enjoy the effect using the operation unit 400.

[Handle Device] Next, the handle device 500 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the handle device disassembled and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the handle device 500 of the present embodiment is attached to the handle bracket 140 attached to the front surface of the door frame base main body 110 of the door frame base unit 100 through the lower opening 330b of the lower plate side cover 330 of the plate unit 300. On the front of the handle base 502, which is fixed and cylindrical and whose front end bulges round in the direction perpendicular to the axis, the handle body 504 which is arranged on the front side of the handle base 502 so as to be rotatable relative to the handle base 502, and the front of the handle body 504 It includes a front end cover 506 that is arranged and fixed to the handle base 502 and rotatably supports the handle body 504 in cooperation with the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rear end and the front end are rotatably supported by the inner base 508 attached to the front surface of the handle base 502 on the rear side of the handle body 504, the inner base 508 and the front end cover 506, and the handle body A shaft member 510 that is integrally rotatable with the 504 and has a drive gear portion 510a on the outer periphery, a transmission gear 511 that meshes with the drive gear portion 510a of the shaft member 510, and a detection shaft portion 512a that can rotate integrally with the transmission gear 511. It is equipped with a rotation position detection sensor 512 sandwiched between the inner base 508 and the handle base 502.

Further, in the handle device 500, one end side is attached to the inner base 508 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 511, and the detection shaft portion 512a of the rotation position detection sensor 512 is viewed clockwise in the front view via the transmission gear 511. With respect to the auxiliary spring 514 for urging, the touch sensor 516 attached to the rear side of the inner base 508, the launch stop switch 518 attached to different positions on the rear surface of the inner base 508, and the inner base 508. A single-shot button 520 that is rotatably supported to operate the launch stop switch 518, one end is attached to the handle base 502 and the other end is attached to the handle body 504, and the handle body 504 is placed in the initial rotation position (counterclockwise when viewed from the front). It is provided with a handle return spring 522 that urges the wheel to return to the rotating end in the direction of (1).

As shown in the figure, the handle base 502 of the handle device 500 of this example has a form having a rear end portion that is cylindrically extended rearward from a front end portion that is open on the front side and bulges rearward. Three groove portions 502a extending in the axial direction are formed on the outer circumference of the cylindrical shape of the above. The three grooves 502a of the handle base 502 are one on the upper side, two on the lower side, and unequally spaced in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the three ridges 143 in the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140. Have been placed. The handle base 502 is supported in a non-rotatable state by being inserted into the tubular portion 141 of the handle bracket 140 so that the groove portion 502a fits with the ridge 143.

In the handle device 500, the handle body 504 is formed with arc-shaped slits 504a arranged concentrically with the rotation axis thereof, and the front end cover 506 is formed with three mounting bosses 506a projecting rearward. These mounting bosses 506a are fixed to the front surface of the handle base 502 through the slit 504a of the handle body 504. As a result, the circumferential end of the slit 504a in the handle body 504 comes into contact with the mounting boss 506a of the front end cover 506, so that the rotation range of the handle body 504 is restricted.

Further, in the handle device 500, a locking protrusion 504b projecting rearward is formed on the handle main body 504, and the other end side (front end side) of the coiled handle return spring 522 is formed on the locking protrusion 504b. By being locked, the handle body 504 is urged to rotate counterclockwise in the front view by the handle return spring 522 attached to the handle base 502 on one end side.

The handle device 500 of this example is adapted to be attached to the handle attachment portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 via the handle bracket 140. Since the mounting surface of the handle mounting portion 114 of the door frame base main body 110 is inclined so as to face the outside (open side) in a plan view viewed from above, the handle mounted via the handle bracket 140 The device 500 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical surface of the pachinko machine 1) to form a door frame. It is designed to be mounted and fixed to 5. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle device 500, and the rotation operation can be easily performed without any discomfort in the rotation operation.

Further, in the handle device 500, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is a variable resistor, and when the handle body 504 (handle device 500) is rotated, the rotation position detection sensor 512 is transmitted via the shaft member 510 and the transmission gear 511. The detection shaft portion 512a will rotate. Then, the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft portion 512a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 654 in the ball launching device 650 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the rotation position detection sensor 512. Then, the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle device 500. Therefore, when the handle body 504 is turned so that the firing intensity becomes equal to or higher than a predetermined value, the game ball fired toward the game area 1100 reaches the right side area on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and the right side area is reached. Flow down. On the other hand, when the handle body 504 is turned so that the firing intensity becomes smaller than the predetermined value, the game ball fired toward the game area 1100 becomes the center accessory 2.
It flows down the left area on the left side of 500. In this way, it is possible to hit the game ball into the right side area and the left side area by the operation of the player. The ball speed of the game ball flowing down the right side region on the right side of the center accessory 2500 is relatively faster than the ball speed of the game ball flowing down the left side region on the left side of the center accessory 2500. A game ball that flows down the right side region at a relatively high ball speed can win a prize at the second starting port 2102, which will be described later, and a game ball that flows down the left side region at a relatively slow ball speed will be described later. It is possible to win a prize in the first starting port 2101.

The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle body 504 and the front end cover 508 are electrically plated, and the touch sensor 516 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the handle body 504 or the like. Then, when the handle body 504 rotates while the touch sensor 516 detects the contact of the player, the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled by the strength corresponding to the rotation, and the game ball is driven. Can be done. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball by rotating the handle device 500 in some way without touching the handle device 500, the firing solenoid 654 is not driven and the game ball cannot be driven. It is possible to prevent the player from playing a game different from the original one and reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, when the player presses the single-shot button 520 while rotating the handle device 500, the firing stop switch 518 detects the operation of the single-shot button 520, and the firing control unit 4120 (see FIG. 119) controls the firing solenoid 654. The rotary drive can be stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 520, before operating the single-shot button 520. It is possible to launch a game ball with the driving strength.

In the handle device 500 of this example, the rotation operation of the handle body 504 is electrically detected by the rotation position detection sensor 512, and then the launch control unit 4120 detects the rotation position from the rotation position detection sensor 512. Since the rotational drive strength of the firing solenoid 654 is controlled, the handle device 500 provided in the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 provided in the main body frame 3 are doord like a conventional pachinko machine. It is not necessary to provide a mechanical (for example, a joint unit) mechanism so that the frames 5 are linked to each other when the frame 5 is closed and the links are released when the door frame 5 is opened, so that the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. At the same time, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of defects in the joint unit, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest due to the malfunction of the gaming ball.

[Foul Cover Unit] Next, the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. FIG. 53A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 53B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 54 is a front view showing a state in which the front cover of the foul cover unit is removed.

The foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 is attached to the rear surface below the game window 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is launched by a game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700, which will be described later, or a hit ball launching device 650. The game ball (foul ball) that has not reached the game area 1100 in spite of this is guided to the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300. The foul cover unit 540 of this example includes a cover base 542 whose front side is open and has a plurality of game ball flow paths inside, and a front cover 544 that closes the front end of the cover base 542.

As shown in FIG. 53B, the cover base 542 of the foul cover unit 540 communicates with the first ball entrance 542a, which is arranged in the upper right corner in the rear view and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the first ball entrance 542a. The first ball passage 542b that expands to the right side in the front view toward the front end of the cover base 542, and the second ball entrance 542c that is located outside the first ball entrance 542a (on the right side in the rear view) and is larger than the first ball entrance 542a. And inside the cover base 542 that communicates with the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d that extends downward and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower right corner in the front view is provided. The first ball entrance 542a and the second ball entrance 542c are the normal ball outlet 774 and the full ball outlet 77 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. They are formed at positions facing each other. As shown in the figure, the height of the portion of the cover base 542 extending in the left-right direction along the lower end of the second ball passage 542d is about three times as high as the outer diameter of the game ball. , A storage space 546 that can accommodate a predetermined amount of game balls is formed.

Further, the cover base 542 communicates with the foul ball inlet 542e, which is arranged at the substantially central upper part in the left-right direction and opens upward, and the foul ball entrance 542e, and can guide the game ball to the upper part near the downstream of the second ball passage 542d. It is provided with a foul ball passage 542f. Further, the cover base 542 is provided with an opening / closing actuating piece 542g for operating the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the lower rear surface of the second ball inlet 542c. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the opening / closing operation piece 542g abuts on the spherical contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 in the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 to rotate the opening / closing crank 793. The open / close shutter 792 can be opened.

The front cover 544 of the foul cover unit 540 is formed in a substantially plate shape that closes the front surface of the cover base 542, is arranged in the upper left corner of the front view, communicates with the first ball passage 542b of the cover base 542, and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a is provided, and the second ball outlet 544b, which is arranged in the lower right corner of the front view and communicates with the downstream end of the second ball passage of the cover base 542 and penetrates in the front-rear direction. The first ball outlet 544a of the front cover 544 is connected to the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300 through the notch 101a of the door frame base unit 100. Further, the second ball outlet 544b is connected to the rear end of the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h in the plate unit 300 through the ball passage port 110f of the door frame base main body 110.

In the foul cover unit 540 of this example, the game ball supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the first ball entrance 542a is passed through the first ball passage 542b to the first ball outlet. It is possible to supply from 544a to the upper plate 301 via the upper plate ball supply port 310c of the plate unit 300. Further, the foul cover unit 540 passes the game ball supplied from the full ball outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 to the second ball entrance 542c through the second ball passage 542d to the second ball exit. It is possible to supply from 544b to the lower plate 302 via the lower plate ball supply gutter 310h and the lower plate ball supply port 310g of the plate unit 300.

Further, although the details of the foul cover unit 540 will be described later, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e is located below the foul space 626 of the main body frame 3. When the game ball launched by the hit ball launching device 650 does not reach the game area 1100 but becomes a foul ball and falls in the foul space 626, it is received by the foul ball entrance 542e. Then, the foul cover unit 540 discharges (supplies) the game ball received at the foul ball inlet 542e from the second ball outlet 544b to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the foul ball passage 542f and the second ball passage 542d. ) Can be done.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 of this example forms a side surface on the upstream side (left side when viewed from the front) of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and is swingable by the game ball stored in the accommodation space 546. A swing member 548 pivotally supported by the swing member 548, a full tank detection sensor 550 that detects the swing of the swing member 548, and a spring that urges the swing member 548 in a non-detection state by the full tank detection sensor 550. It is equipped with 552. As shown in FIG. 54, the lower end of the swing member 548 is rotatably supported by the cover base 542, and the upper end of the swing member 548 rotates to the left side in the front view, and is substantially vertical. The left side wall of the accommodation space 546 is formed in such a state. Further, the swing member 548 is urged by a spring 552 to a position where it is in a substantially vertical state. Further, the rocking member 548 is formed with a detection piece 548a projecting outward on the side surface opposite to the accommodation space 546 side, and the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. There is.

Further, the foul cover unit 540 includes an earth rail 554 arranged at the bottom of the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d, and a plate-shaped earth metal fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542 when viewed from the rear. , And can remove static electricity generated by the rolling resistance caused by the rolling of the game ball.

In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 700 are supplied from the normal ball outlet 774 of the full tank branch unit 770 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 via the foul cover unit 540. Even if the upper plate 301 is full, if the game ball is further paid out from the prize ball unit 700, it stays in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and further, at the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. When the upstream normal passage 773 is also full, the game ball rolls to the full tank passage 775 side via the branch space 772 of the full tank branch unit 770 (see FIG. 84), and the full tank branch unit 770 It will be supplied from the full tank outlet 776 to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 via the second ball inlet 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540.

Then, when the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 was filled with the game balls, the game balls could not be discharged from the second ball outlet 544b of the foul cover unit 540, and the game balls stayed in the accommodation space 546 in the second ball passage 542d. The game balls will be stored. Further, as the game balls are discharged from the prize ball unit 700 and a large number of game balls are stored in the accommodation space 546, the storage pressure of the game balls acts on the swing member 548 to resist the urging force of the spring 552. The upper end of the swing member 548 will move to the left. Then, when the detection piece 548a of the swing member 548 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550, the payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 119) stops the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700, and the game is played. A person is notified to urge the player to discharge the game ball in the plate unit 300 to the outside.

When the game ball in the accommodation space 546 (lower plate 302) is discharged and the swing member 548 returns to a substantially vertical state by the urging force of the spring 552, the detection piece 548a is detected by the full tank detection sensor 550. It is not detected, and the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 is restarted.

[Antistatic Measures for Door Frame Base Board 194] As described above, the foul cover unit 540 (a molded product of transparent polycarbonate) (see FIGS. 53 (A), (B) and 54) guides the game ball to the lower plate. A second ball passage 542d and a storage space 546 for accommodating the game ball are formed, and the game ball (metal) passes at a high speed while contacting the wall surface of the passage, so that the game ball and the resin rub against each other. As a result, static electricity is generated, and the game ball is easily charged.

Therefore, at the bottom of the second ball passage 542d, a metal earth rail 554 for removing static electricity of the game ball generated by the rolling resistance due to the rolling of the game ball and discharging it to the lower plate is provided. There is. Further, the foul cover unit 540 is provided with a plate-shaped ground fitting 556 that covers the right end and the left end of the cover base 542, and the ground fitting 556 at the left end is conductive to the ground rail 554 on the bottom surface of the foul cover unit 540. (See FIGS. 53 (A), (B) and 54). The ground fitting 556 is screwed to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (FIGS. 18, 23, 26) of the door frame 5 so that static electricity can escape.

The second ball passage 542d of the foul cover unit 540 can remove static electricity from the game ball by the earth rail 554 as described above, but the electrostatic charge is accumulated in the polycarbonate of this part, and it may reach 10 kV. There is (at most 3-4 kV even if you feel pain due to the discharge of the accumulated electrostatic charge). In addition, the electric charge accumulated in the resin escapes only in the immediate vicinity even if it is grounded, and most of it remains. Then, due to electrostatic induction by this electric charge, there is a risk that the digital amplifier circuit of the door frame base substrate 194 in the vicinity thereof may malfunction.

In the game machine, a ground wire for releasing static electricity is attached to, for example, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. However, there is a risk that the ground wire may be broken or the connection terminal of the ground wire may be disconnected due to an unexpected accident.

The embodiment described below is made in view of such circumstances, and even if the ground is not taken, electrostatic induction is not caused by the electric charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540. The present invention relates to an invention relating to an antistatic mechanism that shields a door frame base substrate 194 with a metal plate (shield plate 562 described later) and further prevents static electricity released to the metal plate for shielding from jumping to surrounding conductors. Is.

FIG. 55 is a front view of the antistatic mechanism. FIG. 56 is a perspective view of a door frame showing a state provided with an antistatic mechanism when viewed from the back. FIG. 57 is a rear view of a main part of the door frame showing a state in which the antistatic mechanism is provided. Further, FIG. 58 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 57.

As shown in FIG. 55, the antistatic mechanism 560 in the embodiment is a thin metal (tin plate in this example) plate that shields the door frame base substrate 194 so that electrostatic induction is not caused by the electric charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540. It is composed of a thin plate of polyethylene terephthalate (PET) which is formed in an outer peripheral shape larger than the shield plate 562 and which insulates the electric charge transferred to the shield plate 562 so as not to transfer to the surrounding conductors. It is configured to include an insulating sheet 570.

The shield plate 562 has a flat conductive portion 563 that is conductively contacted by abutting the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 of the door frame 5 on the upper portion in the vertical direction, and a step portion 568 that is bent in the horizontal direction. A substantially plate-shaped shield portion 564 located below and behind the conductive portion 563 and arranged over substantially the entire back side of the door frame base substrate cover 195 attached to the lower back surface of the door frame 5. And have.

A mounting portion 565 extending in a substantially semicircular shape is formed in the middle of the upper side of the conductive portion 563, an insertion hole 566 is formed in the mounting portion 565, and a mounting hole 567 is formed in the left corner near the upper side of the conductive portion 563. Has been drilled.

The insulating sheet 570 has a shape larger than the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562, and functions to electrically insulate the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 from the surrounding conductors. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, an insulating sheet 570 is attached to the upper side of the back surface of the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562 by sticking.

In FIGS. 56 to 58, as described above, the rear side of the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with the door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIGS. 23 and 24). The insulating sheet 570 of the antistatic mechanism 560 is arranged over substantially the entire back surface of the door frame base substrate cover 195. At this time, the shield plate 562 is arranged on the back surface of the insulating sheet 570 so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570. That is, the shield plate 562 is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the door frame base substrate cover 195 and the shield plate 562. At this time, the outer peripheral portion of the insulating sheet 570 is located outside the outer peripheral portion of the shield plate 562 in the radial direction. Then, the conductive portion 563 of the shield plate 562 comes into contact with the back surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 (see FIG. 23) of the door frame 5, so that the conductive contact is made and the static electricity is released.

The mounting boss portions 110g, 110h, 110i, 110j for the foul cover unit 540 are projected at appropriate positions on the right side of the lower back surface of the door frame 5 (door frame base main body 110). Further, at appropriate locations on the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, screw insertion holes 154a and 154b for screwing the shield plate 562 and the ground fitting 556 to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 so as to release static electricity. 154c is provided (see FIG. 57).

The shield plate 562 is positioned by inserting the mounting boss portion 110 g into the insertion hole 566, and the screw is inserted into the screw insertion hole 154a of the mounting hole 567 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154, and the screw is screwed into the door frame. It is screwed to the base body 110.

The foul cover unit 540 is arranged with the front cover 544 in surface contact with the back surface of the shield plate 562, and a screw is inserted through the mounting portion, and the screw is screwed into the mounting boss portions 110g to 110j. It is screwed to the back surface of the door frame base body 110. Further, a screw is inserted into the mounting portion of the ground metal fitting 556, and a screw is inserted into the screw insertion holes 154b and 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. By screwing the screw, static electricity is applied to the metal lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. It is screwed to the door frame base body 110 so that it can escape.

The shield plate 562 and the foul cover unit 540 are attached by being fastened together with the attachment boss portion 110 g by screws. Further, the ground wire (not shown) is fastened together with the ground metal fitting 556 by screws to the screw insertion hole 154c of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154.

[Action of antistatic mechanism 560] The static electricity accumulated in the foul cover unit 540 is made of metal through the shield portion 564 of the shield plate 562 in surface contact and the conductive portion 563 in surface contact with the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154. Since it escapes to the reinforcing sheet metal 154, the door frame base substrate 194 can be shielded by the metal thin plate-shaped shield plate 562 so that electrostatic induction is not caused by the electric charge accumulated in the foul cover unit 540.

Further, since the shield plate 562 is arranged so that the outer peripheral edge of the shield portion 564 is surrounded by the insulating sheet 570, the electric charge transferred to the shield plate 562 is transferred from the corners and end faces of the shield portion 564 to the surrounding conductor (metal). Objects and harnesses) can be prevented from jumping.

[Ball Feeding Unit] Subsequently, the ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62. FIG. 59 (A) is a front perspective view of the ball feed unit in the door frame, and FIG. 59 (B) is a rear perspective view of the ball feed unit. Further, FIG. 60 is a rear view of the ball feed unit. Further, FIG. 61 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 61 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feed unit after removing the rear case. Further, FIG. 62A is a plan view of the fraud prevention member in the ball feed unit, FIG. 62B is a front view of the fraud prevention member, and FIG. 62C is a perspective view of the fraud prevention member as viewed from the front. , (D) are explanatory views showing the operation of the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 580 in the door frame 5 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 to the hitting ball launching device 650 one by one, and also supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 301. The upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 can be removed to the lower plate 302 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 341.

In the ball feed unit 580, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 are supplied through the upper plate ball discharge port 310d of the plate unit base 310 and the ball feed opening 113 of the door frame base main body 110 in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 581 having a penetrating entrance 581a and a ball outlet 581b that opens below the entrance 581a and having an open rear, and a box-shaped front cover 581 that closes the rear end of the front cover 581 and opens the front. A rear cover 582, a rear cover 582, and a front cover, which are box-shaped and have a ball hitting supply port 582a for supplying a game ball that penetrates in the front-rear direction and enters from the entrance 581a of the front cover 581 to the hitting ball launching device 650. A ball pulling member 583 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 581 and has a partition portion 583a that separates the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b on the rear side of the front cover 581. , The game balls on the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 are sent one by one to the hit ball supply port 582a of the rear cover, and are rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582. The ball feed member 584 and the ball feed solenoid 585 that rotates the ball feed member 584 are provided. In this example, as shown in the figure, the ball feed member 584 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 581a in front view, the ball feed member 583 is on the left side of the ball feed member 584, and the ball feed solenoid 585 is on the right side. Have been placed.

The front cover 581 of the ball feed unit 580 is provided with an arcuate slit 581c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball extraction member 583 on the left side of the ball extraction port 581b when viewed from the front. From 581c, the operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 581 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 581a, and when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the rear end opening of the ball guiding flow path 344b in the upper plate ball removing base 344. Is formed to close.

Further, the ball pulling member 583 has a partition portion 583a and a partition portion 583a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 584 by partitioning the space between the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b below the entrance 581a. It extends downward from the end on the opposite side of the ball feed member 584, and bends in a dogleg shape from the middle of the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 581b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction around the axis. A rotating paddle portion 583b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 583c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 583b, and a side surface of the rotating rod portion 583b below the operating rod 583c. It is provided with a weight portion 583d projecting from the partition portion 583a to the opposite side. The operating rod 583c of the ball removing member 583 is formed so as to project forward through an arc-shaped slit 581c formed in the front cover 581 (see FIG. 59), and the ball feed opening of the door frame base main body 110. The plate unit 300 comes into contact with the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 via 113.

Further, the ball feed member 584 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 584a and a blocking portion 584a centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction in the direction of the entrance 581a and the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583. It includes a ball holding portion 584b recessed in an arc shape from the rear end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 584c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 584b. The blocking portion 584a and the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 54 are each formed within an angle range of about 90 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 584b of the ball feeding member 584 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feed member 584 rotates around the rotation shaft core by moving the paddle portion 584c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feed solenoid 585. ing.

In the ball feed member 584, the blocking portion 584a faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and at the same time, the ball holding portion 584b faces the supply position in the direction in which the ball holding portion 584b communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a, and the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction of the partition portion 583a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position. When the ball feed member 584 is in the supply position, the game ball held by the ball holding portion 584b is supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 from the hitting ball supply port 582a, and the game enters the partition portion 583a from the entrance 581a. The ball is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 584b (ball hitting port 582a) by the blocking portion 584a, and stays on the partition portion 583a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 584b faces the direction of the partition portion 583a, and the end of the ball holding portion 584b on the paddle portion 584c side closes the ball hitting supply port 582a. , Only one game ball on the partition portion 583a is held in the ball holding portion 584b.

Further, the ball feed unit 580 has a ball feed operating rod 586 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 585 and a ball feed operating rod 586 that swings back and forth by the movement of the tip swinging in the vertical direction. It includes a ball feed crank 587 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 584 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 587 has an engaging portion 587a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 586, and a side of the engaging portion 587a that engages with the ball feed operating rod 586. Is arranged on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 581 and the rear cover 582, and a shaft portion 587b and a ball feeding member 584 extending upward from the shaft portion 587b. A transmission portion 587c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 584c (see FIG. 61) that projects downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center in the above.

In the ball feed unit 580 of this example, the ball feed operation rod 586 and the ball feed crank 587 transmit the movement of the ball feed operation rod 586 that swings by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 that moves forward and backward in the vertical direction, and the ball feed member The 584 can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 585 is not driven (normal time), the tip of the ball feed operating rod 586 that swings away from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 584 is located at the supply position. Further, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven, the ball feed operating rod 586 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 585 and the swinging tip is positioned upward so that the ball feed member 584 rotates to the holding position. It has become. That is, when the ball feed solenoid 585 is driven (ON state), the ball feed member 584 receives one game ball, and when the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 is released (OFF state), the ball feed member 584 receives the ball feed member 584. The game ball is sent (supplied) to the hit ball launching device 650 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 in the ball feed unit 580 is controlled by the launch control unit 4120 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 654.

Further, the ball pulling member 583 rotatably supported by the ball feed unit 580 of this example is provided with a moment such that the weight portion 583d rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. The rotation of the working rod 583c protruding forward is restricted by contacting the upper end of the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 in the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 of the plate unit 300. In the normal state, the partition portion 583a of the ball pulling member 583 partitions the entrance 581a and the ball pulling port 581b so that the game ball does not enter the ball pulling port 581b side. Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button 341 of the upper plate ball removal mechanism 340 in the plate unit 300 downward, the upper plate ball removal slider 343 slides downward together with the abutting piece 343a to abut. As the piece 343a moves downward, the working paddle 583c also moves relatively downward.

In this way, when the operating rod 583c moves downward together with the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340, the ball removing member 583 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the entrance by the partition portion 583a. The partition between the ball outlet 381a and the ball outlet 381b is released, and the game ball that has entered from the entrance 381a is discharged from the ball outlet 381b to the ball extraction flow path 344c of the upper plate ball extraction base 344 of the plate unit 300. , It is designed to be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 302.

Since the contact piece 343a of the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 with which the operating rod 583c of the ball pulling member 583 abuts is urged upward by the coil spring, the game ball is vigorously supplied onto the partition portion 583a. However, the impact can be absorbed by the coil spring that urges the upper plate ball pulling slider 343 via the operating paddle 583c, and it is possible to prevent the ball pulling member 583 and the like from being damaged, and the game ball It is possible to prevent the partition portion 583a from bouncing back.

Further, the ball feed unit 580 of this example is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 582b (see FIG. 61 (B) and the like) recessed forward to the upper right in the rear view of the ball hitting supply port 582a in the rear cover 582. At the same time, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b. The fraud prevention member 588 of the ball feed unit 580 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 from the rear side. As shown in FIG. 60 and the like, the fraud prevention member 588 has an overall outer diameter formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view, and is located on the left side in the rear view from substantially the center in the vertical direction to the opposite side. The upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c, and the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c are vertically divided with the dividing line 588a extending to the base end side (right side side) of the above as a boundary. A V formed between the upper piece 588b and the lower piece 588c by bending the base end side of the upper piece 588b in the direction perpendicular to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 588 (rearward) so as to move away from each other. It is provided with a character-shaped cutting portion 588d and an inclined portion 588e formed at the tips of the upper piece portion 588b and the lower piece portion 588c and inclined toward the cutting portion 588d.

As shown in the figure, the fraud prevention member 588 has a cut portion 588d by bending the base end side of the upper piece portion 588b so that the tip end (left end side in rear view) of the upper piece portion 588b moves rearward. It is formed in a V shape in a plan view, and the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is inserted into the V shape. The cut portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588 has a state in which the lower side of the upper piece portion 588b and the upper side of the lower piece portion 588c intersect at a predetermined angle in a plan view, and the gap becomes narrower toward the base end side. It is formed like this.

Further, the inclined portion 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 is formed at the tip of the cutting portion 588d, and the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be guided and guided into the cutting portion 588d by the inclined portion 588e. It has become like. In the ball feed unit 580 of this example, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted from the rear side in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582 as shown in the figure, and the cutting portion 588d in the mounting recess 582b of the rear cover 582. The portion corresponding to the portion where the ball is formed penetrates in the front-rear direction and at the same time communicates with the hit ball supply port 582a. In other words, the rear cover 582 is formed in a shape in which the hit ball supply port 582a extends into the mounting recess 582b.

According to the fraud prevention member 588, the fraudulent game ball I to which the wire rod Iw is attached is supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the hit ball launching device 650, and the fraudulent game ball I is supplied to the game area of the game board 4 by the hit ball launcher 650. When the ball is driven into the 1100, the illegal game ball I launched by the ball launching device 650 moves diagonally to the upper left along the launch rail 660 in front view, and moves between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. Attempts to enter the game area 1100 through. At this time, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I is pulled by the momentum of the hit game ball I, and the wire rod Iw is different from the movement trajectory of the illegal game ball I, and the passage of the game ball. It will move along the route connecting the shortest distance within. Therefore, the wire rod Iw extending from the plate unit 300 to the ball launching device 650 side through the ball feeding port 582a of the ball feeding unit 580 causes the game ball I to move in the upper left direction (upper right direction in the rear view). Then, in order to move on the shortest route, the ball is pulled toward the upper right corner of the back view of the ball supply port 582a, and moves into the mounting recess 582b formed in the upper right corner of the back view of the ball supply port 582a. Then, the wire rod Iw that has moved to the portion (inside the mounting recess 582b) extending to the right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 582a is cut by the pair of inclined portions 588e of the fraud prevention member 588 arranged at the position. After being guided into 588d, it is further pulled to the right in the rear view by the momentum of the illegal game ball I.

As a result, the wire rod Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I is pulled by the force of the fraudulent game ball I in the direction in which the gap is narrowed (to the left in front view) at the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588. In this state, friction and shearing force act on the cutting portion 588d to cut the wire rod Iw (see FIG. 62 (D)). At this time, since the momentum of the illegal game ball I with the wire rod Iw is attenuated due to friction acting on the wire rod Iw or the like, it is between the outer rail 1111 and the launch rail 660 without invading the game area 1100. It will be discharged through.

Therefore, since the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I can be cut by the cutting portion 588d of the fraud prevention member 588, the fraudulent act is performed by the illegal game ball I with the wire rod Iw in the game area 1100. It is designed to prevent it from being damaged. Even if the fraudulent game ball I invades the game area 1100, the wire rod Iw can be cut by the fraud prevention member 588 as described above, so that the fraudulent act cannot be performed. Further, even if the wire rod Iw cannot be cut by the fraud prevention member 588, the wire rod Iw bites into the V-shaped cutting portion 588d to attenuate the momentum of the illegal game ball I and the game area 1100. Since it is possible to prevent the invasion of the inside, it is possible to prevent cheating.

As described above, according to this example, after the game balls are stored in the upper plate 301 and the game balls are supplied to the ball feed unit 580, the player uses the handle device 500 provided on the front surface of the door frame 5. When operated, the game ball is sent to the hit ball launching device 650 by the drive of the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580, and the game ball is driven into the game area 1100 by the ball feed launcher 650, so that the game window 101 of the door frame 5 The game will be performed in the game area 1100 which is visible through the door frame, and the player can be entertained. At the same time, a feed mechanism (ball feed member 584 and ball feed solenoid 585) is placed on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100. Etc.) and a ball feed unit 580 equipped with a discharge mechanism (ball pulling member 583), so that not only the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583 but also the ball feeding member 584 and the ball launching device 650 are possible. It is possible to reduce the number of game balls remaining on the ball feed member 584 side as much as possible when the game balls in the upper plate 301 are discharged by operating the upper plate ball removal button 341. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling lost and to prevent the player from losing interest.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 provided with the ball removing member 583 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100, the capacity of the upper plate 301 in the plate unit 300 can be increased, and the game ball can be driven. It is possible to prevent the game balls in the upper plate 301 from disappearing at an early stage or the upper plate 301 from becoming full with the game balls at an early stage by the operation. It is possible to reduce the annoyance of the player and suppress the decrease in interest, and the plate unit 300 can be miniaturized while maintaining the capacity of the upper plate 301, so that the game can be relatively played. The area 1100 can be made large (wide) to be a pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the interest of the player.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided with the ball feed member 583, the ball feed member 584 and the ball feed member 583 are separately compared with the ball feed member 583, and the ball feed member 580 is simply attached. The 584 and the ball pulling member 583 can be attached, the labor involved in assembling can be simplified, the feed unit 580 can be easily replaced, and problems occur in the ball feeding member 584 and the ball pulling member 583. Even so, the problem can be easily solved by replacing the ball feed unit 580.

Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is arranged on the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5, the upper plate ball is compared with the one in which the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side. It is not necessary to configure the transmission mechanism (upper plate ball pulling mechanism 340) for transmitting the operation of the pulling button 341 to the ball pulling member 583 of the ball feeding unit 580 so as to straddle the openable door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The configuration of the transmission mechanism can be simplified. Further, since the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the door frame 5 side, the transmission mechanism (as compared with the case where the ball feed unit 580 is provided on the main body frame 3 side) is provided every time the door frame 5 is opened. By shutting off the precision ball removing mechanism 340), it is possible to avoid the possibility that the transmission mechanism is consumed early and malfunctions or is damaged, and the reliability of the operation of the transmission mechanism, the ball feed unit 580, etc. And durability can be increased.

Further, since the upper plate ball removing button 341 is pressed downward, the game ball can be discharged from the upper plate 301 to the lower plate 302 simply by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 341 downward, or the upper plate 301. It is possible to stop the ejection of the game ball from the plate, and the player can easily operate the ball removal operation in the upper plate 301 by the upper plate ball removal button 341.

Further, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 is moved by the movement of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 that slides in the vertical direction in response to the operation of the upper plate ball removing button 341. At the same time, the partition portion 583a also moves in the vertical direction, so that the horizontal movement range of the upper plate ball removing slider 343 and the partition portion 583a can be made as small as possible, and the upper plate ball removing mechanism 340 and the ball feed The unit 580 can be miniaturized, and the pachinko machine 1 can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, the upper plate ball removing slider 343 is urged upward, and when the upper plate ball removing slider 343 is in the raised position, the partition portion 583a of the ball removing member 583 communicates the entrance 581a and the hit ball supply port 582a. Therefore, even if the game ball vigorously contacts the partition portion 583a from the upper plate 301, the impact can be mitigated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removal slider 343, and the partition portion 583a (ball removal member). The durability of 583) can be increased. Further, since the impact on the partition portion 583a can be alleviated by the urging force acting on the upper plate ball removing slider 343, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to repel even if it collides with the partition portion 583a, and the repellent of the game ball. This makes it possible to prevent the ball feed unit 580 and the like from being damaged and causing problems.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated, it is related to the movement of the partition portion 583a when the load of the game ball is applied to the partition portion 583a as compared with the case where the partition portion 583a is slid. Friction loss can be reduced, the operation of the upper plate ball removal button 341 can be lightened to improve operability, and the moving range of the partition portion 583a can be reduced in plane projection, as described above. Can produce the effects of.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated in the direction in which the entrance 581a and the ball ejection port 581b communicate with each other by its own weight, if a problem occurs in the partition portion 583a or the upper plate ball extraction mechanism 340, the partition portion 583a is rotated. Is rotated by its own weight, so that the entrance and the discharge port are communicated with each other, and the gaming medium in the storage dish is fed to the feed mechanism (loading device) side even though the discharge operation unit is not operated. Since it is discharged to the player side without being able to do so, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 has a problem, and it is interesting to move the pachinko machine 1 to the one without the problem. It can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, since the partition portion 583a is rotated via the bent rotating paddle portion 583b in the ball removing member 583, when the game ball collides with the partition portion 583a, the impact is bent and the rotating paddle portion is bent. By dispersing it by 583b or absorbing it by bending the rotating paddle portion 583b, it is possible to prevent the impact from being linearly transmitted to the rotating shaft, and the durability of the ball pulling member 583 can be improved. Can be enhanced.

Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a communicating with the upper plate 301 side, the left and right sides of the game ball in the ball feed unit 580 are discharged when the game ball in the upper plate 301 is discharged. The movement in the direction can be minimized, the passage of the game ball in the ball feed unit 580 is improved, and the game ball can be discharged satisfactorily. Further, since the ball outlet 581b is arranged directly below the entrance 581a, the ejection path of the game ball in the ball feeding unit 580 can be shortened as much as possible, and the ball feeding unit 580 can be used as an ejection mechanism. Even if the ball removing member 583 is provided, it is possible to prevent the ball feeding unit 580 from becoming unnecessarily large.

Further, the fraud prevention member 588 is mounted in the mounting recess 582b on the rear side of the rear cover 582, and the fraud prevention member 588 (cut portion 588d) is arranged at a position as close as possible to the ball launching device 650. Therefore, the wire rod Iw attached to the illegal game ball I in the fastest (momentum) state immediately after being launched by the hitting ball launching device 650 comes into contact with the cutting portion 588d, and the cutting portion 588d. By pulling the wire rod Iw quickly (strongly) with respect to the above, the wire rod Iw can be surely cut, and the momentum of the illegal game ball I is attenuated to prevent it from entering the game area 1100. This makes it possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts by the fraudulent game ball I.

Further, since the fraud prevention member 588 provided with the cutting portion 588d is mounted in the mounting recess 582b recessed from the rear surface of the rear cover 582 toward the front, in order to form the V-shaped cutting portion 588d. The upper piece 588b bent rearward can be prevented from protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the rear cover 582, and the upper piece 588b of the fraud prevention member 588 injures the operator during assembly or the like. It can be prevented from being lost.

Further, in the fraud prevention member 588 capable of cutting the wire rod Iw attached to the fraudulent game ball I, the upper upper piece portion 588b is bent rearward across the dividing wire 588a extending from the right end of the metal plate material. As a result, since the V-shaped cutting portion 588d is formed, the cutting portion 588d capable of exerting a shearing force can be easily formed (processed), and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 is increased. It can be suppressed from increasing.

[Glass Unit] Next, the glass unit 590 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 and 23. The glass unit 590 has an opening of substantially the same size as the game window 101, and is an annular and vertically long octagonal unit frame 592 molded from synthetic resin, and two pieces that close the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 592, respectively. It includes a transparent glass plate 594 (see FIG. 113). The unit frame 592 of the glass unit 590 has two stopper pieces 592a arranged in the upper parts on both the left and right sides and extending outward in a plate shape, and a plate-shaped engagement piece extending in the left-right direction along the lower end and extending downward. It is provided with a piece 592b.

The glass unit 590 locks the locking piece 592b at the lower end so as to engage with the vertically bent projecting piece 161 of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 154 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 from the rear upper side. Then, the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 592 is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base main body 110, and the stop piece 592a of the unit frame 592 is locked by the glass unit locking member 190 to lock the door frame. It is designed to be detachably attached to the base unit 100 (see FIG. 21 and the like).

[Modeling decoration in the door frame] Next, the modeling decoration in the door frame 5, that is, the shape decoration will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17, 19, 20, and 63. FIG. 63 is a cross-sectional view showing the door frame cut at substantially the center in the vertical direction. In the door frame 5 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the upper plate 301 and the lower plate 302 for storing the game balls are arranged vertically on the lower side of the vertically elongated elliptical game window 101. On the right side of the front view of the lower plate 302, the game balls stored in the upper plate 301 are driven into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 arranged behind the transparent glass unit 590 that closes the game window 101. The handle device 500 is arranged. Further, in the door frame 5, the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, and the upper decoration unit 280 are arranged so as to surround the left, right, and upper sides of the game window 101, and surround the lower side of the game window 101. The dish unit 300 is arranged so as to.

The appearances of the door frame 5 on both sides of the game window 101 are significantly different, and the right side has a rugged natural rock-like appearance due to the side lens 210 forming the outer surface of the right side decoration unit 200. On the other hand, the left side is a metallic sharp and artificial appearance due to the side lower decoration frame 242 and the side upper decoration frame 244 that can be seen from the peripheral lens portion 250a of the transparent side lens 250 of the left side decoration unit 240. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63, the door frame 5 has a different amount of protrusion forward between the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, and the right side decoration unit 200 is the left side decoration unit. It protrudes forward more than 240. Further, the front end of the right side decoration unit 200 is formed in a shape that is pointed forward, whereas the front end of the left side decoration unit 240 is formed in a gently curved flat shape.

As a result, in the door frame 5 of this example, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 look similar to each other when viewed from the right front (see FIG. 19), whereas the left front When viewed from the side, the right side decoration unit 200 looks larger than the left side decoration unit 240, and the decoration of the left side decoration unit 240 is almost invisible, which can give a different impression depending on the standing position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1. It has become like. That is, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 changes depending on the position of the player with respect to the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine 1 can be made to look like a different model of pachinko machine. Therefore, the player or the like who is selecting the pachinko machine to play. It is possible to increase the appealing power to the pachinko machine 1 and to make the pachinko machine 1 strongly attract the attention of the player.

Further, since the front appearance of the door frame 5 is asymmetrical to the left and right, for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 1 are arranged in the left-right direction in the island equipment of the game hall, the appearance of the entire island equipment feels flat and solid. The appearance (atmosphere) that gives a rhythmic impression and excites the player by alternately arranging the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 in different forms is to suppress the situation. It is possible to increase the appeal to the player and strongly attract the player's interest.

Further, the door frame 5 emits light from the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, etc. provided on the units 200, 220, 280, 300, etc., so that the game window 101 emits light. It is possible to illuminate and decorate with any luminescent color so as to surround the door. Further, among the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256 provided in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240, the LEDs 214b, 216b arranged behind the side flash lenses 204, 246. By turning on and off the, 254b, and 256, the mode of the light emitting decoration surrounding the game window 101 can be changed.

[Light-emitting decoration in the door frame] Next, the light-emitting decoration in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. FIG. 64 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs for light emitting decoration in the door frame. Further, FIG. 65 is a front view showing a system of LEDs for light emitting decoration in the door frame. In the door frame 5 of the present embodiment, the outer circumference of the game window 101 substantially corresponding to the game area 1100 of the game board 4 by the right side decoration unit 200, the left side decoration unit 240, the upper decoration unit 280, and the plate unit 300 is substantially circular. It is formed so as to surround it. Each of these units 200, 240, 280, 300 is provided with decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322 on which LEDs are mounted, and by appropriately emitting light from each LED, the game window 101 The outer circumference of the window can be decorated with light emission.

As described above, the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 of the door frame 5 are formed so as to surround most of the outer circumference excluding the lower side of the game window 101, and a plurality of circumferences of the side lenses 210 and 250. The lens portions 210a and 250a are arranged along the outer circumference of the game window 101, and the side flash lenses 204 and 246 extend along a radial axis centered on the vicinity of the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101. It is arranged between the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a adjacent to each other.

In the door frame 5 of this example, the peripheral lens portion 210a of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is formed by a plurality of substantially spindle-shaped curved surfaces, whereas the side lens 250 in the left side decoration unit 240 is formed. The peripheral lens portion 250a of the above is formed by one smooth and loosely curved surface. Further, in the door frame 5, side inner lenses 212 and 252 capable of diffusing light are arranged behind the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240. In the left side decoration unit 240, an inner decoration member 251 having a plurality of slits 251a is arranged between the peripheral lens portion 250a of the side lens 250 and the side inner lens 252.

Further, the door frame 5 has a right side upper decorative substrate 214, a right side lower decorative substrate 216, and a left side upper decorative substrate 254 behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 in the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240. , And the lower left side decorative substrate 256 is arranged, and a plurality of LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b are mounted on the front surface of each decorative substrate 214,216, 254, 256. ing.

The right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 arranged behind the side inner lenses 212 and 252 have peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a. It includes LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a arranged at corresponding positions, and LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b arranged at positions corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b (side flash lenses 204, 246). .. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a corresponding to the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a are full-color LEDs, and the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the radiation lens portions 210b, 250b have relatively high brightness. It is said to be an LED. Further, the two LEDs 214c arranged at the upper right end of the decorative substrate 214 on the right side are a green LED and a red LED.

In this example, the surfaces of the right side upper decorative substrate 214, the right side lower decorative substrate 216, the left side upper decorative substrate 254, and the left side lower decorative substrate 256 are white photoresist and white printing (for example, silk printing). ), White paint, etc. to make it white. As a result, the reflectance of the decorative substrates 214,216,254,256 can be increased, so that the light from the player side is reflected by the decorative substrates 214,216, 254, 256 when the LEDs 214a, 216a, etc. are not lit. By making the side lenses 210 and 250 dark, it is possible to prevent the side lenses 210 and 250 from becoming too dark and unsightly, and by reflecting the light from the light emitting LEDs 214a, 216a and the like toward the player side by the substrate. The lenses 210 and 250 can be brightly luminescent and decorated.

As described above, the upper decorative unit 280 of the door frame 5 connects between the ends of the right side decorative unit 200 and the left side decorative unit 240 facing the center side in the left-right direction of the door frame 5. It is formed and decorates the upper center of the game window 101. The upper decorative unit 280 has an upper center lens 284 arranged in the center in the left-right direction, an annular central ring lens portion 282b arranged on the outer periphery of the upper center lens 284, and an outer side outside the central ring lens portion 282b. It is provided with four extension frame lens portions 282c extending to. The front surface of the extension frame lens portion 282c on the lower right side of the front view is covered with the upper lower decorative cover 294.

The upper decorative unit 280 has an upper central decorative substrate 288 arranged behind the central ring lens portion 282b in the upper central lens 284 and the upper lens 282, and an upper lens 282 extending in the left-right direction from the upper central decorative substrate 288. The extension frame lens portion 282c in the above and the upper side decorative substrate 290 arranged on the rear side of the upper central decorative substrate 288 are provided. A plurality of LEDs 288a corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and a plurality of LEDs 288b corresponding to the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted on the front surface of the upper center decorative substrate 288, and the upper center lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282b are mounted. And can be individually luminescent and decorated. Further, on the upper side decorative substrate 290, a plurality of LEDs 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c are mounted on the front surface, and each extension frame lens portion 282c can be light-emitting and decorated. .. The LEDs 288a, 288b, and 290a of the upper center decorative substrate 288 and the upper side decorative substrate 290 are full-color LEDs.

Subsequently, in the dish unit 300, the outer surface is formed by a plurality of curved surfaces having a substantially spindle shape, which is continuous with the appearance of the right side decorative unit 200. In this plate unit 300, the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is arranged behind the upper plate front decorative member 316, and the upper plate front decorative member 316 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 322a mounted on the upper plate decorative substrate 322. The upper right decorative member 319 of the upper plate, which decorates the right side portion and the outer periphery of the front side of the upper plate ball removing button 341, can be light-emittingly decorated. In this example, the LED 322a of the upper plate decorative substrate 322 is a full-color LED.

Next, the operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 300 has a translucent annular dial operation unit 401 and a translucent columnar pressing operation unit arranged inside the dial operation unit 401. A dial decorative board 430 and a button decorative board 432 are respectively arranged under the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405. The dial decorative substrate 430 is provided with LEDs 430b arranged in a plurality (four in this example) in the circumferential direction so as to correspond to the dial operation unit 401. Further, the button decorative substrate 432 is provided with one LED 432d so as to correspond to the pressing operation unit 405. In this example, the LED 430b of the dial decorative substrate 430 is a high-brightness white LED, and the LED 432d of the button decorative substrate 432 is a full-color LED. Further, the surfaces (upper surface) of the dial decorative substrate 430 and the button decorative substrate 432 are also white, so that the same effects as described above can be obtained.

By the way, the door frame 5 of this example corresponds to the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 that cover the outer periphery above the lower side of the game window 101. LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a are arranged outside the first annular group 102 (within the hatch in FIGS. 64 and 65) near the game window 101 and the second annular group 103 outside the first annular group 102. It is divided into (within the range of the crosshatch in FIGS. 64 and 65), and by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, they are substantially concentric so as to surround the game window 101. It is possible to make multiple (two in this example) light emitting decorations. That is, when all the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the first annular group 102 are made to emit light, the range of the hatch near the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in an annular manner, and the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a of the second annular group 103 are emitted. When all the light is emitted, the range of the cross hatch away from the game window 101 is illuminated and decorated in a ring shape.

Further, in the door frame 5, LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b corresponding to the side flash lenses 204, 246 (radiating lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250) in the right side decoration unit 200 and the left side decoration unit 240 are provided. , The radial group 104 (in FIGS. 64 and 65) extending radially around the lower center in the left-right direction of the game window 101 (game area 1100) so as to divide the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103 in the circumferential direction. (Within the shaded area). By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b of the radial group 104, the outside of the game window 101 can be radiated and decorated, and the ring-shaped by the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to make the luminescent decoration so as to divide the luminescent decoration in the circumferential direction.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 214c of the right side upper decorative substrate 214 corresponding to the upper right corner of the side lens 210 in the right side decoration unit 200 is designated as a notification group 105, and by appropriately emitting light of the LED 214c, a game is played. It is possible to notify various information to a person or an employee of a game hall in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LEDs 288a and 288b corresponding to the upper center lens 284 and the central ring lens portion 282b in the upper decoration unit 280 that decorates the upper center of the game window 101 are the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. It is said that the upper center group 106 is used to illuminate and decorate the upper center of the lens. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 288a and 288b of the upper center group 106, the upper center of the game window 101 can be light-emitting and decorated, and the reference for the ring-shaped light emitting decoration by the first ring group 102 and the second ring group 103. It is possible to make a luminescent decoration that becomes a point. Further, the LED 290a corresponding to the extension frame lens portion 282c in the upper decoration unit 280 is an upper center side group 107 that emits light and decorates both the left and right sides of the upper center group 106. By appropriately emitting light of the LED 290a of the upper central side group 107, the boundary between the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 and the upper central group 106 can be light-emitting and decorated.

Further, in the door frame 5, the LED 322a corresponding to the upper plate front decorative member 316 and the upper plate upper right decorative member 319 of the plate unit 300 arranged under the game window 101 causes the upper plate 301 to emit light. It is said to be dish group 108. Further, in the door frame 5, the game window 10
The LEDs 430b and 432d corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the operation unit 400 arranged in the center of the lower side of the dish unit 300 as the operation group 109 for illuminating and decorating the operation unit 400. There is. By appropriately emitting light of the LEDs 430b and 432d of the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be light-emitting and decorated, and the operation timing and operation direction of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be played. It is possible to inform people.

More specifically, the light emitting decoration in the door frame 5 in the present embodiment will be described in more detail. In this example, the LEDs 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a provided in the door frame 5 will be described in more detail. 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d are further subdivided according to the control system within the groups 102, 103, 104, 106, 107, 108, 109 to which each belongs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 65, the 20 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a belonging to the first annular group 102 are 102a to 102j for each of the peripheral lens portions 210a, 250a of the side lenses 210, 250. The 26 LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, and 256a belonging to the second annular group 103 are divided into 10 systems, and each of the peripheral lens portions 210a and 250a of the side lenses 210 and 250 is divided into 10 systems of 103a to 103j. Has been done.

Further, the 20 LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b belonging to the radial group 104 are divided into eight systems of 104a to 104h for each side flash lens 204, 246 (radiant lens portions 210b, 250b of the side lenses 210, 250). ing. Further, the two LEDs 214c belonging to the notification group 105 are divided into two systems, an upper 105a and a lower 105b. Further, the eight LEDs 288a and 288b belonging to the upper central group 106 are divided into three systems of a central portion 106a, a right portion 106b, and a left portion 106c. Further, the seven LEDs 290a belonging to the upper center side group 107 are divided into two systems, a right side 107a and a left side 107b.

Further, the 11 LEDs 322a belonging to the upper plate group 108 are divided into four systems 108a to 108d in the front-rear and left-right directions. Further, the five LEDs 430b and 432d belonging to the operation group 109 are left and right 109a and front and rear 109b as a set of four LEDs 430b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 and arranged diagonally with the pressing operation unit 405 in between. The two systems, one LED 432c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405, is divided into three systems. As described above, in the door frame 5 of this example, each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 430b, 432d is divided into 42 systems. ing.

By the way, in the door frame 5, as described above, the LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, 432d are full-color LEDs, and these LEDs 214a, 216a, 254a, 256a, 288a, 288b, The 28 systems 102a to 102j, 103a to 103j, 106a to 106c, 108a to 108d, and 109c to which the 290a, 322a, and 432d belong are further provided with three independent RGB systems in order to emit light in full color. In the light emission control, it is tripled to 84 systems. Further, the LEDs 288a and 430b are high-brightness white LEDs, and the four systems 107a, 109a and 109b to which the LEDs 288a and 430b belong require a large amount of current to emit light with high brightness. Two systems are connected, and the actual light emission control is doubled to eight systems.

The LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, and 256b are white LEDs having normal brightness, and belong to eight systems 104a to 108h. Further, the LED 214c is a green LED and a red LED, and belongs to two systems 105a and 105b. Since the 10 systems 104a to 108h, 105a, 105b by these LEDs 214b, 216b, 254b, 256b, and 214c can be sufficiently controlled by each system, the same number of 10 systems is obtained even in the actual light emission control.

Therefore, the actual number of systems for light emission control in the door frame 5 is 102, and each LED 214a, 214b, 214c, 216a, 216b, 254a, 254b, 256a, 256b, 288a, 288b, 290a, 322a, For each system to which 430b and 432d belong, lighting, blinking, etc. are controlled by dynamic lighting, and gradation (color and brightness) is controlled by PWM control (pulse width modulation control). .. This makes it possible to produce an expressive light emission.

As a light emitting effect in the door frame 5, for example, by sequentially emitting light from the first annular group 102 to the second annular group 103 (sequential emission of the same color or a similar color), the light emission effect spreads outward centering on the game window 101. A light emitting effect, or conversely, a light emitting effect that converges from the outside toward the game window 101 by sequentially emitting light from the second ring group 103 to the first ring group 102 (sequentially emitting light with the same color or a similar color). Alternatively, by simultaneously emitting light from the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that causes the entire outer periphery of the game window 101 to emit light widely.

Further, by cooperating with the LED provided in the game board 4 (detailed illustration is omitted), the LED of the game board 4, the LED of the first ring group 102 close to the game window 101, and the first ring group 102 The LED of the second ring group 103 located on the outside makes it possible to produce a more expressive light emission, which can strongly attract the attention of the player and entertain the player. Can be suppressed from decreasing.

Further, in the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108, the upper part of the upper decorative unit 280 is formed along the outer periphery of the game window 101 by appropriately emitting light of each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j. It is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the light moves toward the central lens 284, or the light moves along the outer circumference of the game window 101 from the upper central lens 284. In this example, the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103 are divided (divided into 10) into 10 systems 102a to 102j and 103a to 103j in the circumferential direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is divided into about 8 systems (about 8 divisions), it is possible to satisfactorily perform a light emitting effect such that light circulates around the outer circumference of the game window 101.

Further, by emitting light only in the radial group 104, a light emitting effect is produced in which light is emitted radially around the game window 101, or the first annular group 102, the second annular group 103, and the lower group 108 are emitted at the same time as the radial group 104. By causing the game window 101 to emit light substantially uniformly, or by causing the radial group 104 to emit light (lights / blinks) during the light emission of the first annular group 102 and the second annular group 103. It is possible to create a light emitting effect that gives an accent to the light emitting decoration of. Further, by causing each system 104a to 104h of the radial group 104 to emit light individually, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect such that the side flash lenses 204 and 246 (radiating lens portions 210b and 250b) circulate.

Further, by emitting light of the upper center group 106 and the upper center side group 105, a chance has arrived for the player and a specific game state (for example, a jackpot game state, a probability change game state, a time saving game state, a probability change time reduction game state). , Etc.) can be suggested.

Further, by appropriately emitting light from each system 108a to 108d of the lower group 108, a light emitting effect for illuminating and decorating the upper plate 301 can be produced, or by emitting light in association with the operation group 109, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation can be performed. It is possible to produce a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of the unit 405. Further, by appropriately emitting light of the systems 109a and 109b corresponding to the dial operation unit 401 in the operation group 109, it is possible to promote the operation of the dial operation unit 401 and to guide the rotation operation direction of the dial operation unit 401. can do. Further, by causing the system 109c corresponding to the pressing operation unit 405 in the operation group 109 to emit light, it is possible to produce a light emitting effect that encourages the operation of the pressing operation unit 405.

Since the systems 109c of the first ring group 102, the second ring group 103, the upper center group 106, the lower group 108, and the operation group 109 are full-color LEDs, each group 102, 103, 106, 108, It is possible to perform light emission effects with different gradations such as emission color and brightness for each 109 and each system 102a-102j, 103a-103j, 106a-106c, 108a-108d, 109c, and it has a variety of expressions. It is possible to produce a rich light emission.

[Overall Configuration of Main Body Frame] Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72. FIG. 66 is a front view of the main body frame, and FIG. 67 is a rear view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 68 is a front perspective view of the main body frame, and FIG. 69 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame. Further, FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the front, FIG. 70 is a left side view of the main body frame, and FIG. 72 is a perspective view of the main body frame disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is pivotally supported on the left side of the front view with respect to the outer frame 2, and is supported in a door shape so as to open and close the front surface of the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the door frame 5. The front side can be opened and closed by the door frame 5. Further, the main body frame 3 is capable of detachably holding the game board 4 from the front side at a position corresponding to the game window 101 of the door frame 5.

The main body frame 3 of this example has a main body frame base 600 having a rectangular game board holding port 601 for forming a skeleton of the main body frame 3 and penetrating in the front-rear direction to hold the game board 4, and a main body frame base. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 for axially supporting the door frame 5 as well as being attached to the upper end and the lower end of the left end portion of the front view of the 600, respectively, and the main body frame base 600. The ball launching device 650, which is attached to the lower front surface of the game board 4 to drive the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4, and the game ball is paid out to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, which is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 attached to the front surface of the prize ball unit 700 and the main body frame base 600, the flow of the game ball from the prize ball unit 700 to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5 is blocked. It is equipped with a ball outlet opening / closing unit 790.

Further, the main body frame 3 is attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and various control boards, power supply boards 851, etc. for controlling the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the electrical parts provided in the main body frame 3 and the like. The board unit 800 that is unitized as a whole, the back cover 900 that covers the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame base 600, and the side security plate 950 that covers the left end of the main body frame base 600 in front view. A locking device 1000 attached to the right end of the main body frame base in front view to open / close the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and to open / close the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3 is mainly provided.

[Main Body Frame Base] Next, the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74. FIG. 73 is a front perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 74 is a rear perspective view of the main body frame base in the main body frame. The main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is integrally molded with synthetic resin, and the outer shape in the front view is a vertically long rectangular shape along the outer shape of the door frame 5, and is substantially in the front-rear direction. It is formed to have a constant depth D (see FIG. 70). As a result, when the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, the back cover 900, the lock device 1000, etc. are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, the main body frame base 600 is turned down. In addition, the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 is in a substantially flat state at the height of the depth D of the main body frame base 600, and the prize ball unit 700 and the like can be easily placed, and workability related to the assembly of the main body frame 3 can be easily placed. Can be improved.

As shown in the figure, the main body frame base 600 has a game board holding port capable of fitting and holding the outer periphery of the game board 4 through a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction within a range of about 3/4 of the whole from the upper part to the lower part. 601 and the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 forming the outer periphery of the front end excluding the left side of the main body frame base 600 in front view, and the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame 5 which is recessed from the front to the rear of the front end frame portion 602. The door frame projecting piece 110c projecting rearward from the lower end of the door frame, the upper bending projecting piece 167 projecting rearward of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 151 in the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5, and the open side outside projecting rearward of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 153. It includes an engaging groove 603 into which the bent projectile 163 is inserted and engaged.

Further, the main body frame base 600 extends from the lower side of the game board holding port 601 to the lower end of the main body frame base 600, and is recessed from the front end of the front end frame portion 602 to the rear side by a predetermined amount and spreads in a plate shape in the left-right direction. It includes a peripheral wall portion 605 that protrudes rearward inside the front end frame portion 602 and forms an inner peripheral wall of the game board holding port 601. The peripheral wall portion 605 connects the free ends of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602 (upper and lower left end portions when viewed from the front), and the outer shape of the main body frame base 600 becomes a frame shape. It has become like.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed by forming the lower side of the game board holding port 601 at the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604 and mounting the game board 4 on the game board mounting portion 606 and the game board mounting portion 606. A positioning protrusion 607 that projects upward from approximately the center in the left-right direction and engages with the out-ball discharge groove 1156 of the game panel 1200 on the game board 4, and a game board of the game board 4 that is formed at a predetermined position on the inner wall on the right side of the front view of the peripheral wall portion 605. The game board locking portion 608 (see FIG. 66) to which the stopper 1120 is fastened, and the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 605 that hangs downward from the upper inner wall and has a plate shape that can contact the upper end of the game board 4 in the left-right direction. It is provided with a plurality of arranged upper end regulation ribs 609. By fitting the positioning protrusion 607 of the main body frame base 600 with the out ball discharge groove 1156 of the game board 4, it is possible to regulate the lower end of the game board 4 from moving in the left-right direction and the rear direction. ing. Further, the game board locking portion 608 can regulate the movement of the right side of the game board 4 in the front-rear direction by locking the game board stopper 1120 of the game board 4. There is. Although the details of the left side of the game board 4 in the front view will be described later, the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the positioning member 956 of the side security plate 950.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is attached with metal fittings for attaching the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 to the rear surface of the free end portion (upper and lower left end portions) of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It includes a section 610 (see FIG. 74). As shown in FIG. 73 and the like, the metal fitting mounting portion 610 is reinforced by a plurality of ribs whose front side extends vertically and horizontally, and the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are mounted with sufficient strength. Can be done. Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed with a substantially circular cylinder lock through hole 611 penetrating in the front-rear direction in the upper right end of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view and a door frame 5 formed in the lower left of the front view of the cylinder lock through hole 611. A U-shaped fitting groove 612 that fits with a positioning protrusion 110d projecting rearward from the door frame base main body 110 and a launch solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 formed in the lower left of the fitting groove 612 in the front view are accommodated. It is provided with a solenoid accommodating recess 613.

As described above, the main body frame base 600 of this example is formed at a position where the lower rear wall portion 604 is recessed one step rearward from the front surface of the front end frame portion 602, and is formed on the right side of the lower rear wall portion 604 when viewed from the front. The ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface so that the launching solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 is housed in the solenoid accommodating recess 613. When the ball launching device 650 is attached to the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 103, the ball launching device 650 is on the left side in the front view from the upper end of the launch rail 660, in the left direction and A foul space 626 that extends downward is formed. In this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e in the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the foul space 626 is lowered. The game ball is received by the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 and discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is formed in a plurality of openings 614 that penetrate in a rectangular shape in the front-rear direction to the left side of the left-right center of the lower rear wall portion 604 in the front view, and on the upper side of the opening 614 and on the left and right sides in the front view. It is provided with a through hole 615 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The opening 614 of the main body frame base 600 is closed by the relay terminal plate cover 692 (see FIG. 71 and the like) from the front side, and the lower rear wall portion 604 is passed through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692. The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 mounted on the rear surface face the front side. Further, the plurality of through holes 615 are for transmitting the sound from the speaker box 820 of the substrate unit 800 to the front side of the main body frame base 600. The through holes 615 arranged on both the left and right sides of the opening 614 are ventilation type holes having an opposition wall on the front side.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is a fixture support portion that rotatably supports the game board fixture 690 for detachably fixing the game board 4 on the upper side of the opening 614 near the upper end of the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604. 616 and a stopper 617 that projects forward from the lower right of the front view of the fixture support portion 616 and regulates the rotation position of the game board fixture 690.

Here, as shown in FIG. 66 and the like, the game board fixture 690 includes a fixing piece 690a and a fixing piece 690a that spread in a fan shape around an axis supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600. It is provided with an operation piece 690b that extends outward from one end side in the circumferential direction (the side that becomes the rear end when rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view). The game board fixture 690 is pivotally supported by the fixture support portion 616 of the main body frame base 600, and then the operation piece 690b is operated to rotate the game board fixture 690 in the clockwise direction in front view. The fixed piece 690a protrudes upward from the game board mounting portion 606 and is inserted into the fixed recess 1121 of the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 606. Can be prevented from moving forward. Further, in the game board fixture 690, the operation piece 690b comes into contact with the stopper 617, and by contacting the stopper 617, the rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front is restricted. It has become.

Further, the main body frame base 600 is provided with a door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 on the lower front surface of the cylinder lock through hole 611, with respect to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened (opened), the pressure is released so that the opening of the door frame 5 can be detected. Further, in the main body frame base 600, a main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 is attached to the rear surface below the position where the door frame opening switch 618 is attached ( (See FIG. 74), when the main body frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the pressing is released so that the opening of the main body frame 3 can be detected.

Further, the main body frame base 600 has three vertically elongated penetrations in the front-rear direction inside (shaft support side) of the engagement groove 603 on the right side (open side) side in the front view of the U-shaped front end frame portion 602. It is provided with a door hook hole 620 and two lock locking holes 621 that penetrate in the front-rear direction and are arranged in the left-right direction under the door hook hole 620 at the lower end. These three door hook holes 620 are formed in the vicinity of both upper and lower ends in the vertical direction and substantially in the center in the vertical direction, respectively. Locking protrusions 1004 provided on both upper and lower ends of the locking device 1000 are engaged and locked in the upper and central door hook holes 620 and the lock locking hole 621, and the front end frame portion 602 The lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600 along the outer wall of the peripheral wall portion 605 on the rear side of the right side of the front view. When the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame base 600, the three door frame hook portions 1041 of the lock device 1000 project forward from the three door hook holes 620 and the cylinder lock of the lock device 1000. The 1010 is in a state of protruding forward from the cylinder lock through hole 611 (see FIG. 68).

Further, the main body frame base 600 gently and diagonally descends from the upper right end toward the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604, and then the lower rear wall portion 604 at the substantially center in the left-right direction. The main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 is provided so that the game ball can be rolled by hanging from the middle of the vertical direction to a slightly upward position. The rear side of the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 is closed by the board unit base 810 in the board unit 800, and although details will be described later, a game ball that has rolled the ball pulling passage 741d in the prize ball device 740. Is supposed to roll.

Further, a plurality of main body frame bases 600 are arranged at the rear end of the left side of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and the shaft support pins 906 of the back cover 900 are rotatably supported by the back cover shaft support portion 623. A mounting portion 624 for mounting the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 on the front surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 and diagonally upper left in the front view of the opening 614, and a locking device 1000 on the right side (open side) side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 in the front view. It is provided with a lock mounting portion 625 for mounting and fixing.

Although detailed description will be omitted, in addition to the above, mounting bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting the ball launching device 650, the prize ball unit 700, the board unit 800, etc. are appropriately positioned on the main body frame base 600. Is formed in.

[Upper Shaft Support Bracket and Lower Shaft Support Bracket] Next, the upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. The upper shaft support bracket 630 and the lower shaft support bracket 640 in the main body frame 3 are attached to the metal fitting mounting portions 610 on the upper and lower rear surfaces of the left end of the main body frame base 600 by using predetermined screws, respectively, to the main body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2.

First, the upper shaft support bracket 630 has a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that is attached to the upper bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and a plate-shaped mounting portion 631 that extends forward from the upper end of the mounting portion 631. The front extension portion 632, the shaft support pin 633 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the front extension portion 632, and the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 arranged on the left side of the front view of the shaft support pin 633. The door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. 68, etc.) through which the door frame is inserted and the door frame shaft support hole 634 (see FIG. It includes a stopper 635 (see FIGS. 70 and 114) that regulates the ends. The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 is integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate with a mounting portion 631, a forward extending portion 632, and a stopper 635.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support bracket 640 is arranged below the door frame shaft support bracket 642 for pivotally supporting the door frame 5 and the door frame shaft support bracket 642, and supports the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2. It is provided with a main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 for the purpose. The door frame shaft support bracket 642 in the lower shaft support bracket 640 is attached to the lower bracket mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 and has a plate-shaped mounting portion 642a that extends in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the mounting portion 642a from the lower end to the front. A plate-shaped front extension portion 642b that extends, a door frame shaft support hole 634 that penetrates vertically near the front end of the front extension portion 642b and into which the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted, and a front extension portion. It is provided with a stopper 642d which is erected upward from the left end portion of the front view of the 642b and regulates the rotating end of the door frame 5 toward the open side. The door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 is integrally formed by bending and molding a single metal plate with a mounting portion 642a, a front extending portion 642b, and a stopper 642d.

Further, the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is attached to the metal fitting mounting portion 610 on the lower side of the main body frame base 600 and extends in the vertical and horizontal directions from the plate-shaped mounting portion 644a and the lower end of the mounting portion 644a. It is provided with a front extending portion 644b extending forward and a main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction near the front end of the front extending portion 644b. The main body frame shaft support bracket 644 also has a mounting portion 644a and a front extending portion 644b integrally formed by bending a single metal plate.

In the lower shaft support bracket 640 of this example, the mounting portion 642a of the door frame shaft support bracket 642 and the mounting portion 644a of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are overlapped (contacted) in the front-rear direction, and the door frame is in contact with each other. The front extension portion 642b of the shaft support bracket 642 and the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 are attached to the lower metal fitting mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 in a state of being separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. It has become like.

The upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the main body frame shaft support hole (not shown) of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. Is positioned coaxially, and the main body frame shaft support hole of the main body frame shaft support metal fitting 644 in the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 is fitted and inserted into the support protrusion 21d of the lower support metal fitting 21 in the outer frame 2. As described above, the front extension portion 644b of the main body frame shaft support bracket 644 is placed on the support protrusion 21c of the lower support bracket 21, and then the shaft support pin 633 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 is attached to the outer frame 2. By inserting the upper support metal fitting 20 into the support hook hole 20c, the main body frame 3 can be pivotally supported with respect to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached to the main body frame base 600, and the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 630 and the door frame shaft support of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640 are attached. The metal fitting 642c is positioned coaxially with the door frame so that the shaft pin 157 of the door frame 5 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the door frame shaft support metal fitting 642 of the lower shaft support metal fitting 640. After placing the lower shaft support 158 of the frame 5 on the front extension portion 642b of the door frame shaft support bracket 642, the shaft pin 155 of the door frame 5 is placed in the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630. By inserting the door frame 5, the door frame 5 can be pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. In this example, the shaft pin 155 on the upper side of the door frame 5 is slidable in the vertical direction, and when the shaft pin 155 is inserted into the door frame shaft support hole 634 of the upper shaft support bracket 630, the shaft pin 155 is inserted. Slide the door frame downward once so that the upper shaft support portion 156 of the door frame 5 and the front extension portion 632 of the upper shaft support bracket 630 overlap vertically, and then slide the shaft pin 155 upward to open the door. It can be inserted into the frame shaft support hole 634.

[Striking Ball Launching Device] Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. FIG. 75 is a front perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 76 is a rear perspective view of the hitting ball launching device in the main body frame. The hitting ball launching device 650 can hit the game ball supplied from the ball feeding unit 580 of the door frame 5 into the game area 1100 of the game board 4 with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500. is there.

In the ball launching device 650 of the present embodiment, the launch base 652 of a metal plate attached to the front predetermined position of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and the rotation drive shaft 654a projecting forward on the lower rear surface of the launch base 652. The launching solenoid 654 attached so as to be mounted, the hammer 656 fixed integrally to the drive shaft 654a of the launching solenoid 654, the mallet 658 fixed to the tip of the hammer 656, and the movement trajectory of the mallet 658. Hammer tip of ball hammer 656 between the launch rail 660 attached to the front of the launch base 652 and the launch rail 660 above the base end of the launch rail 660, extending diagonally to the upper left of the front view with the predetermined position above as the base end. At the same time that 658 is made passable, a ball stop piece 662 that forms a gap through which the game ball cannot pass and holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660, and a ball stop piece 662 holds the game ball at the base end of the launch rail 660. It is provided with a stopper 664 that restricts the hammer 656 (hammer tip 658) from rotating toward the launch rail 660 side from the hitting position where the game ball can be hit.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the firing solenoid 654 in the hitting ball launching device 650 is configured such that the drive shaft 654a reciprocates with a strength (speed) corresponding to the rotation operation angle of the handle device 500. Further, the ball striking mallet 656 of the ball striking device 650 has a fixed portion 656a fixed to the drive shaft 654a of the launch solenoid 654 and a tip extending from the fixed portion 656a in a gentle arc shape with respect to the axis of the drive shaft 654a. It is provided with a paddle portion 656b in which the mallet tip 658 is fixed to the tip facing the normal direction, and a stopper portion 656c that can come into contact with the stopper 664 extending to the opposite side with the fixing portion 656a sandwiched between the paddle portion 656b. ing. When the stopper portion 656c of the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact with the stopper 664, the mallet tip 658 at the tip rotates toward the launch rail 660 from the hitting position (rotating end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). It is becoming regulated.

Further, the launch rail 660 of the ball striking device 650 has a loose arc shape with a lower portion recessed substantially along the lower end extension line of the outer rail 1111 of the game board 4 (see FIG. 103), and in the front-rear direction. On the other hand, the center has a V-shaped depression, and the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 656 can be smoothly guided to the game board 4 side along the launch rail 660. The launch rail 660 is formed by bending a metal plate.

Further, the hitting ball launching device 650 has a stopper cover 666 covering the front surface of the stopper 664 that can regulate the rotation end of the hitting mallet 656 toward the hitting position side, and rotation at a position away from the hitting position of the hitting mallet 656. It is provided with a stopper 668 that regulates an end (a rotating end in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front). In the hitting ball launching device 650 of this example, the surfaces of the stoppers 664 and 668 are covered with rubber, so that the impact when the hitting mallet 656 comes into contact can be absorbed and the generation of noise due to the contact is suppressed. You can do it.

As shown in FIGS. 68 and 103, when the ball launching device 650 of this example is attached to the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, the upper end of the launch rail 660 is substantially in the center in the left-right direction and is lower. It is located below the upper end of the rear wall portion 604, that is, below the game board mounting portion 606 (lower side of the game board holding port 601), and is outside the game board 4 held by the game board holding port 601. A foul space 626 that extends downward with a predetermined width in the left-right direction is formed with the lower end of the rail 1111. Then, the hit ball launching device 650 of this example launches the game ball so as to jump over the foul space 626 on the left side of the launch rail 660, thereby driving the game ball into the game area 1100 of the game board 4. Can be done. As described above, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 is located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and the game area 1100 The game ball, which has become a foul ball without being driven in, falls in the foul space 626, is received at the foul ball entrance 542e, and is discharged to the lower plate 302.

Further, in the ball launching device 650, the launching solenoid 654 is driven by the launching control unit 4120 with a driving strength corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle device 500, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 of the ball feeding unit 580. It is designed to be driven in synchronization with the drive of. Specifically, in the ball feeding unit 580 that supplies the game ball to the hitting ball launching device 650, when the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven (ON), the ball feeding member 584 receives the game ball, and the ball feeding solenoid 585 is driven from that state. When the ball feed member 584 is released (OFF), the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball feed launcher 650 side, so that the launch solenoid 654 is driven substantially at the same time as the ball feed solenoid 585 of the ball feed unit 580. By turning (ON), the game ball can be smoothly supplied from the ball feed unit 580 to the rear end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball can be reliably launched by the rotation of the ball hammer 656. ing.

[Prize Ball Unit] Next, the prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 77 to 84. FIG. 77 is a front perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 78 is a rear perspective view of the prize ball unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank and the tank rail unit in the prize ball unit from the rear. FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball device in the prize ball unit as viewed after being disassembled. FIG. 83 is a rear view showing the relationship between the payout passage, the payout motor, and the payout rotating body in the prize ball device. Further, FIG. 84 is a cross-sectional view showing a rolling passage of a ball in the prize ball unit.

The prize ball unit 700 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment stores the game balls supplied from the island equipment side to the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and then gives a predetermined payout instruction. This is to be paid out to the upper plate 301 of the pachinko machine 1 based on the above. The prize ball unit 700 is a prize ball base 710 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600 and a prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the rear surface of the prize ball base 710 to receive and store game balls supplied from the island equipment side. The tank rail unit 730, which is arranged under the prize ball tank 720 and stores the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720, is aligned and sent to the downstream side, and the game balls arranged by the tank rail unit 730 are paid out. The prize ball device 740 to be paid out based on the instruction and the game ball paid out by the prize ball device 740 can be guided to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit, and the upper plate 301 is paid out when the game ball is full. It mainly includes a full tank branch unit 770 that can branch and guide the game ball to the lower plate 302 side.

Further, the prize ball unit 700 includes a prize ball passage lid 780 that closes the rear opening of the prize ball passage 715 formed in the prize ball base 710, and an earth fitting for grounding the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. The 782, an external terminal plate 784 attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base 710, and an external terminal plate cover 786 that covers the rear side of the external terminal plate 784 are provided. The prize ball passage lid 780 in the prize ball unit 700 is for fastening and fixing the back cover engaging groove 780a for fixing the back cover 900 to the rear surface and the back cover 900 on the left side of the back cover engaging groove 780a when viewed from the rear. The back cover fastening hole 780b is formed (see FIGS. 78 and 80, etc.).

In this prize ball unit 700, the prize ball base 710 is formed in an inverted L shape along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail unit 730 are formed on the upper side. In addition to being arranged, a vertically long prize ball device 740 is arranged on the left side, and a full tank branch unit 770 is arranged below the prize ball device 740. Further, an external terminal plate 784 and an external terminal plate cover 786 are arranged directly above the prize ball device 740 and above the tank rail unit 730 so as to be adjacent to the prize ball tank 720.

Next, as shown in the figure, the prize ball base 710 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view so as to substantially correspond to the left side of the game board holding port 601 in front view with the upper side of the main body frame base 600. It is integrally molded with a transparent synthetic resin. The prize ball base 710 is arranged so that the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward along the outer outer circumference of the inverted L shape and the peripheral wall portion 710a extend inward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 710a with a predetermined width and substantially on the same plane. It is provided with a rear wall portion 710b. In this example, as shown in FIG. 80, the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a is formed so as to extend rearward from a position one step lower than the upper end of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball base 710 has a rear wall portion 710b located at a position deeper than the front end, and when attached to the main body frame base 600, a space capable of accommodating the game board 4 can be formed. ing.

Further, the prize ball base 710 is arranged next to the tank mounting portion 711 for mounting the prize ball tank 720 on the upper side of the peripheral wall portion 710a and the tank mounting portion 711 (on the right side when viewed from the rear), and the external terminal plate 784 and the external terminal plate. An external terminal plate mounting portion 712 for mounting the cover 786, a plurality of mounting locking portions 713 for mounting the tank rail unit 730 on the rear side of the lower end of the upper side of the rear wall portion 710b, and the rear side of the vertical side of the rear wall portion 710b. The prize ball device mounting portion 714 for mounting the prize ball device 740, the prize ball passage 715 that guides the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 adjacent to the prize ball device mounting portion 714, and the rear wall. A mounting locking portion 716 for mounting the full tank branch unit 770 is provided at the lower end of the portion 710b.

Further, the prize ball base 710 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the position of the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the rear wall portion 710b, and has a relief hole 717 for allowing the payout motor 744 and the like protruding forward from the prize ball device 740 to escape, and the back. It is provided with a back cover engaging groove 718 for fixing the cover 900. Further, although detailed description is omitted on the prize ball base 710, mounting holes, mounting bosses, etc. for mounting the prize ball tank 720, the prize ball device 740, etc., or mounting on the main body frame base 600 are appropriately positioned. Is formed in.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 81, the prize ball tank 720 in the prize ball unit 700 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper portion, and a bottom wall portion having a horizontally long substantially rectangular shape in a plan view. 721, the outer peripheral wall portion 722 rising upward from the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 721, and only the right rear portion (rear portion on the open side) protruding rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 in a plan view, and the outer peripheral wall portion. A plate-shaped discharge port 723 formed by a portion of the 722 that protrudes rearward from the bottom wall portion 721 at the rear right side and opens downward from the left side (shaft support side) of the discharge port 723 in a plan view to the left end of the prize ball tank 720. 724 of the eaves extending to, a rod-shaped shaft 725 extending rearward from the lower left end of the eaves 724 in a plan view, and a prize ball formed near the base end of the shaft 725 and at both ends of the front side of the outer peripheral wall portion 722. A mounting portion 726 for mounting the tank 720 to the prize ball tank mounting portion 711 on the prize ball base 710 is provided.

In the prize ball tank 720, the outer circumference of the bottom wall portion 721 is surrounded by the outer peripheral wall portion 722, and a predetermined amount of game balls can be stored on the bottom wall portion 721. Further, the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 is lowered toward the discharge port 723, so that the game ball on the bottom wall portion 721 rolls toward the discharge port 723. It has become.

Further, the prize ball tank 720 includes two ball leveling members 727 that are rotatably supported by the shaft portion 725. As shown in the figure, the ball leveling member 727 has one end side pivotally supported by the shaft portion 725 and holds a weight inside, and the other end side hangs down due to its own weight. .. The ball leveling member 727 hangs down in the tank rail unit 730, which will be described later, and can smooth and align the game balls that roll in the tank rail unit 730. Further, the eaves 724 of the prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to cover substantially the upper half of the tank rail unit 730, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls from overflowing from the inside of the tank rail unit 730 and the tank. It is possible to prevent dust and the like from entering the rail unit 730.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 721 of the prize ball tank 720 is inclined so that the left side (the side far from the discharge port 723) becomes lower toward the right side in a plan view. The right side (the side closer to the discharge port 723) in a plan view is formed so as to be inclined toward the rear discharge port 723. As a result, the flow of the game ball can be smoothed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the prize ball tank 720, and from the discharge port 723 to the tank rail unit 730 side. The game ball can be discharged smoothly.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81, the tank rail unit 730 of the prize ball unit 700 includes a tank rail 731 that is arranged below the prize ball tank 720 and extends long in the left-right direction. The tank rail 731 has a gutter shape with an open upper part and a predetermined depth, and has a width (depth) that allows the game balls to be arranged in two rows in the front-rear direction, and has a left end (shaft support side) end when viewed from the front. The bottom is tilted so that The tank rail 731 includes a discharge port 731a (see FIG. 84) that opens downward to the left end (shaft support side) end, a partition wall 731b extending upward from the bottom at substantially the center in the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the front end. A plurality of locking projecting pieces 731c (see FIG. 79), which project downward and are locked from above to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, are provided.

The end of the tank rail 731 on the right side (open side) of the front view is located directly below the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720, and the game ball discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 is placed. After receiving it, it can be rolled to the left and delivered from the discharge port 731a to the prize ball device 740 side. Further, by locking the locking projection piece 731c of the tank rail 731 to the mounting locking portion 713 of the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, that is, the tank rail unit 730 can be mounted on the prize ball base 710. ing.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 is continuous with the alignment gear 732 rotatably supported on the upper portion of the discharge port 731a of the tank rail 731, the gear cover 733 covering the upper portion of the alignment gear 732, and the right end of the gear cover 733 in the front view. A ball holding plate 734 that closes the upper part of the tank rail 731, and a ball stop piece that can advance and retreat into the tank rail 731 and can stop the game ball in the tank rail 731 from rolling toward the discharge port 731a. It includes a 735 and a ground plate 736 that is arranged in the tank rail 731 and is in contact with the game ball in the tank rail 731. As shown in the figure, two alignment gears 732 are provided side by side in the front-rear direction so as to correspond to two flow paths of the game balls partitioned in two rows by the partition wall 731b of the tank rail 731. Further, the ball holding plate 734 includes a mounting portion 734a to which the ball stop piece 735 is mounted on the upper portion, and two slits 734b that penetrate in the vertical direction and allow the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 to be inserted.

In the tank rail unit 730, two ball leveling members 727 pivotally supported by the prize ball tank 720 are inserted from above on the upstream side (open side) of the ball holding plate 734. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 723 of the prize ball tank 720 into the tank rail 731 by the ball leveling member 727 can be smoothed in one step and arranged in two rows along the partition wall 731b. You can do it. Further, the ball holding plate 734 is for forcibly making the game ball which was not made one step by the ball leveling member 727 into one step, and the gap with the bottom of the tank rail 731 becomes narrower toward the discharge port 731a side. It is attached to the tank rail 731 as described above.

As shown in the figure, the alignment gear 732 of the tank rail unit 730 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery thereof, and is pivotally supported so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 732 is deviated by half a pitch. As a result, when the upper part of the game ball flowing down the tank rail 731 flows down to the discharge port 723 on the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 732, the game balls arranged in two rows are alternately awarded one by one. It is designed to be sent to the device 740.

The bottom of the tank rail 731 is formed with fine grooves that penetrate vertically so that foreign matter such as dust that rolls together with the game ball in the tank rail 731 falls downward from the fine grooves. It has become. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the ground plate 736 arranged on the inner wall of the tank rail 731 is grounded to the outside via the grounding connector of the power supply board 851 via the grounding metal fitting 782. By contacting the game ball with the ground plate 736 in the tank rail 731, the charged static electricity can be removed.

Further, the tank rail unit 730 rotates the ball stop piece 735 rotatably attached to the mounting portion 734a of the ball holding plate 734, and passes the projecting piece 735a of the ball stop piece 735 through the slit 734b into the tank rail 731. By inserting it into, the projecting piece 735a can close the two rows of flow paths in the tank rail 731, and the game ball can be stopped from being supplied to the prize ball device 740 side. There is.

Further, in the tank rail unit 730, the tank rail 731 is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the state of the game ball or the like in the tank rail 731 can be visually recognized from the outside.

Subsequently, the prize ball device 740 in the prize ball unit 700 discharges and supplies the game balls discharged and supplied from the discharge port 731a of the tank rail unit 730 to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 based on a predetermined payout instruction. It is a thing. As shown in FIGS. 82 to 84, the prize ball device 740 includes a unit base 741 extending in the vertical direction attached to the prize ball device mounting portion 714 of the prize ball base 710. As shown in the figure, the unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 is a supply passage that opens at the upper end and extends slightly wider than the outer shape of the game ball to a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction. The 741a, the distribution space 741b having a space of a predetermined size communicating with the lower end of the supply passage 741a, and the lower end of the rear view left side (open side) of the distribution space 741b are connected to each other and bent in an abbreviated shape for rear view. It is provided with a prize ball passage 741c that opens on the left side surface, and a ball removal passage 741d that communicates with the lower end of the distribution space 741b on the right side (shaft support side) of the rear view and extends downward to open at the lower end. The supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d of the unit base 741 are formed in a state of being open to the rear.

The prize ball device 740 of this example has a back cover 742 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741 and has a shorter vertical length than the unit base 741, and a plate-shaped motor support that is arranged under the back cover 742. The plate 743, the payout motor 744 arranged on the front side of the motor support plate 743 and fixed to the unit base 741 so that the rotary shaft 744a protrudes rearward from the motor support plate 743, and the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 are integrated. The first gear 745, which is rotatably fixed and arranged behind the motor support plate 743, meshes with the second gear 746, which meshes with the first gear 745 and is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, and meshes with the second gear 746. The third gear 747 that is pivotally supported by the unit base 741, the payout rotating body 748 that rotates integrally with the third gear 747 and is arranged in the distribution space 741b of the unit base 741, and the payout rotating body 748 are the third gears. It is provided with a rotation detection board 749 which is fixed to the opposite side of the 747 so as to be integrally rotatable and has a plurality of detection slits 749a (three in this example) at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a ball-out switch 750 attached to the unit base 741 to detect the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a, and a game ball attached to the unit base 741 and rolling in the prize ball passage 741c. A counting sensor 751 for measuring the number, a rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748, and a rotation angle sensor 752 are held and attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742. The sensor board 753, the payout motor 744, the ball break switch 750, the counting sensor 751, and the prize ball relay board 754 attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742 by relaying the connection between the rotation angle sensor 752 and the payout control board 4110. It has.

Further, the prize ball device 740 includes a board cover 755 that covers the prize ball relay board 754 from the rear side and is attached to the rear surface of the back cover 742, and the first gear 745, the second gear 746, and the third gear 747 (rotation detection board 747). ), And the gear cover 756 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 741 with the back cover 742 sandwiching the sensor board 753 from the rear side, and the supply passage capable of contacting the game ball rolling in the supply passage 741a of the unit base 741. The payout motor 744 is fixed to the unit base 741 by sandwiching the ground fitting 757 and the motor support plate 743, and the screw 758 for connecting the payout motor 744 to the ground and the back cover 742 are detachably supported on the unit base 741. It is provided with a detachable button 759.

In the prize ball device 740 of this example, the back cover 742 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 741, so that the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, and the ball removal passage 741d are opened rear ends. Is to be closed. Further, the unit base 741 has a shape in which the position below the upper end in the supply passage 741a once bulges rearward, so that the momentum of the game ball discharged and dropped from the tank rail unit 730 can be relaxed. You can do it. Further, the unit base 741 is partially notched on one side surface (left side when viewed from the rear) below the rearwardly bulging position in the supply passage 741a, and is outside the notched position of the supply passage 741a. A switch mounting portion 741e for mounting the ball breaking switch 750, a sensor mounting portion 741f for mounting the counting sensor 751 in the middle of the prize ball passage 741c, and a penetrating portion in the front-rear direction below the prize ball passage 741c. It is provided with a motor insertion hole 741 g, which is formed and can insert the payout motor 744.

By attaching the ball-cutting switch 750 to the switch mounting portion 741e of the unit base 741, the working piece of the ball-cutting switch 750 forms a part of the side wall of the supply passage 741a, and exists in the supply passage 741a. When the operating piece is pressed by the game ball, the ball-out switch 750 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball in the supply passage 741a. In the state where the game ball in the supply passage 741a is not detected by the ball out switch 750 (the ball out state), the payout motor 744 is prevented from rotating, and the player or the hall indicates that the ball is out. It is designed to be notified to the side.

Further, the unit base 741 is provided between the bearing portion 741h for axially supporting the second gear 746 and the third gear 747 (delivery rotating body 748), the switch mounting portion 741e in the supply passage 741a, and the distribution space 741b. A ground fitting mounting portion 741i for mounting the supply passage ground fitting 757 and a button support hole 741j arranged on the upper part of the unit base 741 for supporting the attachment / detachment button 759 for attaching / detaching the back cover 742. I have. In this unit base 741, by attaching the supply passage ground fitting 757 to the ground fitting mounting portion 741i, the rear surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 can come into contact with the game ball in the supply passage 741a. The front surface of the supply passage ground fitting 757 is in contact with the lower end rear surface of the U-shaped ground fitting 782, and the static electricity of the game ball rolling in the supply passage 741a is removed via the supply passage ground fitting 757. You can do it.

The back cover 742 of the prize ball device 740 has a vertically long plate shape as a whole and a shape in which the upper end bulges rearward. At the upper part of the back cover 742, there is a button insertion hole 742a through which the attachment / detachment button 759 is inserted, a relay board mounting portion 742b for mounting the prize ball relay board 754 and the board cover 755 on the substantially central rear surface in the vertical direction, and a relay board mounting. It is provided with a sensor board mounting portion 742c arranged below the portion 742b for mounting the sensor board 753, and a through hole 742d through which the payout rotating body 748 can pass. The relay board mounting portion 742b of the back cover 742 is formed so as to be located behind the ground fitting mounting portion 741i of the unit base 741.

Further, the motor support plate 743 of the prize ball device 740 is an aluminum plate in this example, and is in contact with the metal motor housing of the payout motor 744 to generate heat generated by the payout motor 744. It is possible to easily dissipate heat.

Further, as shown in FIG. 83, the payout rotating body 748 of the prize ball device 740 is provided with three recesses 748a having a size capable of accommodating one game ball at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. By rotating the 748, the game balls supplied from the supply passage 741a are housed in the recess 748a one by one, and can be discharged to the prize ball passage 741c or the ball removal passage 741d side. Further, the three detection slits 749a of the rotation detection board 749 that rotates integrally with the payout rotating body 748 are formed at positions corresponding to the recesses 748a of the payout rotating body 748, respectively, and the detection slits 749a are formed by the rotation angle sensor 752. By detecting, the rotation position of the payout rotating body 748 can be detected.

The prize ball device 740 of this example is a payout motor when a payout command from the main control board 4100, a lending command from the CR unit 6, or the like is input to the payout control board 4110, or the ball removal switch 860b is operated. The 744 rotates so that a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out to the player side (upper plate 301) or discharged to the game hall side (rear side of the pachinko machine 1). When the rotary shaft 744a of the payout motor 744 is rotationally driven, the first gear 745 fixed to the rotary shaft 744a is rotated, and at the same time, the second gear 746 that meshes with the first gear 745 is rotated, and further, the second gear 746 is rotated. The third gear 747 that meshes with the gear 747 rotates. A payout rotating body 748 is fixed to the third gear 747 on the front side, and a rotation detection board 794 is fixed to the rear side so as to be integrally rotatable. Together with the third gear 747, the payout rotating body 748 and the rotation detection board 747 are fixed. It is designed to rotate.

In this prize ball device 740, as shown in FIG. 83, the payout rotating body 748 is rotatably supported in the substantially center of the distribution space 741b. Then, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the direction counterclockwise when viewed from the rear by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side, and the payout rotation The game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side by the rotation of the body 748 are counted one by one by the counting sensor 751 and then delivered to the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. On the other hand, when the payout rotating body 748 is rotated in the rearward viewing clockwise direction by the payout motor 744, the game ball in the supply passage 741a is paid out to the ball ejection passage 741d side, and the payout rotating body 748 The game balls discharged to the ball pulling passage 741d side are the ball pulling passage 778 of the full tank branch unit 770 described later, the main frame base ball pulling passage 622 of the main body frame base 600, and the board unit 800 from the lower end of the ball pulling passage 741d. The pachinko machine 1 can be discharged to the rear side and the outside through the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 and the discharge passage 842 of the power supply board box holder 840.

The unit base 741 in the prize ball device 740 of this example is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when assembled on the main body frame 3, the prize is awarded from the front side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710. The inside of the supply passage 741a, the distribution space 741b, the prize ball passage 741c, the ball removal passage 741d, etc. of the ball device 740 can be visually recognized, and defects such as ball clogging can be easily found. ..

Next, the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 79, 80, and 84. The full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 is attached to the lower end of the prize ball base 710, and guides the game ball paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 to the plate unit 300. When the game balls are full in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, the game balls can be distributed so as to be paid out to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

The full tank branch unit 770 is fixed to the lower end back surface of the prize ball base 710 at the upper part of the rear end and the locking portion 770a which is locked to the mounting locking part 716 of the prize ball base 710 at the substantially central upper part in the front-rear direction. It is provided with a fixing portion 770b. The full tank branch unit 770 is in a state of being suspended from the mounting locking portion 716 by locking the locking portion 770a to the mounting locking portion 716 of the prize ball base 710 from the rear side, and the prize ball base. By fixing the fixing portion 770b to the 710 with a predetermined screw, the full tank branch unit 770 can be attached and fixed to the lower end of the prize ball base 710.

Further, as shown in the figure, the full tank branch unit 770 is formed in a box shape so that the whole becomes lower from the rear end to the front end, and opens upward at substantially the center in the left-right direction at the upper part of the rear end. The prize ball receiving port 771 that receives the game ball that has flowed down the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710, and the branch space 772 that is arranged under the prize ball receiving port 771 and spreads in the left-right direction (see FIG. 84). And the normal passage 773 (see FIG. 84) that guides the game ball from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 to the front side, and the game ball that has rolled the normal passage 773 is released forward and at the front end. A normal ball outlet 774 opened at the right end of the front view, and a full tank passage 775 (FIG. 84) that guides the game ball from a position far to the right of the rear view from directly below the prize ball receiving port 771 in the branch space 772 toward the front side. (See), and a full-tank ball outlet 776 that discharges the game ball that has rolled in the full-tank passage 775 forward and opens to the left side of the front view of the normal ball outlet 774.

Further, the full tank branch unit 770 has a ball ejection port 777 that opens upward to the left end of the front view of the upper part of the rear end and receives a game ball that has flowed down the ball ejection passage 741d of the prize ball device 740, and a ball. The ball ejection passage 778 (see FIG. 84) that guides the game ball received by the extraction port 777 to the front side and the game ball that has rolled the ball extraction passage 778 are released forward and the normal ball outlet 774 at the left end of the front view. And a ball outlet 779 which is opened at a position behind the full ball outlet 776.

In the full tank branch unit 770 of this example, assuming that the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 are the first of the foul cover units 540 in the door frame 5, respectively. The game ball is designed to communicate with the ball inlet 542a and the second ball inlet 542c so as to face each other, and the game ball released from the normal ball outlet 774 passes through the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540 and of the dish unit 300. The game ball supplied to the upper plate 301 and released from the full tank outlet 776 is supplied to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300 through the second ball inlet 542c of the foul cover unit 540. Further, the ball ejection port 779 is formed so as to communicate with the upper right end of the rear view of the main body frame base ball extraction passage 622 in the main body frame base 600, and the game ball released from the ball extraction outlet 779 is formed in the main body frame base 600. It is designed to be handed over to the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622.

In this full tank branch unit 770, the game balls paid out to the prize ball passage 741c side of the prize ball device 740 can be received at the prize ball receiving port 771 via the prize ball passage 715 of the prize ball base 710. In the normal state, the game ball that has entered the prize ball receiving port 771 hangs down the branch space 772 and flows down into the normal passage 773 arranged directly below the prize ball receiving port 771. Then, the game ball that has flowed down into the normal passage 773 is the normal ball outlet 7.
From 74, it enters the first ball inlet 542a of the foul cover unit 540, passes through the first ball passage 542b, and is supplied from the first ball outlet 544a to the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300.

By the way, when the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is full of game balls and the game balls are further paid out from the prize ball unit 700 (prize ball device 740), the first ball exit of the foul cover unit 540. The game ball that cannot come out from 544a to the upper plate 301 side stagnates in the first ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540, and eventually fills the upstream normal passage 773 through the normal ball outlet 774 in the full tank branch unit 770. become. In this state, the game ball that has entered the branch space 772 from the prize ball receiving port 771 cannot enter the normal passage 773, and starts to move laterally in the branch space 772 and moves laterally. The game ball enters the full tank passage 775 and is under the plate unit 300 from the full tank outlet 776 via the second ball entrance 542c, the second ball passage 542d, and the second ball exit 544b of the foul cover unit 540. It is designed to be supplied to the plate 302.

The full-tank branch unit 770 of this example is entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, foreign matter such as dust and dirt that has entered the full tank branch unit 770 and the occurrence of ball clogging can be easily found without disassembling the full tank branch unit 770. ..

In this way, when the full tank branch unit 770 of this example is full of game balls in the upper plate 301, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are automatically used until the full tank is cleared. Since it can be supplied to the lower plate 302, the game ball is not supplied to the hitting ball launcher by operating the ball removal button on the upper plate when the upper plate is full like a conventional pachinko machine. It is possible to prevent the hitting of the game ball from being interrupted, eliminate the annoyance during the game, and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, the full tank branching unit 770 of this example branches the passage of the game ball to be paid out directly under the prize ball device 740, that is, at the rear of the pachinko machine 1 when the upper plate 301 is full. Since the game balls staying in the normal passage 773 of the full tank branch unit 770 are discharged to the upper plate 301, the game balls in the upper plate 301 and the game balls in the normal passage 773 are hit ball launching devices. The game ball can be directly driven by the 650, and the storage amount of the game ball in the upper plate 301 is substantially the sum of the capacity of the upper plate 301 and the capacity of the normal passage 773. That is, even if the capacity of the upper plate 301 is made smaller than the capacity of the upper plate in the conventional pachinko machine, the capacity of the normal passage 773 is added, so that the same amount of game balls as the conventional one is stored in the upper plate 301. Can be done. Therefore, by making the upper plate 301 smaller, the game window 101 in the door frame 5 can be made relatively larger (wider), and the pachinko machine 1 having a wider game area 1100 can be made to play a game. The pachinko machine 1 has a high appeal to the player, and the wide game area 1100 makes it possible to entertain the player.

Further, since the two normal ball outlets 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage tray (first). Even if there is only one ball entrance 542a and second ball entrance 542c), the game ball can be sent to the door frame 5 side without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to correspond to the door frame 5 having a different number of storage dishes without changing the flow path of the game ball (full tank branch unit 770) in the main body frame 3. It is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the lineup of the pachinko machine 1 provided with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates.

Further, as described above, even if the number of storage plates provided in the door frame 5 is changed, it can be handled without changing the main body frame 3, so that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole for changing the door frame 5 It is possible to reduce the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and provide various pachinko machines 1 at low cost.

Further, the game ball sent from the normal ball outlet 774 to the door frame 5 side through the normal passage 773 is preferentially driven into the game area 1100, and the door frame 5 provided with only one storage plate. Even if it is exchanged for, the game ball paid out from the prize ball device 740 can be immediately sent to the storage plate via the normal passage 773 and the normal ball outlet 774, so that the time lag from payout to storage can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered due to the shortage of game balls for driving, and it is possible to sufficiently cope with the door frames 5 having different numbers of storage plates. ..

Further, unless the upper plate 301 is full, the game balls paid out from the prize ball device 740 are sent to the upper plate 301, so that the frequency of transferring the game balls stored in the lower plate 302 to the upper plate 301 is reduced. This makes it possible to concentrate the player on the operation of driving the game ball, etc., and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 of the full tank branch unit 770 are arranged side by side, and even when the door frame 5 is provided with only one storage plate, the first ball Since the position of the lower end of the receiving port corresponding to the entrance 542a or the like can be set to the same height as the first ball entrance 542a or the like corresponding to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 provided with two storage plates, the storage plate It is possible to prevent the depth from becoming shallow, and it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of game balls by deepening the storage plate, so that the player does not have to worry about the storage amount frequently. It is possible to correspond to the door frame 5 equipped with a different number of storage dishes without changing the main body frame 3 side, and the cost for changing the model of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Can be suppressed.

Further, the position where the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 branches from the normal passage 773 is branched at a position as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, and the upper plate 301 is filled with a game ball. Therefore, even if the game ball cannot be discharged from the normal ball outlet 774, the amount of the game ball stored in the normal passage 773 between the normal ball exit 774 and the branch position of the full tank passage 775 is increased as much as possible. It is possible to increase the amount of substantially stored game balls stored in the upper plate 301 as much as possible. If only one storage plate is provided in the door frame 5, even if the storage plate is full of game balls and the game balls cannot be discharged from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. Since the position where the full passage 775 branches from the normal passage 773 is arranged as close as possible to the prize ball device 740, many game balls are placed not only in the normal passage 773 but also in the full passage 775. Can be stored, and the amount of substantially stored game balls stored in the storage tray can be increased as much as possible. Therefore, even if the number of storage plates provided on the door frame 5 side is different, the storage amount of the game balls in each door frame 5 is maximized without changing the main body frame 3 side (full tank branch unit 770). It can be a pachinko machine 1 that can be increased to a limited number and can sufficiently cope with different door frames 5.

Further, the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 in the full tank branch unit 770 are wide enough to roll the game balls in a plurality of rows, and the amount of the game balls staying (stored) in the full tank branch unit 770. Therefore, even if the number of storage plates provided in the door frame 5 is different, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the actual storage amount of the game balls in the full tank branch unit 770. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can correspond to a door frame 5 having a different number of storage plates without changing the flow path of the game ball in the main body frame 3.

Further, since the full tank branch unit 770 is made of transparent resin, the inside of the normal passage 773 and the full tank passage 775 can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the game ball is clogged in the full tank branch unit 770 and a problem occurs. At that time, the location of the ball jam can be easily found from the outside of the full tank branch unit 770, the defect can be resolved at an early stage, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 can be increased.

[Ball outlet opening / closing unit] Next, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 to 87. FIG. 85 is a front perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 86 is a rear perspective view of the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the ball outlet opening / closing unit in the main body frame and the foul cover unit in the door frame. The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 in the main body frame 3 of the present embodiment is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the main body frame 3. When the door frame 5 is opened, the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700 are closed, and the prize ball unit 700 is moved to the plate unit 300 of the door frame 5. It is possible to block the flow of the game ball.

The ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is attached to a mounting portion 624 formed near the upper left end of the front view of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 so as not to protrude from the upper end of the lower rear wall portion 604. The opening / closing shutter 792 is held so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the shutter base 791, the opening / closing crank 793 that slides the opening / closing shutter 792 in the vertical direction, and the opening / closing shutter 792 are raised via the opening / closing crank 793. It is equipped with an opening / closing spring 794 that urges the vehicle.

The shutter base 791 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 includes a pair of vertically extending slide grooves 791a for holding the opening / closing shutter 792 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction so as to project upward from the upper end of the shutter base 791. A rectangular opening 791b that penetrates in the front-rear direction between a pair of slide grooves 791a, and a crank that is arranged in front of the left end portion in a front view and rotatably supports an opening / closing crank 793 that extends in the front-rear direction. It includes a support portion 791c and a spring locking portion 791d that locks one end (upper end) of the opening / closing spring 794. The crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791 is arranged on the left side of the opening 791b in the front view, and the spring locking portion 791d is arranged in the vicinity of the upper portion on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view.

Further, the opening / closing shutter 792 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 is a pair of sliding protrusions (not shown) that project from the front surface of the flat shutter body 792a and the shutter body 792a and slide in the slide groove 791a of the shutter base 791. ), And a horizontally long rectangular drive hole 792b arranged at a position facing the opening 791b of the shutter base 791 between the pair of sliding protrusions and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

Further, the opening / closing crank 793 of the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 has a shaft portion 793a rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the crank support portion 791c of the shutter base 791, and the outer circumference on the right side of the front view of the shaft portion 793a. A drive rod 793b whose tip extends outward from the tip to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction of the opening 791b, and a drive rod 793b that protrudes rearward from the tip and is slidably inserted into the drive hole 792b of the opening / closing shutter 792. Drive pin 793c, contact portion 793d extending downward from the lower outer circumference of the shaft portion 793a and having a spherical tip, and the other end (lower end) of the opening / closing spring 794 formed on the upper surface of the drive rod 793b. ) Is provided with a spring locking portion 793e.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the shutter base 791 and the opening / closing shutter 792 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and even when the opening / closing shutter 792 is raised, the opening / closing shutter 792 is arranged on the rear side through the opening / closing shutter 792. The normal ball outlet 774, the full tank outlet 776, and the like in the full tank branch unit 770 can be visually recognized.

In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 of this example, the opening / closing crank 793 rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, so that the drive pin 793c of the opening / closing crank 793 rotates in the vertical direction in an arc shape, and at the same time, the drive pin 793c. The opening / closing shutter 792 slides in the vertical direction through the drive hole 792b in which the is inserted. In the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 comes into contact with the opening / closing operation piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5. The contact portion 793d is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and the drive pin 793c is rotated in the front view clockwise direction together with the contact portion 793d. By moving, the open / close shutter 792 is lowered so that the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 can be opened.

When the door frame 5 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3 from this state, the contact portion 793d of the opening / closing crank 793 and the opening / closing operating piece 542g of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 are released, and the opening / closing crank 793 is released. Is rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by the urging force of the opening / closing spring 794, and at the same time, the opening / closing shutter 792 rises to close the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 776 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770. You can do it.

In this way, according to the opening and closing of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the ball outlet opening / closing unit 790 automatically opens the normal ball outlet 774 and the full tank outlet 767 at the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 in the prize ball unit 700. Since it can be opened and closed, even if the door frame 5 is opened with the game ball remaining in the full tank branch unit 770, the game ball is prevented from spilling from the normal ball outlet 774 or the full tank outlet 776. You can do it.

[Board Unit] Next, the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 88 to 94. FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame, and FIG. 89 is a rear perspective view of the substrate unit in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the front after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed after being disassembled. Further, FIG. 92 is a perspective view illustrating the operation of the vertical wall portion of the power supply board box in the board unit. FIG. 93 (A) is a cross-sectional view of the terminal board box in the board unit, and FIG. 93 (B) is an exploded perspective view of the terminal board box in the board unit as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 94A is a front view of the firing power supply board box, and FIG. 94B is a sectional view taken along line AA shown in FIG.

The board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 includes a board unit base 810 attached to the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, a speaker box 820 attached to the left rear surface of the board unit base 810 in front view, and a board unit base. A power supply board box 830 mounted on the rear surface of the right end of the front view of the 810, a power supply board box holder 840 mounted on the rear surface of the board unit base 810 so as to surround the launch power board box 830 from the rear side, and a power supply board box holder 840. A power supply board box 850 that is mounted on the rear surface and has a rear end substantially flush with the rear end of the speaker box 820, and a payout control board box 860 that is mounted on the rear surfaces of the power supply board box 850 and the speaker box 820. The terminal board box 870 attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820 so as to cover the left end of the payout control board box 860 in front view, the main relay terminal board 880 attached to the front surface of the board unit base 810, and the peripheral side relay. It includes a terminal board 882.

As shown in the figure, the substrate unit base 810 in the substrate unit 800 of this example has a shape that extends long in the left-right direction, and a substantially central portion in the left-right direction is lowered by one step and gently inclined upward toward both left and right ends. A wall-shaped shielding wall portion 811 protruding from the front to the front, an opening 812 arranged above the position one step lower in the center in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the shielding wall portion 811. A board mounting portion 813 formed on the front surface near the left end of the front view for mounting the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882, and a rectangular shape horizontally long in the front-rear direction on the left side of the board mounting portion 813. A plurality of vertically long slit-shaped through holes 815 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the penetrating tubular duct portion 814 and the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 fixed to the rear surface, and the left side of the rear view (right side of the front view). ) The upper rear surface is provided with a box accommodating portion 816 that is open rearward and upward and can accommodate the front side of the firing power supply board box 830.

The substrate unit base 810 is formed so that the shielding wall portion 811 is formed along the lower side of the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. It is possible to prevent the game ball from falling downward from the base ball pulling passage 622, and it is possible to increase the strength of the substrate unit base 810. Further, the board unit base 810 sends the game balls flowing down the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 to the power supply board box holder 840 arranged on the rear side of the board unit base 810 through the opening 812 penetrating in the front-rear direction. You can do it.

Further, in the board unit base 810, the board mounting portion 813 for mounting the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rectangular opening 614 in the main body frame base 600. When the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are attached to the board mounting portion 813, the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are on the front side from the opening 614 of the main body frame base 600. It is designed to face. Further, the substrate unit base 810 can satisfactorily transmit the sound from the lower speaker 821 of the speaker box 820 to the front side by the duct portion 814 and the plurality of through holes 815.

Further, the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the front box accommodating portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 in which the box accommodating portion 816 is arranged on the rear side, and the box accommodating portion 816 and the front box accommodating portion 843 are formed. As a result, it is possible to form a storage recess for accommodating the firing power supply board box 830.

The speaker box 820 in the board unit 800 literally includes a lower speaker 821 mounted facing forward. The speaker box 820 covers the rear side of the lower speaker 821 in a hermetically sealed manner, and at the same time, a horizontally long rectangular opening 822 is formed on the left side of the lower speaker 821 in front view. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the opening 822 communicates with the space behind the lower speaker 821 via a predetermined maze-shaped passage to invert the phase of the sound behind the lower speaker 821. It is a bass-reflex type speaker box that can emit deeper bass to the diameter of the lower speaker 821. The duct portion 814 of the board unit base 810 is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 822 of the speaker box 820, so that the sound radiated from the opening 822 can be satisfactorily transmitted forward. ing.

The firing power board box 830 in the board unit 800 is formed in a box shape with an open rear portion, and includes a firing power board 831 attached so as to close the rear end opening. The firing power supply board box 830 is adapted to accommodate various electronic components attached to the firing power supply board 831, and heat from the electronic components and the like is passed through the slits 830a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. Can be released to the outside.

The firing power supply board box 830 is detached from above in a storage recess formed by a box housing portion 816 of the board unit base 810 and a front box housing portion 843 of the power supply board box holder 840 described later. It is designed to be accommodated as much as possible. As a result, in the state where the main body frame 3 is assembled, if a problem occurs in the firing power supply board box 830, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily attached / detached from the front side of the main body frame 3 for replacement or repair. It is possible (see FIG. 68).

Further, the firing power supply board box 830 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 94, the firing power supply board 831 has a DC / DC converter 831a and an electrolytic capacitor SC0 for charging and discharging the electric power from the DC / DC converter 831a. The combined current, which is the sum of the current from the DC / DC converter 831a and the current due to the discharge from the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is driven by passing a current through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650. The firing power supply board box 830 is formed with slits 830a as heat dissipation holes on the upper and lower surfaces thereof in order to release the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 mounted on the firing power supply board 831 to the outside. ing.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 is an electronic component that is more easily damaged by heat than the DC / DC converter 831a, the side surface of the firing power supply board box 830 in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is arranged is provided with a heat dissipation hole. A slit 830a is formed. Further, in the firing power supply board box 830, a partition wall 830b that divides the internal space into two spaces, a space for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and a space for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0, is an upper inner wall. It is integrally formed from the bottom surface to the edge of the end opening so as to connect the bottom surface and the inner wall of the bottom surface. As a result, when the firing power board 831 is attached to the end opening of the firing power board box 830 and the internal space of the firing power board box 830 is closed, the internal space of the firing power board box 830 accommodates the electrolytic capacitor SC0 by the partition wall 830b. Since two spaces are formed, the accommodating space 830c for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and the accommodating space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a, the partition wall 830b and the accommodating space 830c for accommodating the electrolytic capacitor SC0. The storage space 830d for accommodating the DC / DC converter 831a and the heat insulating wall for blocking the inflow and outflow of heat.

The heat in the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is housed, that is, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is slits as heat dissipation holes formed in the upper surface, the side surface, and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830c and the outside air, respectively. By being discharged to the outside via the 830a, it is possible to prevent the released heat from entering the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be prevented from being transferred to the DC / DC converter 831a. Further, the heat in the accommodation space 830d in which the DC / DC converter 831a is accommodated, that is, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a is the heat radiation holes formed on the upper surface and the lower surface that communicate the accommodation space 830d and the outside air, respectively. By being discharged to the outside through the slit 830a, the released heat can be prevented from entering the accommodation space 830c in which the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is accommodated. Therefore, the heat generated by the DC / DC converter 831a can be prevented from being transferred to the electrolytic capacitor SC0.

In the present embodiment, the DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current to be passed through the firing solenoid 654 of the ball launching device 650 are not installed on the power supply board 851, but are launched separately from the power supply board 851. By being provided on the power supply board 831, the size of the firing power supply board 831 can be made smaller than the size of the power supply board 851. Therefore, the miniaturization of the firing power supply board 831 makes it easier to handle, facilitates the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831, and contributes to shortening the time spent for the replacement work. In this replacement work, the firing power supply board 831 can be replaced as it is attached to the end opening of the firing power supply board box 830, that is, the entire firing power supply board box 830 can be replaced.

Further, even if the pachinko machine 1 is operated and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 reaches the end of its life, and the drive firing by the firing solenoid 654 suddenly becomes impossible to fire and the game has to be interrupted, the replacement work of the firing power supply board 831 is easy. By doing this, the interruption of the game can be resolved at an early stage. Therefore, the inability to fire due to the life of the electrolytic capacitor SC0 can be resolved extremely easily, and the interruption of the game due to the inability to fire can be resolved at an early stage to restart the game, which reduces the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

The electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates and reaches the end of its life due to repeated charging and discharging at a frequency of, for example, 100 times per minute each time drive firing is performed by the firing solenoid 654. On the other hand, although the power supply board 851 creates a DC power supply from the AC power supply of island facilities such as a game hall, it is not repeatedly charged and discharged at the same frequency as the electrolytic capacitor SC0 of the firing power supply board 831. Compared with the firing power supply board 831, its life is extremely long. In other words, the firing power supply board 831 reaches the end of its life due to deterioration due to charging and discharging of the electrolytic capacitor SC0, whereas the power supply board 851 reaches the end of its life due to aging. The DC / DC converter 831a and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 for creating the merged current flowing through the firing solenoid 654 are not provided on the power supply board 851, but are provided on the firing power supply board 831 which is separate from the power supply board 851. Electronic components that accompany long-term changes can be concentrated on the power supply board 851. As a result, it is possible to prevent electronic components having a long life from being replaced together with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 having a short life due to aging.

Further, since the launching power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 that controls the hitting ball launching device 650 can be attached to and detached from the front side through the gaming board holding port 601 that holds the gaming board 4, the capacitance is increased in order to change the hitting characteristics. Even if you try to change to a different electrolytic capacitor SC0, it is necessary to remove the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 in order to attach and detach the firing power supply board 831, and it is difficult to replace the firing power supply board 831. By making it difficult to commit fraud, it is possible to suppress fraud that intentionally changes the driving strength that is optimized by illegally modifying the firing power supply board 831. It has become possible to use a pachinko machine 1 that can prevent a player who has been frustrated from developing into fraud such as cheating.

In addition, since the firing power supply board 831 is removable and can be replaced, even if the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 is fraudulent, the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced and the fraudulent operation is performed. It can be eliminated, the interruption period of the game can be shortened as much as possible, and the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game can be eliminated at an early stage. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the person in the game.

Further, the firing power supply board 831 provided with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 in the firing control unit 4120 that controls the ball launching device 650 is detachable from the front side through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 that holds the game board 4. , When the game board 4 is replaced due to a model change, etc., the launch power supply board 831 (launch power supply board box 830) of the launch control unit 4120 can also be easily replaced, so it matches the concept of the new model to be replaced. By replacing the firing power supply board 831 equipped with the electrolytic capacitor SC0 and the DC / DC converter 831a that can realize the driving characteristics, the driving characteristics of the ball launching device 650 previously provided in the main body frame 3 can be replaced with a new game. It can be considered to match the board 4. Therefore, since the driving characteristics of the game ball can be easily matched to the concept of the game board 4, the game by the new model game board 4 can be fully enjoyed, and the player's interest is suppressed from being lowered. can do.

Further, since the launch power supply board 831 of the launch control unit 4120 can be attached and detached from the front side, it is not necessary to open the main body frame 3 for the island equipment such as the game hall when replacing the launch power supply board 831. It is possible to simplify the labor required for replacement, and it is possible to replace in a short time, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side. Further, since the firing power supply board 831 (fired power supply board box 830) is removable and can be replaced, the driving characteristics are changed as compared with the case where the entire firing control unit 4120 (payout control board 4110) is replaced. It is possible to reduce the cost required for the circuit board and reduce the burden on the hall side and the like.

Furthermore, when changing the model, etc., only the game board 4 is replaced so that the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, etc. can be used as they are, so that the launch control unit 4120 can be used for a long period of time. When the electrolytic capacitor SC0 or the like of the firing power supply board 831 deteriorates, the firing power supply board box 830 can be easily replaced from the front side as described above, so that a problem occurs due to the deterioration and the firing power supply board 831 is immediately replaced. It is possible to eliminate the problem, shorten the interruption period of the game as much as possible, and eliminate the feeling of irritation or disappointment due to the interruption of the game at an early stage. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

Further, the firing power supply board 831 (launching power supply board box 830) is supported through the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the firing power supply board 831 is held by the game board holding port 601 in order to be attached and detached. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 4, even if a tool for performing fraudulent activity is inserted through the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, the fraudulent tool reaches the firing power supply board 831 by the game board 4. It is possible to prevent the firing power supply board 831 from being cheated, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high defense against cheating.

Further, the firing power supply board box 830 is supported through the gaming board holding port 601. Probably, the position for supporting the firing power supply board box 830 is behind the front surface of the main body frame 3, so that the firing power supply is supported. It is possible to easily secure a space for supporting the substrate box 830, and it is possible to reliably embody the pachinko machine 1 that supports the firing power supply substrate box 830 and exhibits the above-mentioned effects.

Further, since the electrolytic capacitor SC0 is provided on the firing power supply board 831 and the firing power supply board 831 can be easily attached to and detached from the front side of the main body frame 3, power is supplied from the electrolytic capacitor SC0 to the firing solenoid 654. Even if the load applied to the electrolytic capacitor SC0 becomes large and the electrolytic capacitor SC0 tends to deteriorate, the electrolytic capacitor SC0 (launching power supply board 831) can be easily replaced, and the problem can be solved early to interrupt the game. The time can be shortened as much as possible, and the pachinko machine 1 can surely achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 in the board unit 800 is opened upward on the left front side of the center on the left and right in front view, and receives the game ball discharged downward from the out ball discharging portion 1161 of the game board 4. The discharge ball receiving portion 841 and the discharge passage 842 that guides and discharges the game ball received by the discharge ball receiving portion 841 downward, and the front side (right side in front view) of the discharge passage 842 and the discharge ball receiving portion 841. The front box accommodating portion 843 which is opened forward and upward and can accommodate the rear side of the power supply board box 830, and the front end of the power supply board box 850 which is formed so that the entire rear surface of the power supply board box holder 840 is recessed to the front side. It is provided with a rear box accommodating portion 844 capable of accommodating.

In this power supply board box holder 840, the open front end side of the discharge passage 842 is closed by the rear surface of the board unit base 810, and the opening 812 of the board unit base 810 is at a position desired to the discharge passage 842. It is formed, and after the substrate unit base 810 is rolled through the opening 812 of the substrate unit base 810 by rolling the main body frame base ball pulling passage 622 formed on the rear surface of the lower rear wall portion 604 of the main body frame base 600. The game ball that has flowed down to the side and the game ball that has been discharged from the out-ball discharge unit 1161 of the game board 4 and received by the discharge ball receiving unit 841 will be passed through the discharge passage 842 to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It can be discharged downward.

Further, the power supply board box holder 840 is formed at a position corresponding to the box accommodating portion 816 of the substrate unit base 810, and the box accommodating portion 816 and the front box accommodating portion 843 accommodate the firing power supply board box 830. It is possible to form a recess.

Further, the power supply board box 850 in the board unit 800 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open front, and includes a power supply board 851 attached so as to close the front end opening thereof. The power supply board box 850 accommodates various electronic components attached to the power supply board 851, and externally receives heat from the electronic components and the like through a plurality of slits 850a formed on the upper surface and the lower surface. It can be released to. As shown in FIG. 91, the power switch 852 attached to the power supply board 851 faces the rear surface of the power supply board box 850.

Further, the power supply board box 850 is a vertical wall in which the power supply terminal 853 (see FIGS. 89 and 91) attached to the lower side of the power supply switch 852 in the power supply board 851 projects rearward along the lower side of the opening facing the rear side. The wiring cord 854 can be inserted between the portion 850b, the protrusions 850c protruding rearward from both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, and the outer periphery of the power supply board box 850 arranged on the front side and the lower side of the standing wall portion 850b. It is provided with a wiring guide portion 850d that forms a gap. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851 has a locking claw that locks with the locking claw of the connector terminal 855, and the locking claw and the locking piece. By locking and, the connector terminal 855 does not come off from the power supply terminal 853.

As shown in FIG. 92, the power supply board box 850 is slightly rearward of the rear end of the connector terminal 855 with the vertical wall portion 850b connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 with the connector terminal 855 of the wiring cord 854. It is formed so as to protrude to. In the power supply board box 850 of this example, the wiring cord 854 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 in a state where the wiring cord 854 wraps around from the front lower side of the power supply board box 850 to the rear side so as to be caught by the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b. The terminal 855 is connected.

By the way, if the connector terminal with the extended wiring cord is connected to the connection terminal attached to the board and the wiring cord is pulled toward the board, the connector terminal is connected by the tension applied from the wiring cord. Since it is pressed against the terminal side, there is a problem that it is difficult to remove the connector terminal from the connection terminal. However, according to the power supply board box 850 of this example, the tip side of the wiring cord 854 (the side opposite to the connector terminal 855 side connected to the power supply terminal 853) moves to the power supply board 851 side (front side with respect to the main body frame 3). Even if it is pulled, the wiring cord 854 is routed so as to wrap around (fold back) to the rear side of the connector terminal 855 by the standing wall portion 850b protruding rearward from the connector terminal 855. It is possible to prevent the force that pushes the terminal 855 toward the power supply terminal 853 from acting, and the power supply terminal 853
The connector terminal 855 connected to the can be easily removed.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 is provided with protrusions 850c protruding rearward on both sides of the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, even if the wiring cord 854 slides along the rear end of the standing wall portion 850b, the rear end The protrusions 850c provided on both ends can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b.

Further, by inserting the wiring cord 854 into the wiring guide portion 850d of the power supply board box 850, the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b can be brought closer to the standing wall portion 850b side, so that the wiring cord 854 can be moved from the standing wall portion 850b. The wiring cord 854 can be folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, and then the wiring cord 854 can be immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side at the wiring guide portion 850d, so that a series of operations can be continuously performed. It can be done, and the work process related to assembly can be simplified.

The power supply board box 850 and the power supply board box holder 840 are formed so that the dimensions in the front-rear direction when assembled with each other are substantially the same as the dimensions in the front-rear direction of the speaker box 820, and the board unit base 810. When attached to, the rear surface of the power supply board box 850 and the rear surface of the speaker box 820 are substantially identical to each other.

Further, in this example, after connecting the connector terminal 855 to the power supply terminal 853 facing from the opening of the power supply board box 850 covering the power supply board 851, the connector is connected by the vertical wall portion 850b protruding to the rear side from the rear end of the connector terminal 855. Since the wiring cord 854 extending from the rear end of the terminal 855 is folded back, the tension acting on the connector terminal 855 when the wiring cord 854 is pulled is applied to the power supply terminal whose connection is fixed by a locking claw or the like. It is possible to act in a direction that disconnects from the 853, and it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 from being unable to be removed by the wiring cord 854, and the connector terminal 855 connected to the power supply terminal 853 of the power supply board 851 can be prevented. Can be easily removed and maintenance such as board replacement can be performed easily.

Further, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the vertical wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850, and the bending condition of the wiring cord 854 can be loosened as compared with the case where the vertical wall portion 850b is not provided. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the 854 itself, and it is possible to prevent the wiring cord 854 from being disconnected due to the unreasonable force and causing a problem.

Further, the vertical wall portion 850b is provided near the opening of the power supply board box 850 facing the power supply terminal 853, and the vertical wall portion 850b is located adjacent to the power supply terminal 853, so that the vertical wall portion 850b is connected to the power supply terminal 853. It is possible to extend the wiring cord 854 extending from the connector terminal 855 to the rear side as straight as possible with respect to the connector terminal 855, and the joint between the connector terminal 855 and the wiring cord 854 is broken and impossible. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting, and it is possible to prevent a problem such as disconnection from occurring.

Further, since the power supply board box 850 that covers the power supply board 851 is provided with the vertical wall portion 850b, it is not necessary to provide the vertical wall portion 850b on the power supply board 851, and the assembly work of the power supply board 851 can be facilitated. .. Further, since the power supply board 851 is covered with the power supply board box 850, it is possible to prevent dust, dust, etc., which cause problems from adhering to the power supply board 851, and the power supply board 851 is mounted. Electronic components (for example, resistors, capacitors, transistors, ICs, CPUs, memories, etc.) can be made difficult to touch or replace, and the defense against fraudulent activities can be enhanced. It has become.

Further, the direction in which the connector terminal 855 is connected to the power supply terminal 853 on the power supply board 851 is a direction substantially perpendicular to the board surface (front-back direction), and the connector terminal is connected to the power supply terminal 853 mounted on the power supply board 851. Since the force applied when connecting or disconnecting the 855 can be easily applied to the surface of the power supply board 851, it is possible to prevent a shearing force from acting on the lead portion of the power supply terminal 853, and the lead portion can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the power supply terminal 853 from being disconnected from the power supply board 851 and to cause a power failure due to breakage, so that the pachinko machine 1 is less likely to cause a problem.

Further, since the connection between the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 is fixed by the fixing means by the locking claw and the locking piece, the wiring cord 854 is folded back by the standing wall portion 850b to connect the wiring cord 854. Even if a force acts on the connector terminal 855 in a direction that disconnects the power supply terminal 853, it is possible to prevent the connector terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 from being disconnected. It is possible to reliably maintain the connection between the terminal 855 and the power supply terminal 853 and prevent problems such as poor contact and poor energization from occurring.

Further, since the wiring cord 854 in the standing wall portion 850b of the power supply board box 850 is provided with protrusions 850c protruding rearward at both ends of the rear end where the wiring cord 854 is folded back, the wiring cord 854 is folded back in the standing wall portion 850b. Even if it slides along the side, the protrusions 850c provided on both ends of the side can prevent the wiring cord 854 from sliding further outward, and prevent the wiring cord 854 from coming off the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can be prevented and surely achieve the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, since the wiring guide portion 850d provided in the power supply board box 850 is used to bring the wiring cord 854 folded back at the standing wall portion 850b toward the standing wall portion 850b, it is difficult to remove the wiring cord 854 from the standing wall portion 850b. It is possible to ensure that the above-mentioned action and effect are exhibited, and after the wiring cord 854 is folded back at the standing wall portion 850b, the wiring cord 854 is immediately moved to the standing wall portion 850b side by the wiring guide portion 850d. It is possible to perform a series of operations continuously, simplify the work process related to assembly, and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800 has a horizontally long thin box-shaped box base 861 with an open rear and a thin box-shaped cover fitted into the box base 861 from the rear side and the front is open. It includes a 862 and a payout control board 4110 (see FIG. 119) that is attached to the rear surface of the box base 861 and whose rear surface is covered by a cover 862. Further, the payout control board box 860 includes a plurality of separated cutting portions 863 formed on both the box base 861 and the cover 862 protruding outward from the left end of the rear view, and at one location of the plurality of separated cutting portions 863. The box base 861 and the cover 862 are crimped and fixed. As a result, in order to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862, it is not possible to separate the box base 861 and the cover 862 without cutting the separation cutting portion 863, and when the payout control board box 860 is opened, the trace remains. .. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the payout control board box 860 has been opened or closed illegally. In this example, the payout control board box 860 can be opened and closed only once for inspection or the like.

The payout control board box 860 has an error release switch 860a, a ball removal switch 860b, an inspection output terminal 860c, etc. attached to the payout control board 4110 facing rearward through the cover 862 (see FIG. 67). ). Further, in the payout control board box 860, terminals for various connections for connecting to the main control board 4100 and the like face rearward through the cover 862.

Further, the terminal board box 870 in the board unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 820, and has a board mounting portion 871a formed on the upper rear surface on the left side of the rear view and a board cover mounting portion 871b formed on the rear surface of the right end of the rear view. On the board base 871 provided, the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 mounted on the board mounting portion 871a of the board base 871 from the rear side and the peripheral panel relay terminal 872a mounted on the rear surface, and the board cover mounting portion 871b of the board base 871. A connection terminal board cover 873 which is attached from the rear side and has an opening 873b extending in the vertical direction on the rear wall portion 873a, and a CR unit connection terminal 874a which faces rearward from the opening 873b of the connection terminal board cover 873 are attached to the rear surface. It includes a CR unit connection terminal plate 874 supported in the connection terminal plate cover 873, and a board box cover 875 that covers the rear side of the board base 871 together with the connection terminal board cover 873.

The peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 in the terminal board box 870 connects the pachinko machine 1 to the frequency indicator for displaying the operating state of the pachinko machine 1 provided on the island facility side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is for connecting the ball lending machine (also referred to as the CR unit 6) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and the pachinko machine 1. The board base 871 and the connection terminal cover 873 and the board box cover 875 of the terminal board box 870 are each made of transparent synthetic resin, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 and the CR unit connection terminal from the outside to the inside are formed. The board 874 and the like can be visually recognized. Further, on the rear surface of the board box cover 875, the content of the error code displayed on the frequency display, CR unit 6, etc. installed on the island equipment side when a problem such as ball clogging occurs in the pachinko machine 1. The displayed status display sticker 876 is attached.

As shown in FIG. 93, the substrate base 871 in the terminal substrate box 870 has a substrate mounting portion 871a formed in a thin box shape with an open rear end. The board base 871 is formed on a fixing piece (not shown) formed on the inner upper part of the board mounting portion 871a to fix the upper end of the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, and formed on the inner lower part of the board mounting portion 871a to relay the peripheral panel. The terminal board box locking claw 871I for locking the lower end of the terminal board 872 is provided, and the peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 is detachably held from the rear side by the fixing piece and the terminal board box locking claw 871I. You can do it.

Further, in the board base 871, the board cover mounting portion 871b is formed in a thin box shape open to the rear side, and the size of the inner circumference thereof is set so that the outer circumference of the connection terminal board cover 873 can be inserted. At the same time, the inner peripheral wall is said to be an outer piece portion 871c extending in the front-rear direction. The board base 871 comes into contact with a pair of fixing holes 871d penetrating the outer piece portion 871c on the right side when viewed from the rear in the left-right direction and the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 extending rearward from the bottom wall of the board cover mounting portion 871b. It is provided with two protrusions 871e extending in the vertical direction and a locking hole 871f arranged on the left outer side of the board cover mounting portion 871b in the rear view and penetrating in the front-rear direction. The protrusion 871e in the substrate base 871 has a state in which the amount of protrusion to the rear is slightly smaller than that of the outer piece portion 871c, and as shown in the figure, it is possible to reach both ends of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. It is arranged so that it is close to.

Further, the board base 871 is arranged on the rear surface on the right side of the rear view of the board cover mounting portion 871b so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of bearing portions 871 g for rotatably supporting the board box cover 875 and the left end of the rear view. It is provided with a square tubular locking portion 871h arranged on the rear surface in the vicinity of the portion and extending in the front-rear direction.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 in the terminal board box 870 is an outer wall portion 873c that surrounds the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and can be inserted into the board cover mounting portion 871b surrounded by the outer piece portion 871c of the substrate base 871. When,
From the rear wall portion 873a that closes the rear end of the outer wall portion 873c, the rectangular opening 873b that penetrates the rear wall portion 873a and extends in the vertical direction, and the rear wall portion 873a substantially along the inner circumference of the opening 873b. The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is held so that the inner wall portion 873d extending forward (on the substrate base 871 side) and the front end of the inner wall portion 873d abuts on the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the upper and lower outer wall portions 873c It is provided with a pair of claw-shaped substrate holding portions 873e formed.

Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is arranged at a position corresponding to a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b attached to the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and has a plurality of openings 873f penetrating the rear wall portion 873a, and abbreviated in the vertical direction. A box-shaped protective portion 873 g that covers the rear side of the opening 873f arranged in the center and the left side of the rear view is open, and a substrate base 871 that extends outward (to the right) from the right end of the rear view of the outer wall portion 873c. A pair of fixing pieces 873h that can be inserted into the fixing holes 871d of the above, and an elastic claw-shaped engagement that is formed at the left end of the outer wall portion 873c and can be locked into the locking holes 871f of the substrate base 871. It is provided with a claw piece 873i. Although not shown, an inner wall portion 873d extending forward is also formed above and below the inner circumference of the central opening 873f provided with the protective portion 873g.

The connection terminal plate cover 873 has a thin box shape with the front side open by the outer wall portion 873c and the rear wall portion 873a. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 to the rear by the front end of the inner wall portion 873d by inserting the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 into the inside from the opened front side. At the same time, the pair of substrate holding portions 873e can restrict the movement of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 forward, so that the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be held detachably. It has become. Further, the connection terminal plate cover 873 is formed by inserting the fixing piece 873h into the fixing hole 871d of the substrate base 871 and then locking the locking claw piece 873i into the locking hole 871f of the substrate base 871. It can be detachably attached to the board cover attachment portion 871b of the base 871.

The CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870 is a CR unit connection terminal 874a for connecting the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 installed on the island facility side of the game hall on the front surface side (rear surface side). In addition, a plurality of internal connection terminals 874b for connecting to the payout control board 4110, the ball rental unit 360, and the like are provided. In the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 of this example, as shown in the figure, the CR unit connection terminal 874a is a D-sub connector having a locking function, and the internal connection terminal 874b is a square two-piece connector. There is.

Further, the substrate box cover 875 of the terminal substrate box 870 is formed in a thin box shape having a size that substantially covers the entire rear surface of the substrate base 871 and is entirely open to the front side, and is arranged on the right side surface of the substrate base 871. A pair of shaft portions 875a rotatably supported by the bearing portion 871 g, a through-hole 875b that corresponds to the opening 873b in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a through-hole 875b that is forward from both left and right ends. It is provided with an impact wall 875c extending to the surface and a locking piece 875d locked to the locking portion 871h of the substrate base 871.

The board box cover 875 can cover the rear surface of the board base 871 so as to be openable and closable together with the connection terminal board cover 873 by pivotally supporting the pair of shaft parts 875a to the bearing portion 871g of the board base 871. There is. Further, the substrate box cover 875 has a length such that the impact wall 875c on the side close to the shaft portion 875a (the side supported by the shaft) extends to the rear surface of the substrate base 871 and is located on the side far from the shaft portion 875a. The length of 875c is set to extend to the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873. That is, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, when the board box cover 875 is closed, the front ends of the respective contact walls 875c are substantially in contact with the rear surface of the board base 871 and the connection terminal board cover 873. It has become like.

In the terminal board box 870 of this example, since the CR unit connection terminal 874a of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a D-sub connector, as shown in FIG. 93, the CR unit is connected to the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The main body of the connection terminal 874a is in a floating state, and the lead portion extending from the CR unit connection terminal 874a is also exposed to the outside on the rear surface side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Further, the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is a square two-piece connector, and is attached so as to be fitted and connected from the rear as shown in the figure.

Then, as shown in FIG. 93, the terminal board box 870 of this example has the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board base 871 in the direction along the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 in the assembled state. 871e and the outer piece 871c, and the outer wall 873c and inner wall 873d of the connection terminal cover 873 and the shaft 875a of the board box cover 875 in the direction along the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the side impact walls 875c are present respectively, a barrier is constructed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 is a meandering crank shape. It has become. Therefore, for example, even if an unauthorized tool with excellent flexibility is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool does not bend along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal is used. Unauthorized tool intrusion from the direction along the surface of the plate 874 can be reliably prevented, and unauthorized acts on the CR unit connection terminal 874a provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 can be reliably prevented. It has become.

Further, in this terminal board box 870, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 comes into contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, the CR unit attached as the CR unit connection terminal 874a Even if a D-sub connector in which a gap is formed with the connection terminal plate 874 is used, the outer circumference of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent acts can be prevented. It has become like.

Further, the terminal board box 870 is a pair of shaft portions 875a on the shaft portion 875a side of the through port 875b facing the CR unit connection terminal 874a on the substrate box cover 875 rotatably supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871. An impact wall 875c having a length straddling between them is provided, and the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c. Therefore, a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871. Even if an attempt is made to form a gap between the pair of shaft portions 875a, it is possible to prevent the board box cover 875 from being distorted and prevent the formation of a gap, which makes it difficult to perform fraudulent acts and provides a deterrent effect. It can be made expensive.

Further, in the terminal board box 870 of this example, the rear side of the internal connection terminal 874b near the center of the CR unit connection terminal board 874 is covered with the protection portion 873 g of the connection terminal board cover 873 and the board box cover 875. Therefore, with the connection terminal on the wiring cord side fitted and connected to the internal connection terminal 874b, which is a two-piece connector, insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body of the connection terminal and the wiring cord. Even so, the protective portion 873 g and the substrate box cover 875 can prevent the electrodes from being inserted, and can prevent fraudulent acts on the internal connection terminal 874b.

As described above, according to this example, since the terminal board box 870 containing the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame 3, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are arranged from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Even if an illegal tool is inserted through a space or the like to allow the tip of the illegal tool to enter the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the terminal board box 870 protects the housed CR unit connection terminal plate 874. This makes it possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874.

Further, in the state where the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is housed in the terminal board box 870, the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the substrate are in the direction along the front surface (back surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. The protrusion 871e, the outer piece portion and 871c of the base 871, and the outer wall portion 873c, the inner wall portion 873d, and the substrate of the connection terminal plate cover 873 in the direction along the rear surface (surface of the substrate) of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Since the impact wall 875c of the box cover 875 exists, a barrier is constructed by multiple layers, and the cross-sectional shape of the boundary between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 becomes a meandering crank shape. , For example, even if you try to invade an illegal tool with excellent flexibility between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 (boundary), the tool will not bend along the boundary and the CR unit connection terminal plate Unauthorized tool intrusion from the direction along the surface of 874 can be reliably prevented, and unauthorized acts on the CR unit connection terminal 874a and the internal connection terminal 874b provided on the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are reliably prevented. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of capable.

Further, since the front end of the inner wall portion 873d of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is in contact with the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, each lead portion is exposed as the CR unit connection terminal 874a with the substrate. Even if the D-sub connector is used, the outer circumference of the lead portion exposed by the inner wall portion 873d can be covered, and fraudulent acts can be reliably prevented.

Further, one end of the terminal board box 870 is rotatably supported on the rear surface of the substrate base 871 to cover the rear surface of the connection terminal plate cover 873 so as to be openable and closable, and the opening 873b of the connection terminal plate cover 873. A substrate box cover 875 having a plate-shaped impact wall 875c extending forward from the side end of the through-hole 875b corresponding to the above to the rear surface of the substrate base 871 is further provided. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the parts of the box cover 875 that are pivotally supported with respect to the board base 871 to form a gap and an illegal tool is inserted, the illegal tool is connected by the impact wall 875c. It is possible to prevent the plate cover 873 (CR unit connection terminal plate 874) from reaching the side, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts.

Further, in order to take out the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 in the terminal board box 870, it is necessary to open the connection terminal board cover 873 after opening the board box cover 875, which makes it difficult to take out the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is possible to increase the deterrence against cheating. Further, since the strength and rigidity of the board box cover 875 can be increased by the impact wall 875c, even if a driver or the like is inserted between the board box cover 875 and the board base 871 to form a gap, the board box cover 875 is formed. It is possible to prevent the cover from being distorted and to prevent the formation of a gap, making it difficult to cheat and making it highly deterrent.

Furthermore, even if an attempt is made to insert a needle-shaped electrode through the gap between the connector body and the wiring cord at the terminal on the wiring cord side connected to the internal connection terminal 874b of the CR unit connection terminal board 874, it can be dealt with. Since the rear side of the opening 873f, that is, the rear side of the opening of the gap along the wiring cord of the connector body is covered with the protective portion 873 g and the board box cover 875, the outside of the terminal board box 870 ( It is not possible to insert a needle-shaped electrode into the gap of the connector body from the rear side), and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the terminals of the connected wiring cord, and it has high security capability. Can be.

Further, since the outer wall portion 873c of the connection terminal plate cover 873 is provided with the substrate holding portion 873e for holding the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the outer wall portion 873c extends to the front side of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874. Even if a driver or the like is inserted between the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the board base 871 to form a gap in order to perform fraudulent acts, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 moves to the rear side together with the connection terminal plate cover 873. Therefore, the positional relationship between the front end of the outer wall portion 873c in the connection terminal plate cover 873 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 does not change, and the outer periphery of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 is the outer wall portion 873c (connection terminal plate cover 873). It can be kept protected by, and it is not possible to cheat on the CR unit connection terminal 874a on the rear surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the CR unit connection terminal 874a cannot be used. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts aimed at such things.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is made of transparent resin and the inside of the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside, the terminal board box 870 can be visually recognized from the outside of the terminal board box 870 without disassembling the terminal board box 870. Is an illegal tool inserted into the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or peripheral panel relay terminal board 872 housed inside, or is the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like itself replaced with an illegal one? Alternatively, it is possible to easily check whether the electronic components (for example, ROM, IC, resistor, capacitor, etc.) mounted on the CR unit connection terminal board 874 or the like have been replaced with illegal ones. , It is possible to make it easier to detect fraudulent activity, and it is also easier to detect fraudulent activity. it can.

Further, since the terminal board box 870 is attached to the back surface side of the main body frame 3 so that the front surface of the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 or the like faces the rear side, the terminal board box 870 is attached to the outer frame 2 during maintenance or the like. When the main body frame 3 is rotated to the front side and the rear side of the main body frame 3 appears, the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like housed in the terminal board box 870 are in a state of facing the operator side (player side), and the CR It is possible to facilitate inspection of the unit connection terminal plate 874 and the like and the terminal board box 870.

The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 of the board unit 800 are the door frame together with the peripheral control unit 4140 provided in the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3, the payout control board 4110 of the board unit 800, and the like. This is for relaying the connection with the handle device 500 provided in 5, each decorative board, the operation unit 400, and the like. The main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 are provided with a plurality of connection terminals for connecting to the main body frame 3 side and the door frame 5 side, and are a substrate formed on the front surface of the substrate unit base 810. By attaching to the attachment portion 813, these connection terminals face the front side from the front surface of the main body frame base 600.

As shown in FIGS. 66 and 68, the front side of the main relay terminal plate 880 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 is covered with the relay terminal plate cover 692 attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. At the same time, only the connection terminals for connecting to the door frame 5 side face the front side through the opening 692a of the relay terminal plate cover 692, and the wiring 196 is connected to those connection terminals. (See FIGS. 1 and 28).

Further, the main relay terminal plate 880 is a ball rental button 361, a return button 362, a rental balance display unit 363, and a rotation position detection sensor of the handle device 500 in the dish unit 300 arranged on the door frame 5 side. The purpose is to relay the connection between the full tank detection sensor 550 of the 512, the touch sensor 516, the launch stop switch 518, and the foul cover unit 540, and the payout control board 4110 arranged on the main body frame 3 side. Further, the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 is attached to the decorative units 200, 240, 280 arranged on the door frame 5 side, the decorative substrates 430, 432 provided in the dish unit 300 and the operation unit 400, and the operation unit 400. This is for relaying the connection between the dial drive motor 414 and the sensors 432a, 432b, 432c provided and the peripheral control unit 4140 of the game board 4 arranged on the main body frame 3 side.

[Back Cover] Subsequently, the back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 97. FIG. 95 (A) is a front perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame, and FIG. 95 (B) is a rear perspective view of the back cover in the main body frame. Further, FIG. 96 is an enlarged cross-sectional view showing a portion of the fastening mechanism in the back cover, and FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the fastening mechanism in the back cover as viewed from the rear side by disassembling. The back cover 900 of this example is made of a transparent synthetic resin so that the inside of the main body frame 3 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

The back cover 900 in the main body frame 3 covers the rear side of the game board holding port 601 (the game board 4 attached to the main body frame 3) for holding the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. .. The back cover 900 is provided on a plate-shaped main body 902 that closes the rear opening of the game board holding port 601, a side portion 904 that extends forward from the right side of the main body 902 in front view, and a front end of the side portion 904. A plurality of shaft support pins 906 arranged side by side in the vertical direction and projecting downward to be pivotally supported by the back cover shaft support 623 of the main body frame base 600, and a prize ball formed on the upper and lower left sides of the main body 902, respectively. An engaging piece 908 that engages with the back cover engaging groove 718 of the base 710 and the back cover engaging groove 780a of the prize ball passage lid 780, and a back cover 900 in the vicinity of the lower engaging piece 908. It is provided with a fastening mechanism 920 for fastening to 3 in a non-openable manner.

As shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, the fastening mechanism 920 in the back cover 900 has a circular insertion hole penetrating in the front-rear direction to the left side in the rear view of the lower locking piece 923 in the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. 921, a vertically long rectangular locking port 922 that is arranged at a predetermined distance on the left side of the insertion hole 921 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a locking that is elastically locked to the locking port 922 from the rear side. A plate-shaped guide member 923 having a piece 923a on one end side and a horizontally long elongated hole 923b corresponding to an insertion hole 921 on the other end side, and a plate-shaped guide member 923 inserted into the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 from the rear side to form a main body 902. The fastening member 924 having a male screw portion 924a screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 via the insertion hole 921 and the guide member 923 are attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 so as to sandwich the guide member 923. It includes a holding member 925 and. The guide member 923 in the fastening mechanism 920 is made of a soft synthetic resin, and is easily bent.

Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking port 922 of the main body 902 in a loosely fitted state, and the guide member 923 is within a predetermined range. It is possible to play with. Further, in the fastening mechanism 920, the fastening member 924 is supported by the guide member 923 through the elongated hole 923b by the disk-shaped holding member 925 attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, and is supported along the elongated hole 923b. It can slide in the left-right direction and does not fall out of the elongated hole 923b. When the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is locked to the locking port 922 of the main body 902 from the rear side, the fastening mechanism 920 projects the fastening member 924 to the front side through the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923. The male screw portion 924a is in a state of being inserted into the insertion hole 921 of the main body portion 902.

In the back cover 900 of this example, the rear opening of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be opened and closed by pivotally supporting the shaft support pin 906 to the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame base 600. By engaging the engaging piece 908 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame base 600 and the prize ball passage lid 780, the closed state can be obtained. When the back cover 900 is closed, the insertion hole 921 in the fastening mechanism 920 and the back cover fastening hole 780b of the prize ball passage lid 780 are in a substantially coincident state.

When the back cover 900 is closed, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 inserted into the insertion hole 921 from the rear side to the front side is not naturally screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b. Even when the cover 900 is closed, the tip of the male screw portion 924a is stopped at the rear end of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 protrudes rearward from the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900. By the way, in this example, since the fastening member 924 is supported in the elongated hole 923b of the locked guide member 923 of the main body portion 902 of the back cover 900, the fastening member 924 does not fall off from the back cover 900. The state of being located on the rear side of the main body 9002 is maintained.

Then, from this state, the tip of the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is inserted into the back cover fastening hole 780b and the fastening member 924 is rotated, so that the male screw portion 924a is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b (screw). The back cover 900 can be fastened and fixed. In the fastening mechanism 920 of this example, when the fastening member 924 is screwed into the back cover fastening hole 780b, even if the guide member 923 that supports the fastening member 924 is slanted with respect to the main body 902, the fastening member 924 is inserted. Since it is supported by the elongated hole 923b, the fastening member 924 (male threaded portion 924a) can be positioned straight with respect to the axis of the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening member 924 can be satisfactorily placed in the back cover fastening hole 780b. It can be screwed in.

Further, in this example, since the back cover 900 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 3 side by the fastening mechanism 920 at one place, it can be easily fastened or fastened only by operating the fastening member 924 at one place. It can be released, and the time and effort required to open and close the back cover 900 can be simplified and maintainability can be improved.

Further, the back cover 900 has a connection notch 910 cut out in a rectangular shape upward at the lower right end of the front view of the main body 902 and a confirmation opening that penetrates in a rectangular shape on the upper side of the front view of the connection notch 910. A 912 and a confirmation notch 914 notched in a rectangular shape in the lower left corner of the main body 902 in front view are provided.

As shown in FIG. 5, the back cover 900 is closed to the main body frame 3 and is passed through the connection notch 910 to the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f of the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4. Etc. are designed to face the rear side. Further, in the back cover 900, the board management sticker 1178 (see FIG. 106) attached to the rear surface of the main control board box 1170 faces the rear side through the confirmation opening 912, and is for confirmation. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 faces through the cutout portion 914. As a result, the operation of the main control board box 1170 and the main control board 4100 can be checked, the appearance can be checked, the management status can be checked, and the like without opening the back cover 900 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, the back cover 900 is formed with a plurality of slits 916 that are elongated and penetrated through the main body portion 902 and the side portion 904, and the heat generated in the game board 4 or the like through these slits 916 is transferred to the main body frame 3 (pachinko machine 1). It can be discharged to the outside on the rear side. As shown in the figure, a plurality of through holes 918 are provided at positions slightly to the left in front view from the center, which are wide and elongated in the vertical direction and are arranged in rows at predetermined intervals in the horizontal direction. These through holes 918 keep the back cover 900 closed with respect to the main body frame 3 and accommodate and hold the game board 4 in the main body frame 3 on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4. It is located behind the cooling fan for cooling the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 provided in the above, so that the heat from the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like can be satisfactorily exhausted. It has become. Incidentally, the width of the through hole 918 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that the game ball does not enter the pachinko machine 1 through the through hole 918.

As a result, in this example, the fastening member 924 that fastens the back cover 900 that closes the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame 3 to the main body frame 3 is attached to the guide member 923 attached to the back cover 900. Since the game board 4 is held in the main body frame 3 so as to be playable, when the back cover 900 is opened from the rear side of the main body frame 3 to perform maintenance or the like on the rear side of the game board 4. Even if the fastening member 924 that fastens and fixes the back cover 900 to the main body frame 3 is released and the fastening member 924 is separated from the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3, the fastening member 924 is the guide member 923. It is possible to prevent the fastening member 924 from being lost or left behind in the pachinko machine 1 because the fastening member 924 is held by the back cover 900 through the back cover 900. It can be a pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing it from falling off.

Further, as described above, since the fastening member 924 can be prevented from falling off from the opened back cover 900, it is not necessary to store the fastening member 924 that has been released from the fastening in a predetermined position during maintenance or the like. , It can be held in the vicinity of the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 via the guide member 923, and maintenance can be facilitated.

Further, since the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923 extends at least to the side opposite to the locking port 922 side, even if the guide member 923 is in an inclined state with respect to the surface of the back cover 900. The male threaded portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be positioned straight to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, and the male threaded portion 924a is surely in the correct state with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Can be fastened to. Therefore, the back cover 900 can be properly fastened to the main body frame 3, and the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be surely exhibited.

Further, since the holding member 925 that cooperates with the head of the fastening member 924 to hold the fastening member 924 against the guide member 923 so as to be playable is attached to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, the fastening member 924 The guide member 923 is sandwiched between the head and the holding member 925, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be reliably prevented from coming off from the elongated hole 923b of the guide member 923, and the holding member 925 can be prevented from coming off. The fastening member 924 can be movably held by the guide member 923 by the gap between the two and the elongated hole 923b.

Further, a storage recess capable of accommodating the holding member is provided around the insertion hole 921 in the back cover 900, and the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 is passed through the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 to cover the back cover of the main body frame 3. When fastening to the fastening hole 780b, the holding member 925 sandwiching the guide member 923 with the head of the fastening member 924 can be accommodated in the accommodating recess, so that the back cover 900 and the guide member 923 are brought into close contact with each other. The protrusion from the back cover 900 can be reduced as much as possible, and the possibility that other members come into contact with the protruding portion of the guide member 923 or the fastening member 924 is reduced, and the occurrence of defects is reduced. You can do it and make it look good.

Further, since the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 is used as a female screw portion and is screwed to the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924, it is fastened by simply pulling it as compared with the engagement by a simple locking claw. It is possible to make it difficult to remove the back cover 900 because the back cover 900 cannot be released, the crime prevention effect of the back cover 900 can be further enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent acts can be obtained.

Further, since the guide member 923 has flexibility and the guide member 923 can be bent, the degree of freedom of movement of the fastening member 924 with respect to the back cover 900 (insertion hole 921) can be further increased. It is easy to position the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 at a position straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3 and to move the male screw portion 924a straight with respect to the back cover fastening hole 780b. The male screw portion 924a can be securely fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b.

Further, the locking piece 923a of the guide member 923 is in contact with the locking port 923 along the inner wall extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921 in the locking port 922 of the back cover 900. Since it is elastically locked to 922, the tip side (long hole 923b side) of the guide member 923 that is movably attached extends in a direction perpendicular to the axis connecting the insertion hole 921. It can be moved so as to rotate around the heart, and the locking piece 923a can be pivotally supported with respect to the locking port 922. Therefore, the fastening member 924 held in the elongated hole 923b on the tip end side of the guide member 923 can be rotated so as to open and close the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900, that is, the back cover fastening hole 780b of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the male screw portion 924a of the fastening member 924 can be easily inserted into the insertion hole 921 and the back cover fastening hole 780b, and the fastening work by the fastening member 924 can be facilitated.

Further, a plurality of back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a are further provided at positions different from the back cover fastening holes 780b in the main body frame 3, and the back cover 900 is elastically engaged with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a, respectively. A plurality of engaging pieces 908 are further provided, and by engaging the engaging pieces 908 of the back cover 900 with the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a of the main body frame 3, the fastening by the fastening member 924 is achieved. Separately, since the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3, the fastening work can be reduced as much as possible by using the fastening member 924 to fasten only one place, and work such as assembly and maintenance can be performed. You can improve your sex. Further, as described above, the back cover 900 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 by engaging the engaging piece 908 and the back cover engaging grooves 718 and 780a separately from the fastening member 924, so that the closing range is wide. Even in the back cover 900, the rear side (rear side of the game board 4) of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be closed in a good state without increasing the number of fastening points by the fastening member 924.

Further, by pivotally supporting the shaft support pin 906 of the back cover 900 to the back cover shaft support portion 623 of the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), the back cover 900 can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 3. Therefore, simply by rotating the back cover 900 in the closing direction to close the rear side of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3, the insertion hole 921 of the back cover 900 and the back cover of the main body frame 3 are fastened. The hole 780b can be easily matched, and the fastening member 924 held by the back cover 900 through the insertion hole 921 can be easily fastened to the back cover fastening hole 780b. Further, since the back cover 900 is rotatably supported on the main body frame 3, even if the back cover 900 is opened by releasing the fastening by the fastening member 924 at the time of maintenance or the like, the back cover 900 is rotatably supported. The cover 900 can be left in a state of being pivotally supported by the main body frame 3, and it is not necessary to remove the back cover 900 from the main body frame 3, and the time and effort required for opening and closing the back cover 900 can be simplified.

[Side Security Plate] Next, the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. As shown in the figure, the side surface security plate 950 in the main body frame 3 forms the left side surface of the main body frame 3 in the front view, and is attached to the main body frame base 600. The side security plate 950 includes a metal main body 952 that is extruded into a shallow U-shape in a plan view, and a mounting bracket 954 that is fixed vertically near the inner front end of the main body 952 and attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600. A positioning member 956 that is fixed inside the main body 952 and engages with the positioning recess 1119 of the game board 4 is provided.

The main body 952 of the side security plate 950 has a side piece 952a that extends in the vertical direction at substantially the same length as the height of the main body frame base 600 and has a substantially constant depth in the front-rear direction, and a front view right from the front end of the side piece 952a. The front end piece 952b extending in the direction, the middle piece 952c which is arranged so as to form a predetermined amount of gap on the rear side of the front end piece 952b and has a smaller protrusion amount than the front end piece 952b, and the side piece 952a from the rear end to the front. It is provided with a rear end piece 952d extending longer than the front end piece 952b in the right-viewing direction (see FIG. 113). The main body 952 is formed in a shallow U shape by a side piece 952a, a front end piece 952b, and a rear end piece 952d, and is formed between the middle piece 952c and the rear end piece 952d with a front component 1110 in the game board 4. The left side portion of the front view with the game panel 1200 is inserted (see FIG. 113).

In the side security plate 950 of this example, the mounting bracket 954 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear end piece 952d of the main body 952 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600. In this side security plate 950, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the front end piece 952b of the main body 952 is the shaft support side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 in the reinforcement unit 150 of the door frame 5. It is designed to be inserted into the U-shape of the character projecting piece 166, and prevents a tool for cheating from being inserted between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the left side of the front view. Can be done (see FIG. 113). Further, the main body 952 of the side security plate 950 is made of an extruded metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the middle piece 952c arranged in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the side piece 952a, and Since the rear end piece 952d is provided, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 are increased, and the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be supported satisfactorily. It has become.

As described above, according to this example, assuming that the front surface of the main body frame 3 is closed by the door frame 5, the door frame 5 is located between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side security plate 950. The rear piece of the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 formed in a substantially U shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the above is inserted (invaded), and the front end piece 952b is inserted into the shaft support side U shape. Since the door frame 5 is sandwiched between the shape projecting pieces 166, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 is attached to the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3. It is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 on the shaft support side of the door frame 5 from moving in the direction away from the main body frame 3 in contact with the door frame 5, and prevent the closed door frame 5 from being scooped open. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3.

Further, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. The strength and rigidity of the door frame 3 can be increased, the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an unauthorized tool, and the crime prevention performance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Further, since the main body frame base 600 that supports the game board 4 is formed of synthetic resin, and the side security plate 950 on the side that supports the door frame 5 (shaft support side) is made of metal. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced as compared with the case where the entire body frame 3 is made of metal.

Further, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 that locks the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 is engaged with the hook cover 165 of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 at one place between the upper and lower ends and the upper and lower ends. Since the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 on the lock device 1000 side (open side) are locked by three door frame hooks 1041 so as to be stopped, the open side is illegal such as a bar. It is possible to satisfactorily prevent the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 from widening even if the door frame 5 is scooped out by a simple tool, and it is possible to prevent the door frame 5 from being forcibly scooped out.

Further, the rear end of the side piece 952a of the side security plate 950 is extended rearward from the front surface (game area 1100) of the game board 4, and the dimension of the side piece 952a in the front-rear direction becomes longer. Since the flexural rigidity with respect to the load applied in the front-rear direction is increased, the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 as a whole can be further increased, and the side security plate 950 can be prevented from being forcibly bent and cheating. ..

Further, since the side security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed by the metal extrusion mold material, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) having a predetermined cross-sectional shape having the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c can be easily formed. It can be formed, and even if the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is improved, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost, and at the same time, defects such as a decrease in strength that occur during processing are caused as compared with the case where a metal plate is bent. The number can be reduced as much as possible, and the side security plate 950 having high durability and strength can be obtained.

[Locking Device] Subsequently, the locking device 1000 in the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 102. FIG. 98 (A) is a left side view of the lock device in the main body frame, and FIG. 98 (B) is a perspective view of the lock device in the main body frame as viewed from the front. Further, FIG. 99A is a rear perspective view of the locking device, and FIG. 99B is a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped substrate of the locking device. Is a rear perspective view showing, (C) is a front perspective view of (B). Further, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the locking device disassembled and viewed later, and FIG. 101 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the sliding rod for the glass door and the sliding rod for the main body frame in the locking device. , FIG. 102 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the fraud prevention member in the locking device.

The lock device 1000 in the main body frame 3 is attached from substantially the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the outer side surface of the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side, as shown in FIG. 73. In addition, a door hook hole 620 formed in the upper part of the front end frame portion 602 of the main body frame base 600 on the right side (open side) side of the front view, a lock locking hole 621 formed in the lower part, and a peripheral wall in the main body frame base 600. It can be attached to a plurality of lock attachment portions 625 formed on the right side surface of the front view of the portion 605.

As shown in FIGS. 98 to 100, the locking device 1000 is for a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are U-shaped so as not to be illegally slid. It includes fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 that are attached to the lower part of the substrate 1001.

The U-shaped base 1001 in the lock device 1000 is formed by bending a predetermined metal plate so as to have a U-shaped cross section, and inside the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. And are slidably arranged. The U-shaped substrate 1001 is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the substrate formed into an L-shaped cross section. As a result, the size of the lock device 1000 in the left-right direction can be made as thin as possible, and the size of the game board holding port 601 in the main body frame 3 can be made relatively large in the left-right direction. It is possible to provide a wide game board 4 of 1100.

The U-shaped base 1001 is attached with the open side having a U-shaped cross section facing the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and when the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, it is U-shaped. The open side of the base 1001 is closed to the main body frame base 600. As a result, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 are attached to the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054, 1065, respectively. It is completely covered and has a fraud prevention structure that makes it difficult to cheat on the lock device 1000 from the outside.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 in the locking device 1000 has a rectangular shape through which the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can penetrate up and down on the closing side (front side) opposite to the opening side (rear side). The hook penetration opening 1002, the screw fixing portion 1003 projecting outward in the upper and middle of the side surface 1001b (see FIG. 100) in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the front side, and the screw fixing portion. The upper end and middle portion of the open side (front side) of the side surface 1001a (see FIG. 100) opposite to the side surface 1001b on which 1003 is projected, and the lower end portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side project forward. The locking projection 1004 is provided.

The screw fixing portion 1003 and the locking protrusion 1004 of the U-shaped base 1001 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, and the locking protrusion 1004 is attached to the door hook hole 620 of the main body frame base 600. And when it is inserted into the lock locking hole 621 from the rear side and then moved upward, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting portion 625 of the main body frame base 600 are aligned with each other, and the screw fixing portion 1003 is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) by screwing a screw (not shown) to the lock attachment portion 625 via the screw device 1000.

The lock device 1000 is attached by screws not only to the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003, but also to the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and near the upper side of the cylinder lock through hole 611. The lock attachment portion 625 is fastened to the main body frame base 600 with screws (not shown), and the lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached.

Further, when the locking device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the U-shaped base 1001 on the open side (front side) are provided with the hook hole 620 for the door in the upper part and the lock locking hole. The locking device 1000 is mounted on the main body frame base 600 with an extremely simple structure because the structure is such that the screw fixing portion 1003 of the U-shaped base 1001 is fixed to the lock mounting portion 625 with a screw while being inserted into the 621 for positioning and locking. It can be firmly fixed to (main body frame 3).

In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated on the U-shaped substrate 1001 having an extremely thin width dimension, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front side and the rear side of the lock device 1000. It can be fixed to. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) on the front side is projected onto the side surface 1001a which does not come into contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixing structure on the rear side projects from the side surface 1001b which is in close contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 toward the peripheral wall portion 605, the locking structure on the front side is the peripheral wall portion 605. The lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to cause rattling, as compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed so as to be close to the surface.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with insertion holes 1005 penetrating in the left-right direction in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b, and the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and caulking with the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame housed, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are inside the U-shaped base 1001. Can be slidably attached in the vertical direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 99 (C), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle, and lower parts of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and FIG. 99. As shown in (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, respectively. The sliding rivet 1040 for the door frame can be moved upward, and the sliding rivet 1050 for the main body frame can be moved downward.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 projects laterally from the front end of the fraud prevention notch 1007 formed on the closed side surface of the lower portion thereof and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame base 600 on the open side. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010, an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021 and an escape horizontal hole 1022 are formed on the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605, respectively. The fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 of the U-shaped substrate 1001 will be described in detail later, but the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is moved forward and backward. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 of the U-shaped base 1001 is located on the side surface 1001b so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board holding port 601 in a state where the lock device 1000 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame base 600. A lock insertion hole 1009, which is projected from the front end toward the side and through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and a mounting hole 1013 formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010 are mounted at two locations above and below for mounting with screws 1012. A mounting hole 1014 drilled in the above and a screw fixing portion 1003 drilled to mount the lower portion of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are formed.

Further, the U-shaped base 1001 has an insertion vertical opening 1020 in which the first engaging projecting piece 1017 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. A spring locking piece 1021 for locking the spring 1035 for urging the second fraud prevention member 1032 upward, and an escape horizontal hole 1022 for forming an escape hole so as not to interfere with the movement of the connecting pin 1034. It has.

The cylinder lock 1010 in the lock device 1000 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 in the U-shaped substrate 1001. In this cylinder lock 1010, a lock mounting board 1011 for mounting on the lock mounting piece 1008 is fixed to the rear end of the cylindrical cylinder lock body, and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body extends from the rear surface of the lock mounting board 1011. At the same time, the engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019. The engaging cam 1016 is formed in a boomeran shape, and one end side is a first engaging projecting piece 1017 that engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame when rotating. It is a second engaging projecting piece 1018 that engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when the end side rotates.

In this cylinder lock 1010, the cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 from the rear side, and then the attachment holes 1013 formed in the upper and lower two positions of the lock attachment substrate 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by screwing the screw 1012 into the mounting hole 1014 of the lock mounting piece 1008.

The fraud prevention member 1023, 1032 attached to the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000 illegally uses a piano wire, a wire, or the like to illegally use a sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. This is to prevent the lowering of the. As shown in FIG. 100, the fraud prevention member 1023 and 1032 have a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 has a vertically long plate shape and is swingably supported by the U-shaped substrate 1001 around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end. Specifically, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is the most together with the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 arranged inside the U-shaped base 1001 through the swing shaft hole 1025. It is attached by the lower insertion hole 1005 and the rivet 1006.

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is vertically elongated at a position overlapping the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the U-shaped base 1001 on the plate-like surface, and the second engagement projecting piece 1018 of the engagement cam 1016 can be inserted. It is provided with a protruding piece insertion hole 1026. The door frame sliding rod 1040 provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 by the second engaging protrusion 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 penetrating the protrusion insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020. The ascending engaging hole 1045 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 are engaged with each other. Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is obliquely inclined so as to be able to come into contact with the rear surface side of the first engaging projectile 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates on the outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 diagonally above the front surface. The inclined portion 1024 is provided, and the inclined portion 1024 comes into contact with the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 is centered on the swing shaft hole 1025. (The clockwise direction in FIG. 102 (B)).

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 further includes a stopper piece portion 1027 protruding toward the U-shaped base 1001 side from the diagonally rearward and lower outer side of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026, and a position where the stopper piece portion 1027 protrudes. It is provided with a regulating projecting piece 1031 projecting downward, and a pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 penetrating in the left-right direction and arranged vertically on the front side of the regulating projecting piece 1031. When the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked, the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is intruded into and engaged with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engagement notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame from sliding illegally. Further, the regulation projecting piece 1031 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 comes into contact with the second fraud prevention member 1032 urged upward by the spring 1035, so that the second fraud prevention member 1032 moves upward (in the urging direction). It is possible to regulate the movement.

Further, in the pin hole 1029 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, the guide pin 1028 is inserted and fixed from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023, and the guide pin 1028 fixed to the pin hole 1029 is inserted and fixed. By engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end of the insertion vertical opening 1020 in the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. Can be done. Further, the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is for rotatably connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 by the connecting pin 1034.

On the other hand, the second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "" -shaped plate material, and has a connecting hole 1033 at one upper end thereof and a spring locking hole 1036 at the other end. And each are bored, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end portion. The second fraud prevention member 1032 can be connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 so as to be relatively rotatable by inserting the connecting pin 1034 after aligning the connecting hole 1033 with the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023. You can do it. Further, the second fraud prevention member 1032 locks the lower end (the other end) of the spring 1035 whose upper end (one end) is locked to the spring locking piece 1021 of the U-shaped base 1001 in the spring locking hole 1036. As a result, it is urged upward by the spring 1035. Further, in the second fraud prevention member 1032, the contact portion 1037 comes into contact with the closing plate 25 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 in the lock device 1000 is slidably supported inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 and is formed of a vertically long metal plate-shaped member. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with door frame hook portions 1041 projecting forward at three locations above, middle, and lower on one side of the vertical side. The door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 projects forward from the open side of the U-shaped base 1001 with the door frame sliding rod 1040 housed in the U-shaped base 1001. When the locking device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600, the door protrudes forward from the door hook hole 620 (see FIGS. 68 and 73) formed in the main body frame base 600. It can be locked to the hook cover 165 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the frame 5. As shown in the figure, the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, whereby the door frame sliding rod 1040 is raised to raise the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover. The locked state with the 165 can be released.

Further, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces, and has a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted, and below the uppermost rivet slot 1042 and for the door frame. At the lowermost end of the sliding rod 1040, a guide projecting piece 1043 projecting in a direction perpendicular to the surface of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is provided. The rivet slot 1042 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is designed so that the rivet 1006 to be inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 is inserted, and the rivet 1006 is slid for the door frame. It is formed vertically so as not to interfere with the ascending operation of the rivet 1040. In the normal state, the rivet 1006 penetrating the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 is in contact with the upper end. Further, in the door frame sliding rod 1040, the guide projecting piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056, 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. It is possible to guide the mutual sliding operation of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed with a spring hook portion 1046 that locks one end of the spring 1048 at the upper end portion. The other end of the spring 1048 locked to the spring hook portion 1046 is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051 in the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and the spring 1048 slides the door frame. The rod 1040 is urged downward and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is urged to each other in the upward direction. Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 includes a contact elastic piece 1047 formed in a convex shape in the middle in the vertical direction, and is punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by press molding. It is formed in a convex shape. The contact elastic piece 1047 comes into contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped base 1001, and it is possible to prevent the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame from rattling inside the U-shaped base 1001. It has become like.

Further, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 on the side surface of the lower portion. The play hole 1044 is the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation of the engaging cam 1016 when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. The part constitutes a movable space. Further, in the ascending engagement hole 1045, when the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is raised by the rotating operation of the engaging cam 1016. Is for engaging with. The door frame sliding rod 1040 is provided with an escape notch 1049 which is notched in the vertical direction larger than the fraud prevention notch 1007 behind the lower part of the vertical side. In this escape cutout portion 1049, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is in the way so that the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is surely engaged with the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066. The relevant part is cut out so that it does not become.

On the other hand, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame includes an upper hook member 1051 made of a metal plate, a lower hook member 1052 made of a metal plate, and a connecting wire rod 1053 connecting the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052. It has. That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is not composed of one vertically elongated plate made of metal as in the conventional case, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. The plate material is formed by a press, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. As a result, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped substrate 1001.

The upper hook member 1051 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame includes a hook portion 1054 formed at the upper end portion toward the rear and a rivet elongated hole 1055 penetrating the plate surface portion adjacent to the hook portion 1054 in the left-right direction. , A projecting piece moving hole 1056 penetrating below the rivet slot 1055 in the left-right direction, a spring hook portion 1057 formed at the lower end of the vertical side in front of the projecting piece moving hole 1056, and a lower side of the spring hook portion 1057. It is provided with a connecting hole 1058 formed in the above hook member 1051 and a contact portion 1059 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the upper hook member 1051. The hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 24 provided on the inner upper portion of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward.

Further, the rivet slot 1055 of the upper hook member 1051 is arranged at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and is arranged in the rivet slot 1055. In the normal state in which the rivet 1006 penetrates, the rivet 1006 penetrates the lowermost end portion of the elongated hole 1055 for rivet, and the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. A guide projecting piece 1043 above the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the projecting piece moving hole 1056 of the upper hook member 1051, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the 1050.

Further, the other end of the spring 1048 is locked in the spring hook portion 1057 of the upper hook member 1051. Further, the connecting hole 1058 of the upper hook member 1051 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, the contact portion 1059 of the upper hook member 1051 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and in the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051. There is no rattling and it can slide smoothly.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is for a rivet that penetrates in the left-right direction near the upper end of the plate surface portion of the lower hook member 1052 and the hook portion 1065 that protrudes rearward from the lower end portion. An elongated hole 1061, a descending engaging hole 1062 arranged below the elongated rivet hole 1061, a play hole 1063 extending downward from the lower rear side of the descending engaging hole 1062, and a play hole 1063 below. A projecting piece moving hole 1064 formed near the lower end, a connecting hole 1060 formed on the front end side of the upper end of the vertical side of the lower hook member 1052, and a engagement formed on the lower part of the vertical side behind the lower hook member 1052. The joint notch portion 1066 and the contact portion 1067 formed on the upper side and the lower side of the lower hook member 1052 are provided.

The hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 penetrates the lower hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 and engages with the closing plate 25 formed in the lower part of the outer frame 2 on the open side. The locking claws are formed upward. Further, the rivet slot 1061 of the lower hook member 1052 is formed at a position corresponding to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the rivet slot 1061 is formed in the rivet slot 1061. In the normal state in which the 1006 is penetrated, the rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1061. As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward.

Further, when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted into the lower hook member 1052 and rotates, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered by the rotating operation. It is for engaging in such a way. Further, the play hole 1063 of the lower hook member 1052 is a second engaging projecting piece 1018 so as not to interfere with the rotating operation when the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated. It is possible to form a movable space at the tip of the. Further, in the projecting piece moving hole 1064 of the lower hook member 1052, the guide projecting piece 1043 below the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod for the main body frame are inserted. It is possible to guide the mutual movement with the moving rod 1050.

Further, a bent lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053 is inserted into the connecting hole 1060 of the lower hook member 1052. Further, the contact portion 1067 of the lower hook member 1052 abuts on the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 when it is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, and is lower than the U-shaped base 1001. When the hook member 1052 slides, it can be slid smoothly without rattling.

Next, the assembly of the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment will be described. In order to assemble this locking device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053, and in that state, the guide protrusion of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is connected. The piece 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056, 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the mutual rivet slot 1042 and the rivet slot 1055, 1061 are aligned and overlapped with each other. In a superposed state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001 for the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the main body frame. After inserting the sliding rod 1050 into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

When inserting the rivet 1006, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet slot 1055, 1061 and 1042. When inserting the lowermost rivet 1006, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. Further, before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by the connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the pin hole. After fixing to 1029 with a screw (not shown), it is necessary to further insert the guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame stored and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is opened. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is hung on the spring locking piece 1021 and the spring locking hole 1036 to prevent the second fraud. It is assumed that the member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the tip of the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engaging protrusion of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip end portion of the piece 1018 is slightly inserted into the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

In order to attach the assembled lock device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 in this way, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is inserted into the door hook hole 620 formed in the main body frame base 600. While inserting, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding into a hook shape is inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621 of the main body frame base 600 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction is inserted. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame base 600 by matching the lock attachment portion 625 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a which does not contact the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, while the rear portion is fixed. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the structure is formed so as to project horizontally from the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the locking structure of the front portion is in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605. Compared with the case where the side surface 1001b is formed, the lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame base 600 so as not to cause rattling.

Next, the operation of the lock device 1000 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. As shown in FIG. 101, when the main body frame base 600 (main body frame 3) is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101 (A). In addition, the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are locked, and the hook portions 1041 for the door frame and the door frame 5 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame are engaged. The hook cover 165 is locked. In this state, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging projection piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 101 (B). The tip of the first engaging projection piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, pushes the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048, and connects to the lower hook member 1052. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 are also pushed down and lowered. As a result, the locked state between the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is released, and the main body frame 3 is removed by pulling the main body frame 3 toward the front side. It can be opened to the frame 2.

When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a raised state due to the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as shown in FIG. 101 (A)), but the hook portion 1054 Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1050 and 1065 is formed on the closing plates 24 and 25. Since it comes into contact with the lower end, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame descends downward, and the upward claws of the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 are locked again and slide for the main body frame. The 杆 1050 rises and returns to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. (Ii) The tip of the engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the ascending engaging hole 1045 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up and ascending the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame against the urging force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 165 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state, so that the door frame 5 can be pulled by pulling the door frame 5 toward the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is lowered by the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as shown in FIG. 101 (A)), but the door frame is closed. Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for door frame is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower side inclined portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame is inclined to the hook cover 165. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame rises upward in contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 165 are locked again to slide the door frame. The moving door 1040 descends and returns to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the total length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, it is possible to securely lock the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 in the total length in the vertical direction, and forcibly open the space between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and insert an illegal tool such as a piano wire between them. It is not possible to perform an act.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the door frame 5 of the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and moves in the other direction. By rotating, the lock of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. Further, the lock device 1000 of this example performs a fraudulent act such as hooking a piano wire or the like on the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and lowering the hook portion 1054, 1065 without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. Can not be done. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped substrate 1001. The structure is such that the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. 102. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 102 (A), the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other. It is in a state of being. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 rotates counterclockwise due to the urging force of the spring 1035, the stopper piece 1027 penetrates into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with the engaging notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame at the position corresponding to 1007. As a result, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and an attempt is made to pull it down, the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engaging notch portion 1066 are engaged, so that the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is used. It is impossible to illegally pull it down (unlock), and it is not possible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to normally unlock the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is performed by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 is rotated, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a swing shaft hole. The rotation starts in the clockwise rotation direction shown around 1025, and the stopper piece portion 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch portion 1007. As a result, the engagement between the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engaging cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engaging projecting piece 1017, the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing plates 24 and 25 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. You can do it.

When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1023 are in contact with each other. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. 102 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing plate 25 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 102 (A) is obtained. As a result, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. Further, in the present embodiment, it is the main body that prevents the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 from illegally performing only the lowering operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is illegally opened, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised so that unauthorized operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame cannot be performed.

Further, even with the lock mechanism having the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600), it is inside. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided in the above are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively, and are completely covered. Since it is in a state, even if a piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001, both side surfaces 1001a, 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 This prevents fraudulent equipment from entering the closed space, making it impossible to easily commit fraudulent activities.

As described above, the lock device 1000 of the present embodiment has the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the lock device whose width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is provided so as to be slidable, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the lock device 1000 on the U-shaped base 1001 is set to a position below the lower end side of the game board 4. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the left-right direction and the vertical direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 605 of the main body frame 3 is made large, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. Can be installed.

Further, since the U-shaped open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, the locking device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) inside. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame arranged in the above are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively. It is not possible to easily perform fraudulent acts such as pulling down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like.

Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the door hook hole 620 and the lock locking hole 621. The structure is such that the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the closed side (rear portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are fixed to the lock attachment portion 625 with screws, which is extremely simple. The locking device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 (main body frame base 600) with such a structure.

In the lock device 1000 of this example, the screw fixing portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and the vicinity of the upper portion of the cylinder lock through hole 611 of the main body frame 3 as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. The structure is shown in which the formed lock mounting portion 625 is screwed together. Instead, the screw 1012 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008 is used, and the tip of the screw 1012 is locked. A lock mounting hole that penetrates the piece 1008 and is screwed may be formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 611. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the lock device 1000 can be attached to the main body frame 3 (main body frame) simply by fixing the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock attachment portion 625 at the rear portion of the lock device 1000. It can be sufficiently firmly fixed to the back surface of the base 600).

Further, in the lock device 1000 of this example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. For example, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are slidably attached to the side surface 1001a on the opposite side not in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b in contact with the peripheral wall portion 605 is omitted. An L-shaped substrate (lock substrate) is used, and a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and a sliding rod 1050 for a main body frame are placed in a closed space formed by a side surface 1001a of the L-shaped substrate (lock substrate) and a peripheral wall portion 605. It may have a structure for storing, and can exhibit the same function and effect as the lock device 1000 described above.

As described above, according to the main body frame 3 of this example, the transparent prize ball base 710 having the peripheral wall portion 710a extending rearward (front-back direction) behind the main body frame base 600 and the upper side of the prize ball base 710. The prize ball tank 720 for storing the game balls supplied from the island facility side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the rear wall of the prize ball base 710 for aligning the game balls discharged from the prize ball tank 720. The transparent tank rail unit 730 attached to the rear side of the 710b and the game ball released from the tank rail unit 730 are paid out to the upper plate 301 of the door frame 5 based on a predetermined payout instruction, and the rear wall of the prize ball base 710. It has a partially transparent prize ball device 740 attached to the rear side of the 710b and a side portion 904 extending to the rear end of the main body frame base 600, and the rear surface is abbreviated as the rear surface of the tank rail unit 730 and the prize ball device 740. Since it is provided with a transparent back cover 900 arranged on the same surface, the rear side of the game board 4 held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame base 600 through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc. With the pachinko machine 1 that can visually recognize the rear side surface and can easily inspect (visually inspect) the rear side of the game board 4 without opening the back cover 900 that covers the rear side of the game board 4. can do.

Further, since not only the rear side (rear surface) of the game board 4 but also the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the game board holding port of the main body frame base 600 can be visually recognized. When the game board 4 is attached to or detached from the front side to 601 even if tools such as screwdrivers and pliers, cleaning waste, dust, dust, etc. remain between the game board 4 and the back cover 900, they are left outside. It can be easily found from, and it is possible to prevent some trouble from occurring due to the residue.

Further, as described above, since the rear surface and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the outside, an illegal device, a tool, or the like for performing an illegal act is attached to the rear side or the side surface of the game board 4. Even if it is, it can be easily found, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts, and it is possible to easily find a fraudulent device or the like attached to the game board 4 from the outside. It is possible to hesitate to install an illegal device or the like, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent against fraudulent acts.

Further, since the rear side of the game board 4 is covered with the prize ball base 710 and the back cover 900, other members in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed may come into contact with the game board 4 or the game board 4 It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as dust and dirt from adhering to the rear side, and it is possible to maintain the game board 4 in a good state and prevent problems from occurring.

Further, the rear surface of the prize ball tank 720 is set to be approximately twice as deep as the front end of the main body frame base 600 with respect to the depth D of the main body frame base 600, that is, the depth D of the main body frame base 600. Is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, so that the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be more easily seen through the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., and the above-mentioned effects can be surely achieved. be able to. Further, since the depth D of the main body frame base 600 is about half the depth of the main body frame 3, the height when the main body frame base 600 is turned down can be made as low as possible to form a flat shape. It is possible to facilitate the attachment work of attaching the prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. to the rear side of the main body frame base 600.

Further, the rear surface (main body portion 902) of the transparent back cover 900 is substantially flush with the rear surfaces of the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail unit 730, the prize ball device 740, etc. attached to the prize ball base 710. Therefore, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 can be made a substantially flat surface, and by eliminating the protrusions to the rear, it can be caught or contacted with other members in the island equipment to be installed. It can be prevented to prevent problems from occurring. Further, since the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is substantially flat, it is possible to use a cushioning material having a simple shape when transporting the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to increase the accumulation efficiency (storage efficiency) of the pachinko machine. The cost related to the machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, since the back cover 900 is provided with a plurality of slits 916 and through holes 918, the rear side and the rear side surface of the game board 4 can be directly visually recognized through the slits 916 and the like. The rear side of 4 and the like can be made easier to see, and the above-mentioned action and effect can be surely achieved. Further, even if the rear side of the game board 4 held by the main body frame base 600 is covered with the back cover 900, the heat from the game board 4 can be released to the outside through the slit 916 or the like of the back cover 900. , It is possible to prevent heat from being accumulated from the game board 4, and it is possible to prevent problems such as unstable control of the game due to heat and deformation of members such as synthetic resin. be able to. Further, since the slit 916 and the through hole 918 of the back cover 900 have a size that the game ball cannot pass through, for example, even if the game ball spills on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility, the slit 916 or the like is passed through. It is possible to prevent the game ball from invading the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to the invasion of the game ball.

[Basic Configuration of Game Board] Next, the basic configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 112. FIG. 103 is a front view showing a game board attached to the main body frame with the door frame of the pachinko machine removed. Further, FIG. 104 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 107 (A) is an enlarged front view showing the function display unit in the game board in a state of being attached to the pachinko machine, and FIG. 107 (B) is a front view showing another form of the function display unit.

Further, FIG. 108 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a game panel of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 105 and the like, and is viewed from the front. FIG. 109 is a game in which FIG. 108 is viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a board. Further, FIG. 110 is a cross-sectional view of the game panel of the game board of FIG. 108 cut in the vertical direction. Further, FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective view of a game board using a front component of an embodiment different from the example of FIG. 108 and the like by disassembling and viewed from the front, and FIG. 112 is a game board seen from the rear of FIG. 111. It is an exploded perspective view of.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a front configuration in which the outer periphery of the game area 1100 in which the game ball is driven by the player operating the handle device 500 is divided and the outer shape is substantially rectangular in the front. A member 1110, a plate-shaped game panel 1200 arranged behind the front component 1110 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100, a board holder 1160 arranged at the lower rear side of the game panel 1200, and a board holder 1160. A predetermined main control board box 1170 that houses the main control board 4100 that is attached to the rear surface and controls the game content that is performed by driving the game ball into the game area 1100, and a predetermined control signal from the main control board 4100. It is provided with a function display unit 1180 that can display the game status and is visually attached to the player side at a predetermined position of the front component 1110. The game board 4 is further described with a front unit mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1200 and a back unit 3000 mounted on the rear surface of the game panel 1200, although not shown in FIGS. 103 to 110 and the details will be described later. (See FIGS. 114, 117, etc.).

The game board 4 of the present embodiment has a basic configuration formed by a front component 1110, a game panel 1200, a board holder 1160, a main control board box 1170, and a function display unit 1180, and is attached to the game panel 1200. The front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 1170 form a detailed configuration that characterizes the pachinko machine 1 (game board 4). Here, the basic configuration of the game board 4 will be described, and the detailed configuration will be described later.

[Front component] Next, the front component 1110 in the game board 4 will be described. The front component 1110 in the game board 4 of this example has a substantially rectangular shape that can be inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, and the inner shape penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer circumference of the game area 1100 is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1111 includes an outer rail 1111 extending in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending diagonally to the upper right. The inner rail 1112, which is arranged inside the outer rail 1111 substantially along the outer rail 1111 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the inner rail 1112 so as to be smoothly continuous from the lower end of the inner rail 1112. The inner peripheral rail 1113 extending in an arc shape to a position below the end (upper end) of the outer rail 1111 along the circumferential direction counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the end (upper end) and outer rail 1111 of the inner peripheral rail 1113. At the boundary between the abutting portion 1114, which is connected to the end (upper end) of the inner rail 1111 and the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 can come into contact with the game ball, and the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113, the game area 1100 From the upper end of the inner rail 1112 so as to close between the out port guide surface 1115 arranged at the lowermost end and lowered toward the rear and the outer rail 1111 rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1112. It can rotate only between the closed position that extends upward and the open position that opens between the outer rail 1111 by rotating in the clockwise direction in the front view, and returns to the closed position side. A backflow prevention member 1116, which is urged by a spring (not shown), is provided.

Assuming that the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 of the front component 1110, as shown in FIG. 103 and the like, the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 fires the ball of the main body frame 3. It is located on the extension of the launch rail 660 in the device 650. A space extending in the left-right direction and downward is formed between the lower end of the outer rail 1111 and the upper end of the launch rail 660, and the game ball launched along the launch rail 660 of the ball launcher 650 is formed. The space is jumped over, and the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 is driven into the space between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. The game ball driven between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 rolls upward along the outer rail 1111 according to the momentum, and the backflow prevention member 1116 pivotally supported at the upper end of the inner rail 1112. By rotating to the open position side against the urging force, it is possible to enter the game area 1100.

Further, when the game ball is strongly hit by the hit ball launching device 650, the game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1111 in the game area 1100 comes into contact with the abutment portion 1114 provided at the end of the outer rail 1111. When the game ball comes into contact with the abutting portion 1114, the rolling direction of the game ball can be forcibly changed, and the game ball continuously rolls from the outer rail 1111 to the inner rail 1113. It is designed to prevent it from moving. Even if the game ball that has entered (dried) into the game area 1100 tries to return between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112, the backflow prevention member 1116 returns to the closed position by the urging force before that. As a result, the backflow prevention member 1116 prevents the backflow of the game ball.

Further, if the game ball driven into the game area 1100 is not accepted by the start ports 2101, 1022 or the winning ports 2103, 2104, 2201 of the table unit 2000 described later, it flows down to the lower end of the game area 1100. Then, the out port guiding surface 1115 at the boundary between the inner rail 1112 and the inner peripheral rail 1113 guides the game panel 1200 to the out port 1151 and discharges the game board 4 downward from the out port 1151. ing.

On the other hand, if the game ball launched from the ball striking device 650 cannot enter the game area 1100 beyond the backflow prevention member 1116 at the tip of the inner rail 1112, the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112 are combined. Rolling downward in the opposite direction, the foul space 626 formed between the upper end of the launch rail 660 and the lower end of the outer rail 1111 is formed from the lower end opening between the outer rail 1111 and the inner rail 1112. It will fall, and will be received by the foul ball entrance 542e of the foul cover unit 540 in the door frame 5 located at the lower part of the foul space 626, and will be discharged to the lower plate 302 of the plate unit 300.

A metal plate is attached to the surface of the outer rail 1111 of the front component 1110 to improve the wear resistance due to the rolling of the game ball, and the game ball rolls smoothly. ing. Further, the abutting portion 1114 has an elastic body such as rubber or synthetic resin arranged on the surface thereof, and even if the game ball rolls vigorously along the outer rail 1111 and collides with the abutment portion 1114, the impact is alleviated. At the same time, the game ball can be repelled inward.

Further, the front component 1110 has a wall-shaped security protrusion 1117 protruding from the lower outer side of the outer rail 1111 toward the front, and a substantially center in the vertical direction from the lower side of the out port guide surface 1115 along the inner peripheral rail 1113. It is provided with a groove-shaped rail security groove 1118 that is recessed by a predetermined amount from the front end of the extension. The security protrusion 1117 in the front component 1110 overlaps the security rear end projecting piece 183 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 in the vertical direction when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. As a result, even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is intruded between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 on the shaft support side (left side in front view), the illegal tool can reach the game area 1100. Can not be done.

Further, in the front component 1110 of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the security rear projection piece 182 of the security cover 180 in the door frame 5 is inserted into the rail security groove 1118. The post-crime prevention projectile 182 is inserted between the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111 so as to be substantially in contact with the outer surface (opposite side of the game area 1100) of the inner rail 1112. Even with the inner rail 1112, the rail security groove 1118, and the security rear projection piece 182, illegal tools such as piano wires that have entered between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 reach the game area 1100. Can be prevented.

Further, the front component 1110 is vertically separated from the left end of the front view and is vertically separated from the pair of positioning recesses 1119 which are recessed from the front to the rear and opened to the left end. A pair of game board stoppers 1120 arranged in the same direction, a fixed recess 1121 arranged on the left side of the outer rail 1111 on the left side of the front view and opened downward, and the upper side formed in an arc shape and recessed from the front side. A notch 1122 for a ball passage, which is notched in a rectangular shape extending upward from the lower end in the left-right direction, is provided near the left end of the lower end. The positioning recess 1119 of the front component 1110 is fitted with the positioning member 956 attached to the inside of the side security plate 950 in the main body frame 3, so that the left end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 is viewed from the front. However, it is possible to regulate the movement in the front-back direction. Further, the game board stopper 1120 can be detachably locked to the game board locking portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 in the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 1120 can be locked to the game board. By locking to the locking portion 608, it is possible to restrict the right end of the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3 from moving in the front-rear direction. ..

Further, the fixing recess 1121 of the front component 1110 is a front view of the game board fixing tool 690 axially supported on the front surface of the main body frame 3 with the game board 4 inserted into the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. When rotated in the clockwise direction, the fixing piece 690a of the game board fixture 690 is inserted, and the game board fixture 690 restricts the lower end of the game board 4 from moving forward. It has become like. Further, in the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component member 1110, a similar ball passage notch 1152 is formed at the same position of the game panel 1200, and the game board 4 is used as the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3. In the state of being inserted into, the front end of the full tank branch unit 770 is inserted into the notch portion 1122, 1152 for the ball passage.

Further, the front component 1110 has a horizontally long through hole 1123 penetrating in the front-rear direction near the right end in the front view at the lower end portion, and a thickness in the front-rear direction at a position on the lower side of the through hole 1123 from the center in the left-right direction to the left side in the front view. It is provided with a fastening portion 1124 formed thinly, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1125 arranged on the left side of the through hole 1123 in the front view and for attaching a certificate stamp for confirming certification. Although detailed illustration of the fastening portion 1124 in the front component 1110 is omitted, when the game board is attached to the conventional main body frame, a predetermined fastening band is formed in the fastening hole formed in the conventional main body frame. By wrapping and fastening the game board 4 around each other, it is possible to make it difficult to remove the game board 4, and it is possible to prevent the game board 4 from being illegally removed.

Further, in the front component 1110, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180, which will be described later, is arranged on the outside of the rail security groove 1118 along the inner peripheral rail 1113 and at the lower right of the front view. Further, the front component 1110 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1126 projecting rearward from the left and right ends of the lower portion of the rear surface, and a plurality of positioning projections 1127 projecting rearward from the rear surface of the inner rail 1112. The mounting boss 1126 penetrates the game panel 1200 and engages with the fixed boss 1162 of the board holder 1160, and a predetermined screw is screwed into the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the fixed boss 1162. By wearing it, the game panel 1200 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the board holder 1160. Further, the positioning protrusion 1127 is fitted into the inner rail fixing hole 1155 formed in the game panel 1200, so that the inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position of the game panel 1200.

[Game Panel] Next, the game panel 1200 on the game board 4 will be described. The game panel 1200 of this example is formed of a wood board material such as veneer plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm), and has an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component 1110. The game panel 1200 has an out port 1151 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guidance surface 1115 in the front component 1110 at the lower part in the substantially center in the left-right direction in the front view, and is horizontally elongated in the front-rear direction on the left side in the front view at the lower end. The ball passage notch 1152, which has the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110, and the rear protrusion of the function display unit 1180, which penetrates the lower right corner of the front view in the front-rear direction. It includes an insertion hole 1153 into which 1182 is inserted.

Further, in the game panel 1200, a plurality of boss insertion holes 1154 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the mounting bosses 1126 of the front component member 1110 and positioning protrusions 1127 of the front component member 1110 are inserted and fixed in the vicinity of the lower left and right ends. A plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1155 and a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1156 having a predetermined amount recessed from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1151 and the lower end side being opened downward (see FIG. 106). And 1157, which is formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the front component member 1110 and is notched so as to penetrate from the right end of the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the game panel 1200 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

The game panel 1200 in the game board 4 of this example can partition the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer circumference is divided by the front component 1110, and is within the range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the table unit 2000 is attached. Further, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200. Further, the game panel 1200 is formed so that the out port 1151 is located at the lowermost end of the game area 1100, and is formed at the lowermost end of the game area 1100 in the front component 1110 when assembled on the game board 4. The game ball guided backward by the out-port guide surface 1115 enters the out-port 1151 and is discharged to the rear side of the game board 4.

[Board Holder] Next, the board holder 1160 in the game board 4 will be described. The substrate holder 1160 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open. In the substrate holder 1160, an out-ball discharge portion 1161 formed so as to penetrate in the vertical direction is formed at the front end of the bottom wall portion at substantially the center in the left-right direction of the front view, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is an out-ball. The game balls are formed so as to be lowered toward the discharge portion 1161, and the game balls discharged from the out port 1151 of the game panel 1200, the front unit and the back unit, and supplied (discharged) to the upper surface of the bottom of the board holder 1160. It is designed to be discharged downward from the out ball discharge unit 1161. The out-ball ejection unit 1161 is located directly above the ejection ball receiving portion 841 of the board unit 800 in the main body frame 3 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. All the game balls discharged from the pachinko machine 1 are discharged downward to the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 through the discharge passage 842 of the substrate unit 800.

Further, the substrate holder 1160 includes a plurality of fixed bosses 1162 protruding forward from the front ends at both the upper and lower ends of the side wall portion. The tips of the plurality of fixed bosses 1162 are inserted into the boss insertion holes 1154 from the rear side of the game panel 1200, and then are fitted to the rear ends of the mounting boss 1126 of the front component 1110. In the state of being fitted with the boss 1126, the board holder 1160 is screwed to the mounting boss 1126 from the rear side of the board holder 1160 through the inside of the fixed boss 1162 to attach the board holder 1160 to the front component 1110. In addition to being able to be assembled, the game panel 1200 can be sandwiched between the front component 1110 and the board holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 106, the substrate holder 1160 has a fixing portion 1163 and a fixing portion into which the fixing piece 1174 of the main control board box 1170 can be fitted from the side to the left end portion of the rear surface of the rear wall portion when viewed from the rear. The elastic fixing piece 1175 of the main control board box 1170, which is arranged so as to face the 1163, is provided with a locking portion 1164 which can be locked from the rear. The fixing portion 1163 and the locking portion 1164 of the board holder 1160 allow the main control board box 1170 to be detachably supported on the rear surface of the board holder 1160.

[Main Control Board Box] Next, the main control board box 1170 in the game board 4 will be described. The main control board box 1170 has a thin horizontally long box-shaped board base 1171 with an open rear side and a thin horizontally long box-shaped board base 1171 that covers the rear surface of the board base 1171 and has an open front side, and is fitted into the inside of the board base 1171 from the rear side. A matching board cover 1172 and a main control board 4100 in which electronic components, terminals, and the like are mounted on the rear side of the front end of the board cover 1172 are provided. Further, the main control board box 1170 extends outward from the left end portion of the substrate base 1171 when viewed from the rear, and from the fixing piece 1174 which fits with the fixing portion 1163 of the substrate holder 1160 and the right end of the rear view of the substrate cover 1172. It includes an elastic fixing piece that protrudes rearward and is elastically locked to the locking portion 1164 of the substrate holder 1160.

Further, as shown in FIG. 106, the main control board box 1170 is arranged at the right end of the rear view, two at the top and two at the bottom with the elastic fixing piece 1175 sandwiched between them, and seals the opening and closing of the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172. A possible sealing portion 1176, a sealing seal (not shown) that is affixed across the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172 at the lower ends of the substrate base 1171 and the substrate cover 1172, and a transparent seal that covers the surface of the sealing seal. It includes a protective cover 1177 and a board management sticker 1178 attached to the rear surface of the board cover 1172. The sealing portion 1176 of the main control board box 1170 has the same configuration as the separation and cutting portion 863 of the payout control board box 860 in the board unit 800, and is fixed by caulking in any one of the four sealing portions 1176. Has been done. In this main control board box 1170, in order to separate the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, it is necessary to cut the sealing portion 1176 fixed by caulking so that a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1170 remains. It has become. As a result, it is possible to clearly visually determine from the outside whether or not the main control board box 1170 has been opened illegally.

Since four sealing portions 1176 of the main control board box 1170 are provided in this example, the main control board box 1170 can be opened and closed up to three times. Further, the main control board box 1170 of this example has a sealing seal affixed across the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172, and the sealing seal is cut when the board base 1171 and the board cover 1172 are separated. It needs to be peeled off, and even with this sealed seal, traces of opening and closing remain. Therefore, the main control board box 1170 is illegally opened and closed, and the internal main control board 4100 is illegally modified or replaced with an illegal main control board (or a ROM that stores a game content program or the like). However, it can be visually confirmed from the outside, and it is possible to prevent such fraudulent activities from being carried out.

Further, in the main control board box 1170, an opening penetrating the board cover 1172 in the front-rear direction is formed at an appropriate position, and the RAM clear switch 4100c and the main control input circuit 4100f attached to the main control board 4100 through the opening are formed. , Various connection terminals for connecting to the peripheral control board 4010, the payout control board 4110, etc. face to the rear side. By connecting a predetermined measuring device to the main control input circuit 4100f facing from the rear surface of the main control board box 1170, the main control board 4100 can be checked from the outside without opening the main control board box 1170. Even if the above-mentioned sealing portion 1176 and the sealing seal are cleverly worked, it is possible to confirm the presence or absence of unauthorized modification of the main control board 4100 other than visually, and the pachinko machine 1 having high security performance. You can do it.

[Function Display Unit] Next, the function display unit 1180 in the game board 4 will be described. The function display unit 1180 is mounted and arranged at a predetermined position of the front constituent member 1110, and the display unit 1181 and the front constituent member 1110 which are arranged so as to be visible from the player side in front of the front constituent member 1110. It is provided with a rear protruding portion 1182 that protrudes rearward from the rear surface.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 107 (A), the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 of this example displays a game state changed by a game ball driven into the game area 1100 at the left end of the front view. The game status indicator 1183, which consists of one LED, and the game status indicator 1183, which consists of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side, displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2101. The lottery result of the first special symbol 1184 and the first special symbol drawn on the right side of the first special symbol storage indicator 1184 by accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2101 (first) The first special symbol display 1185 composed of one 7-segment LED for displaying the special lottery result) as the first special symbol, and the first special symbol display 1185 arranged diagonally to the right and to the second starting port 2102. The second special symbol display 1186 consisting of one 7-segment LED for displaying the lottery result (second special lottery result) of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball of the game ball as the second special symbol, and the first (Ii) It consists of two LEDs arranged in the vertical direction on the right side of the special symbol display 1186, and is equipped with a second special symbol storage display 1187 for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of game balls to the second starting port 2102. ing.

Further, the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 is arranged in an arc shape substantially along the inner peripheral rail 1113 from directly above the second special symbol display 1186, and holds the number of reservations related to the passage of the gate unit 2301 by the game ball. The normal symbol memory display 1188 consisting of four LEDs for display and the normal symbol lottery result arranged under the normal symbol storage display and drawn by passing the game ball through the gate portion 2301 are displayed as normal symbols. The normal symbol display 1189 consisting of one LED and the normal symbol storage display 1188 are arranged side by side on the diagonally upper right side, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit (condition device operates). It is equipped with a round display 1190 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening 2103 at the time of "hit)".

The game status display 1183 in the function display unit 1180 of this example is a color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and the emission color of the emission and the lighting / blinking of the emission color. Depending on the combination, various game states (for example, probability fluctuation state, time reduction state, probability variation time reduction state, jackpot game state, etc.) can be displayed.

Further, when the first special symbol storage display 1184 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the first special symbol in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 1185, the game ball is accepted into the first starting port 2101. In this case, the number of holds (stored number) of the first special symbol whose start of variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The first special symbol storage display 1184 has a first special symbol storage lamp 1184a composed of a predetermined LED and a first special symbol storage lamp 1184b, and the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are lit. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holds is one, the first special symbol storage lamp 1184a is turned on and the first special symbol storage lamp 1184b is turned off, and when the number of holds is two, the first special symbol storage lamps 1184a and 1184b are turned on. 1184a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 1184b lights up when the number of holds is three, and the first special symbol memory lamps 1184a and 1184b both light up when the number of holds is four. It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, when the second special symbol storage display 1187 in the function display unit 1180 cannot display the second special symbol in a variable manner on the second special symbol display 1186, the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2102. In this case, the number of holds (stored number) of the second special symbol whose start of variable display is held (stored) is displayed. The second special symbol storage display 1187 has a second special symbol storage lamp 1187a composed of a predetermined LED and a second special symbol storage lamp 1187b, and the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are lit. -The number of holds can be displayed by the blinking pattern. Specifically, for example, when the number of holds is one, the second special symbol storage lamp 1187a is turned on and the second special symbol storage lamp 1187b is turned off, and when the number of holds is two, the second special symbol storage lamps 1187a and 1187b are turned off. When the number of holds is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 1187a blinks and the second special symbol memory lamp 1187b lights up, and when the number of holds is four, the second special symbol memory lamps 1187a and 1187b are both lit. It is supposed to blink. In this example, up to four are reserved.

Further, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 in the function display unit 1180 are drawn by the first special lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102. The result and the second special lottery result are displayed, and the 7-segment LED stops after fluctuating for a predetermined time according to the special lottery result, and the first is based on the light emission pattern (special symbol) of the stopped 7-segment LED. The result of the special lottery and the result of the second special lottery can be recognized by the player.

Further, the ordinary symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is a color LED capable of changing the emission color of red, green, and orange, and is a combination of the emission color to emit light and lighting / blinking. As a result, it is possible to display the result of a normal lottery that is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301. As with the special symbol, the display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 1189 is also stopped and displayed in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result after the display is varied for a predetermined time.

Further, the normal symbol storage display 1188 in the function display unit 1180 suspends the start of the variable display when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 when the normal symbol cannot be variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 1189. It displays the number of reserved ordinary symbols (stored) (stored). This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 includes four ordinary symbol storage lamps 1188a to 1188d arranged side by side from the bottom, each of which is a predetermined LED, and the ordinary symbol storage lamp 1188a is arranged from the bottom according to the number of holdings. By turning on ~ 1188d in sequence, the number of reserved symbols can be displayed. In this example, up to four variable displays of normal symbols are reserved (stored).

Further, the round indicator 1190 in the function display unit 1180 includes round indicator lamps 1190a and 1190b composed of predetermined LEDs, and by lighting these indicator lamps, the number of rounds in the "big hit" game can be displayed. It has become like.

As shown in FIG. 107 (A), the function display unit 1180 of this example can be visually recognized from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 5 with the game board 4 attached to the pachinko machine 1. It has become. In addition, the game status display 1183, the first special symbol storage display 1184, the first special symbol display 1185, the second special symbol display 1186, the second special symbol storage display 1187, and the normal symbol storage of the function display unit 1180. The display 1188, the ordinary symbol display 1189, and the round display 1190 are mounted on the front surface of the function display board (not shown). Further, a connection terminal for connecting the function display board 1191 and the main control board 4100 is attached to the rear end of the rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180.

In this example, since the function display unit 1180 is provided in the front component 1110 of the game board 4, the function is compared with the case where the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the game panel 1200 are provided. The display unit 1180 can be diverted as the basic configuration of the game board 4, the configuration related to the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified to prevent the cost from increasing, and the model of the pachinko machine 1 (table unit 2000 or Even if the detailed configuration of the game board 4 embodied by the back unit 3000 and capable of characterizing the model of the pachinko machine 1) is different, the position of the display unit 1181 of the function display unit 1180 does not change, so that the player or the game The position of the display unit 1181 can be recognized by the clerk in the hall without any confusion.

Further, the function display unit 1180 of the pachinko machine 1 may have a form as shown in FIG. 107 (B). In this example, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 composed of 7-segment LEDs are each composed of eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol storage display 1184 and the second special symbol storage display 1187 are each composed of four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is composed of two LEDs.

In addition to being able to achieve the same effects as described above with this function display unit 1180, the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 are configured to consist of eight LED groups. Compared with the case of using the segment LED, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player. Therefore, since it is difficult to understand the content displayed by the function display unit 1180, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 1180 from becoming anxious and difficult to concentrate on the game during the game, and the movement of the game ball, It is possible to make the game more enjoyable by focusing on movable production and production images.

[Second Embodiment of the Game Panel] Next, a game panel 1200 having a form different from the game panel 1200 in the game board 4 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110. The front component 1110, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 108 to 110 have the same configuration as those described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here. The game panel 1200 of the present embodiment is thinner than the above-mentioned game panel 1200 and has a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose outer circumference is partitioned by the front component 1110. Also includes a panel plate 1210 having a small outer shape, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110.

The panel plate 1210 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than that of the game area 1100, and is made of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. It is formed. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1210 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1220 (game panel 1200), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail G is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said to be (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1210 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1210 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1211 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1212 arranged in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the lower left portion and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. It has. These fitting holes 1211 and elongated holes 1212 are arranged outside the game area 1100 and are positioned with the panel holder 1220. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 1213 having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side. The engaging step portion 1213 is formed so as to be cut out to approximately half the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and is arranged outside the game area 1100 like the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212. This is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1210 to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1214 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1112 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1127 projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 1112 to the inner rail fixing hole 1214. Further, the panel plate 1210 is provided with a plurality of openings 1215 penetrating in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 such as the center accessory 2500, and the attacker devices 2100, 2150, etc. are provided from the front side with respect to the openings 1215. The unit to be held is inserted and fixed.

On the other hand, the panel holder 1220 in the game panel 1200 has a size including the panel plate 1210 and has a substantially square outer shape, and has a thickness substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 1200 made of the above-mentioned wooden board (in this example, about It is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin) having a size of 20 mm). The panel holder 1220 has a holding step portion 1221 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and front and rear having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 1100 inside the holding step portion 1221. It is mainly provided with a through-hole 1222 that penetrates in the direction.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1210, and the front surface of the panel plate 1210 held in the holding step portion 1221 is the front surface of the panel holder 1220. It is designed to be almost on the same side as. Further, the holding step portion 1221 has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed on the front inner peripheral surface thereof with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1210. Due to this clearance, even if the panel plate 1210 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1211 and the elongated hole 1212 formed in the panel plate 1210 held by the holding step portion 1221, and is arranged from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221 toward the front. It is provided with a plurality of protruding pins 1223 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1223 into the fitting holes 1211 and the elongated holes 1212 of the panel plate 1210, the panel holder 1220 and the panel plate 1210 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with an engaging claw 1224 and an engaging piece 1225 that engage with the engaging step portion 1213 at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210. More specifically, the engaging claw 1224 is arranged on the upper holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is forward from the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. It protrudes toward the surface and is elastically engaged with the engaging step portion 1213. The engaging claw 1224 is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1220. On the other hand, the engaging piece 1225 is arranged in the lower holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 1213 in the panel plate 1210, and is connected to the front surface of the holding step portion 1221. In a state where the engaging step portion 1213 of the plate 1210 is formed with a predetermined gap having a size capable of being inserted, a predetermined amount extends toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 1220. By engaging the engaging step portion 1213 of the panel plate 1210 with the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225, the panel plate 1210 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1220.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a boss insertion hole 1226 that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the mounting boss 1126 provided in the front component member 1110 can be inserted, and the mounting boss of the front component member 1110 is provided in the boss insertion hole 1226. By inserting the 1126, the panel holder 1220 and the front component 1110 are positioned with each other.

As shown in FIG. 109, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side, which is recessed by a predetermined amount on the front side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. ing. Due to this mounting support portion 1227, the rear surface of the panel holder 1220 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface side protruding rearward, and the amount of the depression (the amount of the depression). The depth) is set to a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c (see FIG. 117) of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 that is mounted and fixed to the mounting support portion 1227. It is said that it is preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By mounting and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 1227, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 3010c from protruding to the rear side of the panel holder 1220, and the panel holder 1220, that is, the game board 4 can be attached to the main body frame 3. It can be securely installed and installed in the game board holding port 601 of the (pachinko machine 1).

Further, as shown in the panel holder 1220, a plurality of mounting holes 1228 arranged in the mounting support portion 1227 on the rear surface side and above the accommodating recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. ing. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 1229 arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 1228. The positioning hole 1229 is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 1228 (for example, a positioning protrusion protruding forward from a flange-shaped fixing portion 3010c on the front surface of the back box 3010 (not shown). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 1229 is a stop hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in the rear view.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 1228, a mounting hole having a large diameter and a small diameter are mixed, and the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. 1228 may be used.

Further, the panel holder 1220 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 1230 that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, so that the lightening portion 1230 reduces the weight of the panel holder 1220. It has become. As shown in FIG. 108, these lightening portions 1230 are not formed in the front side of the accommodating recess 630h, that is, in the predetermined range from the lower end of the front surface side of the panel holder 1220 to the predetermined height, and are within the predetermined range. Since the front surface of the panel holder 1220 is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the front component 1110 arranged on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the game ball launched from the ball striking device 650. However, it is guided smoothly. Further, in this panel holder 1220, as shown in the figure, the lightening portion 1230 is formed so that the mounting holes 1228 and the like are formed in a boss shape, and at the same time, they are supported and the strength of the panel holder 1220 is maintained. In order to do so, a box-shaped rib is formed.

The panel holder 1220 is formed with an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and a positioning unit 1231 corresponding to positioning means such as an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 1200 in the obstacle nail planting device. It can be set in the state where it is set. Further, in the lower part of the panel holder 1220, an out port 1232 that penetrates in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out-port guidance surface 1115 of the front component 1110, and a lower end that penetrates horizontally in the front-rear direction to the left side of the front view and downward. A ball passage notch 1233 having the same shape as the ball passage notch 1122 of the front component 1110 and a rear protrusion 1182 of the function display unit 1180 penetrating in the front-rear direction are inserted into the lower right corner of the front view. It includes an insertion hole 1234 and.

Further, the panel holder 1220 has a front configuration including a groove-shaped out ball discharge groove 1235 (see FIG. 109) in which a predetermined amount is recessed from the rear surface to the front on the rear surface side of the out port 1232 and the lower end side is opened downward. It is provided with a notch portion 1236 formed at a position corresponding to the game board stopper 1120 of the member 1110 and notched so as to penetrate from the right end in the front view in the front-rear direction. Further, the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes for mounting and fixing to the rear surface of the front component 1110 at appropriate positions.

When the game board 4 is inserted and held in the game board holding port 601 of the main body frame 3, the out ball discharge groove 1235 in the panel holder 1220 is inserted into the main body frame 3 (the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 606 in the main body frame base 600). It is designed to fit with the provided positioning protrusion 607, and when the out ball discharge groove 1235 fits with the positioning protrusion 607, the game board 4 moves relative to the main body frame 3 in the left-right direction. It is becoming regulated.

In the game panel 1200 of the present embodiment, the panel plate 1210 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 1221 of the panel holder 1220 from the front, and the engaging claw 1224 and the engaging piece 1225 are engaged with the engaging step portion 1213. By combining them, the panel plate 1210 can be held by the panel holder 1220, and the front side of the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the panel plate 1210 in the conventional obstacle nail planting device while holding it in the panel holder 1220 without modifying the installation device, and the cost for planting the obstacle nail G increases. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the game panel 1200 of this example, although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement within a range corresponding to the game area 1100 on the front surface of the panel plate 1210. At the same time, the table unit 2000 can be attached. Further, a back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1220. As a result, in the thin panel plate 1210, only the front unit is supported, so that it is possible to prevent the panel plate 1210 from being distorted by the load of the front unit.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into a panel plate 1210 and a panel holder 1220, even if the panel plate 1210 is used as a transparent plate, it is possible to suppress an increase in the weight of the entire game panel 1200, and the transparent panel. The pachinko machine 1 in which the rear side of the game area 1100 can be seen by the player through the plate 1210 can be embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 can be strongly attracted by the player.

Further, since the game panel 1200 is divided into the panel plate 1210 and the panel holder 1220, the panel plate 1210 whose position of the obstacle nail, the winning opening, etc. changes depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1 is used as a replacement part. , The panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part, and the pachinko machine 1 provided with the game board 4 compatible with various models can be obtained by simply exchanging only the panel plate 1210.

Further, since the panel holder 1220 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1228 in a predetermined arrangement in advance, mounting and fixing positions of various predetermined members such as the back unit 3000 which is mounted and fixed on the rear surface side of the panel holder 1220 depending on the model. By designing the fixing parts of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 1228, the panel holder 1220 can be used as a common part of the pachinko machine 1 regardless of the model, even if the positions are different. It has become.

[Second Embodiment of Front Component Member] Next, a front component member 1110A having a form different from that of the front component member 1110 in the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 111 and 112. In the game panel 1200, the board holder 1160, and the main control board box 1170 in FIGS. 111 and 113, the outer shape of the panel plate 1210 and the inner shape of the through hole 1222 of the panel holder 1220 are the embodiments of FIGS. 108 to 110. The configuration is the same as that of the examples of FIGS. 108 to 110 except for the above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

The front component 1110A shown in FIGS. 111 and 112 is different from the above front component 1110 in a part of the inner peripheral shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and does not include the function display unit 1180. The points are very different. The other configurations are the same as those of the pre-component 1110, and the same reference numerals are given, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the game board 4 using the front component 1110A, the function display unit 1180 is provided in either the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 (in this example, the front unit). It is prepared for 2000).

As shown in the figure, the front component member 1110A has a frame-shaped inner peripheral shape extending clockwise from the out port guide surface 1115 to the abutting portion 1114 of the inner rail 1112 and the outer rail 1111. The shape is formed to be the same as the above-mentioned front component member 1110, and the shape from the abutting portion 1114 to the out port guide surface 1115 in the clockwise direction is different from the above-mentioned front component member 1110. ing. Specifically, a gentle arc shape is formed from the abutting portion 1114 to directly above the certificate stamp affixing portion 1125 on the right side arranged directly under the abutting portion 1114, and the out port is formed from the lower end of the arc shape. The area up to the guide surface 1115 is formed in a straight line inclined so as to be lowered toward the out port guide surface 1115.

In the front component 1110A of this example, the game area 1100 can be secured wider than that of the above-mentioned front component 1110, and the wide game area 1100 can make the player more entertaining. You can do it.

[Security Structure of Pachinko Machine] Subsequently, the security structure of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 113 and 114. FIG. 113 is a partial cross-sectional view showing a security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine. Further, FIG. 114 is a perspective view seen from the rear side in a state where the game board is housed.

First, as shown in FIG. 113, the security structure on the shaft support side of the pachinko machine 1 of this example is the side surface of the main body frame base 600 formed of the synthetic resin in the main body frame 3 on the shaft support side (left side in front view). It is composed of a metal side security plate 950 attached to the door frame 5 and a metal reinforcing unit 150 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base main body 110 formed of synthetic resin in the door frame 5.

As described above, the side surface security plate 950 of the main body frame 3 is formed of an extruded mold material made of metal (for example, aluminum alloy), and the vertical dimension is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the main body frame base 600. In addition, the dimensions in the front-rear direction are larger than the dimensions in the front-rear direction in which the front component 1110 and the game panel 1200 in the game board 4 are combined. The side surface security plate 950 has a plate-shaped side surface piece 952a extending in the vertical direction and extending in the front-rear direction to form a side surface of the main body frame 3, and a front end extending substantially perpendicular to the inside (open side) from the front end of the side surface piece 952a. A middle piece 952c extending from the side piece 952a along the front end piece 952b and extending inward in a substantially perpendicular direction from the rear end of the side piece 952a so as to form a predetermined amount of gap between the piece 952b and the front end piece 952b. It is provided with a rear end piece 952d. As a result, the front end of the side security plate 950 has a substantially U-shaped cross section that is opened inward (open side) by the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c.

Further, the side security plate 950 (main body 952) has the strength and rigidity of the side security plate 950 due to the front end piece 952b, the middle piece 952c, and the rear end piece 952d arranged in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the side surface piece 952a. It has been increased so that the strength of the main body frame 3 as a whole can be increased so that the game board 4 and the door frame 5 can be supported satisfactorily.

On the other hand, as described above, the reinforcing unit 150 of the door frame 5 is formed by forming a plurality of long metal plates into a frame shape so as to surround the outer periphery of the game window 101 in the door frame 5 by spot welding, rivets, or the like. The outer side of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 on the shaft support side is provided with a shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 having a substantially U-shaped cross section opened to the outside (shaft support side). In the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 of the reinforcing unit 150, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 1 is provided by the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166.
The strength of 52 is further increased, and the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is less likely to bend.

By the way, in this example, since the door frame 5 is attached and supported only at two points above and below the upper shaft branch 156 and the lower shaft branch 158 with respect to the main body frame 3, the door frame 5 on the shaft support side When an illegal tool such as a screwdriver or a crowbar is inserted between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 3, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 152 is deformed and the gap between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 becomes large, and the gap is increased through the gap. There is a risk of cheating. On the other hand, in the security structure of this example, when the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, between the front end piece 952b and the middle piece 952c formed inside the front end of the side security plate 950. The rear piece of the shaft support side U-shaped protrusion 166 formed in a substantially U shape of the reinforcing unit 150 in the door frame 5 is inserted (invaded), and the front end piece 952b is used as the shaft support. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the side U-shaped projecting pieces 166. As a result, even if the door frame 5 is forcibly opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the shaft support side U-shaped projecting piece 166 of the door frame 5 comes into contact with the rear surface side of the front end piece 952b of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 Since it is possible to prevent the U-shaped projecting piece 166 on the shaft support side from moving away from the main body frame 3, it is possible to prevent the closed door frame 5 from being scooped out, and the main body frame can be prevented from being opened. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as opening the door frame 5 against 3.

Further, since the side security plate 950 formed of metal in the main body frame 3 and the reinforcing unit 150 formed of metal in the door frame 5 are fitted to each other, between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5. The strength and rigidity of the door frame are increased, and the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 can be made less likely to be distorted by an illegal tool, and the crime prevention performance can be improved.

Further, since the rear end of the side piece 952a on the side security plate 950 extends rearward from the game panel 1200 on the game board 4, the main body frame base 600 on the rear side of the rear end of the side piece 952a is assumed. Even if the side piece 952a is destroyed, an illegal tool such as a piano wire cannot be inserted into the game area 1100 on the front surface of the game board 4 (game panel 1200) from the rear end of the side piece 952a, and the illegal act is performed. Can be reliably prevented. As shown in FIG. 113, since the side frame plate 12 of the outer frame 2 is in contact with the side frame plate 12 so as to cover the outside of the side security plate 950, the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface, and the pachinko machine 1 has a robust side surface. It has become possible to fully counter the vandalism of. Further, in general, in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, the side surface of the pachinko machine 1 is inserted and fixed in the frame of the island facility for installing the pachinko machine 1, so that the player side. From the (front side), it is almost impossible for an unauthorized tool to enter the rear side of the middle piece 952c rather than the rear end, and the security performance of the pachinko machine 1 is further enhanced.

Subsequently, as a security structure from the rear side in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 114, the prize ball base 710, the tank rail 731, and the prize ball device 740 in the main body frame 3 accommodating the game board 4 Since the unit base 741, the full tank branch unit 770, and the back cover 900 are made of transparent synthetic resin, the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 housed in the main body frame 3 can be used as the game board 4. It can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 without removing it from the main body frame 3 or opening the back cover 900. As a result, even if an illegal device is attached to the rear side of the game board 4, it can be easily found and it is possible to prevent the illegal act from being performed. Further, since the illegal device or the like attached to the game board 4 can be easily found from the outside, it is possible to hesitate to attach the illegal device, and it is possible to enhance the deterrent against fraudulent acts. ing.

Further, since the rear side and the side surface side of the game board 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the main body frame 3 through the transparent prize ball base 710, the back cover 900, etc., the main body frame can be used for maintenance and model change. When the game board 4 is attached / detached to / from 3, even if tools such as screwdrivers and pliers, cleaning waste, dust, dust, etc. remain between the main body frame 3 and the game board 4, they are removed from the outside. It can be easily found from the above, it is possible to prevent some trouble from occurring due to them, and it is possible to improve the maintainability of the pachinko machine 1.

[Detailed Configuration of Game Board] Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 115 to 118. FIG. 115 is a front view of the game board in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed diagonally from the upper right front. Further, FIG. 117 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 118 is a perspective view of the game board disassembled for each of the main members constituting the game board (however, the center accessory 2500 is not shown). It is a seen perspective view.

The game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 1111 and an inner rail 1112, and a game ball (also simply referred to as a “ball”) as a game medium is generated by a player operating the handle device 500. It includes a frame-shaped front component 1110A for partitioning the inner circumference of the game area 1100 to be driven, and a plate-shaped game panel 1200.

The game panel 1200 of this example has a transparent panel plate 1210 having a plate shape capable of partitioning the rear end of the game area 1100 whose inner circumference is partitioned by the front component 1110A and having an outer shape smaller than that of the front component 1110A. A frame-shaped panel holder 1220 that holds the panel plate 1210 detachably from the front side and is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1110A is provided. The opening of the game panel 1200 is formed in a transparent panel plate 1210.

Further, the game board 4 has a front unit 2000 attached to the opening of the game panel 1200 from the front side, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220), and a front end left end of the back unit 3000. The function display unit 1180 is arranged so that it can be seen from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210 and can be seen from the game window 101 of the door frame 5 to the player side when it is attached to the pachinko machine 1. A liquid crystal display device 1900 having a rectangular display screen (display area) that is visibly attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000 and can display a predetermined effect image, and covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 from the rear side. As described above, the board holder 1160 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the game panel 1200 and the main control board box 1170 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1160 are provided.

The front unit 2000 in the game board 4 of this example has a first attacker device 2100 arranged directly above the out port 1151 at the lower part in the game area 1100, and an upper right side of the first attacker device 2100 (below the movable accessory 2600). The second attacker device 2150 arranged in), the gate unit 2300 arranged near the upper right side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game area 1100, and the frame-shaped center role arranged in the substantially central portion of the game area 1100. It is equipped with a thing 2500.

The first attacker device 2100 is composed of a first large winning opening 2103, a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing member 2106 when viewed from the front, a driving means for opening / closing the opening / closing member 2106, and the like. Normally, it is closed by the opening / closing member 2106 so that the game ball is not accepted by the first big winning opening 2103, and in the big hit game, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 causes the game to the first big winning opening 2103. The ball can be accepted.

The second attacker device 2150 is composed of a second large winning opening 2153, an opening / closing member 2156 capable of visually recognizing a plate-shaped thick portion when viewed from the front, and a driving means for driving the opening / closing member 2156 in the front-rear direction. Normally, the opening / closing member 2156 is closed so that the game ball cannot be accepted by the second major winning opening 2153. In the jackpot game, the opening / closing member 2156 opens and closes to open and close the second major winning opening 2153. The ball can be accepted.

In addition, when a big hit is made in the special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2101, the big hit game that enables the acceptance of the game ball to the first big winning opening 2103 is executed. Then, when a big hit is made in the special lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2102, the big hit game that enables the acceptance of the game ball to the second big winning opening 2153 is executed. Will be done.

Here, in the jackpot game (big hit game based on the result of the first special lottery) in which the first big winning opening 2103 of the first attacker device 2100 is opened, the game ball is launched in the form of flowing down the left side region. , In the big hit game (big hit game based on the result of the second special lottery) in which the second big winning opening 2153 of the second attacker device 2150 is opened, the game ball is launched by firing the game ball in the form of flowing down the right area. Will be done. However, in the jackpot game based on the result of the second special lottery, even if the game ball is launched in the form of flowing down the left side area, it is rarely won in the second big winning opening 2153, but it is based on the result of the first special lottery. In the jackpot game, when the game ball is launched in the form of flowing down the right side region, it is possible to win the first prize opening 2103.

Further, the back unit 3000 in the game board 4 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1200 (panel holder 1220) so that the front side is opened and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1900 faces the rear wall 3010a. The back box 3010 on which the 3010b is formed, the back front decoration unit 3100 arranged near the front end in the back box 3010, the back top effect unit 3200 arranged on the upper side of the opening 3010b in the back box 3010, and the back box. The lower right back effect unit 3400 arranged below the opening 3010b in the 3010, and the lower right back area arranged between the lower back area effect unit 3400 and the front back decoration unit 3100 in the lower right corner of the front view inside the back box 3010. It mainly has a production unit 3600. The back front decoration unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 is provided with a function display unit 1180 at a position that can be visually recognized from the player side through the transparent panel plate 1210.

Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4, a peripheral control board 4010 (see FIG. 119) having a peripheral control unit 4140 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150, which will be described in detail later, is housed. A box 1910 is provided.

The game board 4 of the present embodiment is defined as a wide area in which the game ball can sufficiently roll between the outer circumference on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and the outer circumference of the game area 1100 (inner circumference of the front component 1110A). A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the panel plate 1210 in the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100.

In the game board 4 of this example, when a game ball is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 (striking with a strength equal to or higher than a predetermined strength), the game ball is upstream of the aisle portion 1114 of the front component 1110A. From the side, it flows down the right passage 2545 of the center accessory 2500. Here, the right side passage 2545 has a width that allows game balls to flow down one by one, and the game balls that have flowed down the right side passage 2545 are arranged on the path of the right side passage 2545 while maintaining the flow speed. It is guided to the gate unit 2300. Above the gate unit 2300, four guide nails 2350 that guide the game ball flowing down the right passage 2545 to the gate unit 2300 are planted side by side in a square shape. The game ball flowing down the right passage 2545 is always guided by these four guide nails 2350, and with a probability close to 100% by these four guide nails 2350, the flow speed of the gate unit 2300 is almost maintained. It is guided to the gate portion 2301. That is, the game ball driven toward the right side region is always guided to the guide nail 2350 in a state where the flow speed is maintained without decreasing the flow speed, and is very rarely guided to the gate portion 2301 of the gate unit 2300. Although it may not be possible, most of them are guided to the gate portion 2301 in the high speed state (in the short game state, the second starting port 2102 is also won in the high speed state).

Below the gate unit 2300, a movable accessory 2600 that can advance to the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the result of the special lottery is arranged. On the right side of the movable accessory 2600, a rectifying passage 2610 is formed in which the game balls are rectified by flowing down the game balls one by one.

A protrusion is formed in the rectifying passage 2610 from the front surface of the game panel 1200 toward the player. The game ball flowing down the rectifying passage 2610 flows down in a state where the speed of the game ball flowing down the rectifying passage 2610 is maintained at a speed higher than a certain level as compared with the speed of flowing down the left side region, although the acceleration of the flowing down speed is suppressed by contacting the protrusion. However, since all the game balls flowing down the rectifying passage 2610 come into contact with the above-mentioned protrusions, the flowing speed of the game balls flowing down the rectifying passage 2610 is almost made uniform, and the game balls adjacent to each other in the flowing direction are brought into contact with each other. The intervals are almost equal.

For example, in a jackpot game in which the second big winning opening is opened and closed based on the result of the second special lottery, the game ball rarely wins in the second starting opening 2102 (the time saving function is not available during the big hit game). (Because it is activated), the game ball flowing down the right region is guided to the rectifying passage 2610. Then, the game ball flowing down the rectifying passage 2610 is guided to the second attacker device 2150 via the rectifying passage 2650 that inclines downward from right to left. A wall 2655 is erected in the rectifying passage 2650 so that the game ball does not fall on the player side. Although not shown, two rib-shaped protrusions (hereinafter referred to as "wall-side protrusions") extending in the vertical direction are formed inside the wall 2655 (on the rectifying passage 2650 side) at predetermined intervals. There is. Further, on the surface of the game panel 1200 facing the wall 2655, two columnar protrusions (hereinafter referred to as "panel side protrusions") extending in the vertical direction are formed at predetermined intervals. Here, the wall-side protrusion and the panel-side protrusion are provided one by one in the left-right direction. More specifically, in front view, there is the first wall-side projection on the far right, the first panel-side projection on the left, and the second wall-side projection on the left, and the leftmost. There is a second panel side protrusion on.

Therefore, the game ball flowing down the rectifying passage 2610 first comes into contact with the first wall-side protrusion. At this time, although the ball velocity of the game ball is once reduced, the game ball is accelerated again to the left in front view while avoiding the first wall-side protrusion, and the game ball moves. Then, the game ball then abuts on the first panel side protrusion. At this time, although the ball velocity of the game ball is once reduced, the game ball is accelerated again to the left side in the front view while avoiding the first panel side protrusion, and the game ball moves. Furthermore, although this game ball comes into contact with the second wall-side protrusion and the ball velocity decreases once, the game ball is accelerated again to the left in front view while avoiding the second wall-side protrusion, and the game ball Moving. Furthermore, although this game ball comes into contact with the second panel side protrusion and the ball velocity decreases once, the game ball is accelerated again to the left side in front view while avoiding the second panel side protrusion. Moves.

The second attacker device 2150 is arranged below the movable accessory 2600 (more specifically, the lower left side of the rectifying passage 2650), and the game ball that has passed through the rectifying passage 2610 is guided toward the second attacker device 2150. To.

By the way, since the game ball flowing down the rectifying passage 2610 alternately abuts on the wall side protrusion and the panel side protrusion, it moves in a zigzag shape in the front-rear direction when viewed from the player while repeatedly decelerating and accelerating the ball speed. While being guided to the second attacker device 2150. That is, the rectifying passage 2610 is located immediately before the second prize opening 2153, while allowing the game balls that flow down one after another toward the second attacker device 2150 to flow down the right side region at a relatively high ball speed. It can be said that the rectifying passage 2650 has a structure that reduces the ball speed of the game ball to a ball speed slower than that of the game ball flowing down the left side region. Moreover, although the ball speed of the game ball is reduced in the rectifying passage 2610, the ball speed of the game ball is accelerated again after contacting the second panel side protrusion formed on the leftmost side, so that a feeling of acceleration is felt. The game ball will win a prize in the second large winning opening 2153 while maintaining the above. Therefore, in the rectifying passage 2610, as shown in FIG. 116, the game balls are sequentially supplied to the second prize opening 2153 as a ball matrix in which the distances between the game balls are narrowed at substantially equal intervals. It will be possible to vigorously win the second prize opening 2153. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp that a large number of prize balls can be obtained only by checking such a ball procession waiting for a prize at the second large entrance 2153. Become.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the flow paths of the game balls when the game balls are launched toward the right side region can be summarized into three patterns. The first pattern is the pattern of the ball flow path in the super-speed mode in the time-saving game state, and most of the game balls launched toward the right side area win the second prize by winning the second prize opening 2153. This is a pattern in which the game ball does not exist on the downstream side of the mouth 2153. The second pattern is a pattern of the ball flow path in the jackpot game in which the second big winning opening 2153 is opened and closed, and the game ball launched toward the right side region wins the second big winning opening 2153. .. The third pattern is the pattern of the ball flow path in the normal speed mode in the time-saving game state, and the game ball launched toward the right side region does not win the second large winning opening 2153 (above the opening / closing member 2156). It is a pattern toward the out port 1151 (passing through).

Further, the game area 1100 includes a first start port 2101 and a second start port 2102 in which a predetermined special lottery result is drawn by taking the game ball as an opportunity. The first starting port 2101 is located substantially in the center of the game area 1100 in the left-right direction, below the liquid crystal display device 1900 and above the first attacker device 2100.

The second starting port 2102 is arranged below the gate portion 2301 in the gate unit 2300, and is in a state of being closed by a movable piece 2305 that slides in the front-rear direction in a normal state, and is based on a normal lottery result. By sliding the movable piece 2305 toward the back side, it is possible to accept the game ball. That is, the second starting port 2102 is normally unable to accept the game ball, and can accept the game ball based on the result of the normal lottery that is drawn when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301. It is said to be a variable winning opening. It should be noted that the gate portion 2301 is capable of passing game balls one by one, and the gate portion 2301 is provided with a gate sensor 2302 that detects the passage of the game balls.

As described above, the game ball flowing down the left side area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 can win a prize in the first starting port 2101, but the game ball flowing down the left side area. Most of it is discharged from the out port 1151. However, in a normal game state in which the time saving function does not operate, even if the game ball is fired toward the right side area, a prize cannot be expected to the second starting port 2102, so the game is played so that the game ball flows down to the left side area. Is done.

However, in the time-saving game state, most of the game balls launched toward the right side region do not reach below the liquid crystal display device 1900 provided in the substantially center of the game area, and are above the right hand of the liquid crystal display device 1900 ( That is, since the second starting port 2102 located above the right hand of the game area 1100 is won at high speed, the game ball disappears on the downstream side of the second starting port 2102. That is, as long as the second starting port 2102 is properly won, many game balls suddenly disappear above the right hand of the liquid crystal display device 1900, and as shown in FIG. 115, the second starting port 2102 There is no game ball on the downstream side. Therefore, even if the player's gaze from the liquid crystal display device 1900 to the second starting port 2102 is not directly moved, it is only possible to feel the atmosphere of whether or not there are many game balls in the lower region of the liquid crystal display device 1900. (2) It becomes possible to easily grasp the winning status at the starting port 2102, and thereby it becomes possible to concentrate on the display related to the symbol variation on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and enjoy an advantageous game. ..

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU4100a has a probability change function with a probability of 100% only from the end of the jackpot game until the special lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 85 times). It controls the probabilistic time-saving game state in which both the time-saving function and the time-saving function are activated. Then, if the special lottery is executed 85 times without winning the special lottery in this probability change time saving game state, the game shifts to the normal game state in which neither the probability change function nor the time saving function is activated. It should be noted that the above-mentioned probability variation time-shortening gaming state is not necessarily limited to the one controlled with a probability of 100%. In addition, it goes without saying that the period controlled by the probabilistic time-short game state is not limited to 85 times.

By the way, in the control of the time saving game state (time saving control), the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to "255/255" (per 100%). Then, in the time-saving game state, until the specified number of times (for example, 20 times) of special lottery is performed, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely short, and when this super-speed mode ends, the second special symbol is completed. It becomes a normal speed mode in which the fluctuation time of is longer than the super speed mode. This normal speed mode continues from the end of the super speed mode until a specified number of special lottery (for example, 60 times) is performed. Then, for the specified number of times (for example, 5 times) immediately before the end of the time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is longer than the normal speed mode and longer than the fluctuation time in the non-time-saving game state. Become a mode. Then, when this slow speed mode ends, the time saving game state ends. In addition, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the shortest in the super speed mode, then the shortest in the normal speed mode, and the longest in the slow speed mode, but this is when the result of the second special lottery is lost. is there. However, in all or any of the super-speed mode, the normal-speed mode, and the slow-speed mode, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the shortest in the super-speed mode, then the shortest in the normal-speed mode, and the longest in the slow-speed mode. It may be decided by lottery so that it becomes. When the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is determined by the lottery in this way, basically, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the shortest in the super-speed mode, then the shortest in the normal speed mode, and the longest in the slow-speed mode. However, in rare cases, it may be determined that the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the normal speed mode is shorter than that in the super speed mode, for example. Further, basically, although the fluctuation time in the slow speed mode is determined to be longer than the fluctuation time in the non-time saving gaming state, in rare cases, the fluctuation time in the non-time saving gaming state is larger than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the slow speed mode. It may be decided that the time will be longer.

In addition, in any of the super speed mode, the normal speed mode, and the slow speed mode, when the jackpot game is executed again, the number of times of the second special lottery in each mode is reset, and the game after the jackpot game is completed. The state starts from super fast mode. Therefore, for example, in the case of a pachinko machine in which a jackpot game is performed in a manner in which a prize ball is not obtained and is difficult for the player to notice, if the jackpot game is performed during the super-speed mode, the player does not notice this. The number of super-fast modes performed up to that point may be reset and restarted from zero.

Further, in the time-saving game state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is "0.08 seconds", and the movable piece 2305 is in the open state after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped (the game ball can be accepted by the second starting port 2102). The time maintained in the retreating state) is "5.5 seconds". That is, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, a normal hit is always won, and then the passing game ball has a guide path (not shown) capable of gaining time due to, for example, a concave shape. By stopping the fluctuation of the normal symbol in a time (0.08 seconds) shorter than the time it takes to reach the movable area of the movable piece 2305 through the ball, the game ball that triggered the winning of the normal hit. Is accepted as it is in the second starting port 2102. The movable piece 2305 is maintained in the open state (retracted state in which the game ball can be accepted in the second starting port 2102) for "5.5 seconds", and then in the closed state (in the second starting port 2102). It operates so that the game ball is in an unacceptable backward state).

On the other hand, in the non-time saving game state, by setting the winning probability of the normal symbol to 0% and setting the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol to a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 5 seconds), the second start port 2102 It is not possible to accept the game ball to. In the non-time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol may be 0% or more. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that of the time-saving game state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the normal symbol is When it hits, the movable piece 2305 of the second starting port 2102 is retracted for a shorter time than the time-saving gaming state, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be accepted into the second starting port 2102, and then moved forward again. It may be made impossible to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2102.

In other words, in the non-time saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 0%, so in this case, even if the player hits right, it is impossible or extremely low probability that the game ball will win the second starting port 2102. It will be a prize. Then, the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the non-time saving game state is guided to the rectifying passage 2610 instead of being accepted by the second starting port 2102 after passing through the gate portion 2301. Become. Therefore, in the non-time-saving game state, the game ball is launched aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that many game balls win the first start port 2101 instead of the second start port 2102 (so-called "" "Left-handed") is considered to be more advantageous for the player, even considering the superiority or inferiority of the privilege at the time of winning the jackpot between the first starting port 2101 side and the second starting port 2102 side.

On the other hand, in the short-time game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol is 100%, and the movable piece 2305 of the second starting port 2102 is retracted for a long period of time (5.5 seconds in this example). By doing so, it becomes easy to win a prize for the game ball to the second starting port 2102. Therefore, in the time-saving game state, the game ball is launched aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that many game balls win the prize at the second start port 2102 instead of the first start port 2101 (so-called "right"). It is said that it is more advantageous for the player to hit ").

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the winning probability of the normal symbol in the game state (time saving game state) in which the so-called open extension function is activated is set to "255/255", but the normal lottery is performed from the normal loss. It is not always necessary to make sure that the normal hit is won at 100%, such as by setting the probability that the normal hit is easily obtained.

Further, as the time saving control, a control for increasing the winning probability of the normal symbol compared to the non-time saving gaming state, a control for shortening the time required for the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol compared to the non-time saving gaming state, and the second starting port 2102. Control to extend the period for retracting the movable piece 2106 from the non-time saving game state, control to increase the number of times to retract the movable piece 2106 of the second starting port 2102 from the non-time saving gaming state, first special symbol display One of the controls for shortening the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol on the 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 (the time required for the variable display control of the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900) as compared with the non-time saving gaming state. One or any combination (or all) may be performed.

Next, the fluctuation time of the special symbol in each of the super-speed mode, the normal speed mode, and the slow-speed mode will be described.

In the super-speed mode from the end of the jackpot game to the second special lottery being held 20 times, for example, if the result of the special lottery for the second special symbol is lost, the number of reserved second special symbols starts to fluctuate. When it becomes "0" later (that is, when only the hold that starts to change from now on), the change time of the second special symbol is "5.5 seconds", and the number of hold of the second special symbol changes. When it becomes "1" to "3" after the start (that is, when there is a hold after the start of the fluctuation), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is "0.15 seconds", which is an extremely short time. However, after the second special symbol is fluctuated and displayed over these fluctuating times, a stop time of "0.5 seconds" is provided. Then, when the number of reserved second special symbols is "1" to "3", the time from the start of the variable display of the second special symbol to the start of the next variable display is "0.65 seconds". Then, the hold of the second special symbol will be exhausted at extremely short intervals. Here, since the number of game balls fired toward the game area 1100 per minute is 100, a second special lottery will be held for most of the game balls fired toward the game area 1100. .. If the result of the special lottery for the second special symbol is a hit, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively long, for example, "23 seconds".

In the normal speed mode from the end of the super speed mode to the second special lottery being held 60 times, for example, if the result of the special lottery for the second special symbol is lost, the number of reserved second special symbols fluctuates. When it becomes "0" after the start (that is, when only the hold that starts to change from now on), the change time of the second special symbol is "12 seconds", and the number of hold of the second special symbol starts to change. When it becomes "1" to "3" later (that is, when there is a hold after the fluctuation starts), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is "1.5 seconds", which is shorter than the normal game state. It is a longer time than the super speed mode. However, after the second special symbol is fluctuated and displayed over these fluctuating times, a stop time of "0.5 seconds" is provided. If the result of the special lottery for the second special symbol is a hit, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively long, for example, "25 seconds".

Further, in the slow speed mode in which the second special lottery is performed five times, for example, from the end of the normal speed mode to the end of the time saving game state, when the result of the special lottery for the second special symbol is lost. When the number of holdings of the second special symbol becomes "0" after the start of fluctuation (that is, when only the holdings that are about to start changing), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is "11 seconds", and the second special symbol (Ii) When the number of reserved special symbols changes from "1" to "3" after the start of fluctuation (that is, when there is a hold after the start of fluctuation), the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is usually "11 seconds". It is a longer time than the speed mode. However, after the second special symbol is fluctuated and displayed over these fluctuating times, a stop time of "0.5 seconds" is provided. If the result of the special lottery for the second special symbol is a hit, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be relatively long, for example, "25 seconds".

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the hold of the second special symbol is preferentially digested over the hold of the first special symbol, and when the number of hold of the second special symbol is "0", it is "1". Since it is set longer than in the case of "3", even if the first special symbol is held, it is difficult to digest the hold of the first special symbol. In the time-saving game state, if the result of the special lottery for the first special symbol is lost, the normal fluctuation occurs for a certain period of time (for example, 11 seconds) regardless of whether the mode is the super speed mode or the normal speed mode. Will be.

In addition, in the normal game state (non-probability and non-time saving game state), a game aiming for a big hit is performed by a special lottery for the first special symbol by so-called left-handed, but in this normal game state, the first special symbol If the result of the special lottery is a loss, 11 seconds is set as the fluctuation time with the highest selection rate (excluding the shortened fluctuation when the so-called number of holds is a predetermined number or more), and the loss in the above slow mode The fluctuation time of the second special symbol at the time (11 seconds) and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol at the time of loss in the normal game state (11 seconds) are the same fluctuation time. In this way, despite being in the probabilistic time-short game state, by deliberately preparing a slow mode that has the same fluctuation time as the normal game state just before the end of the probabilistic time-short game state, this slow mode is in the normal game state. It functions as a break-in period for the game, and reduces the discomfort caused by the gap in the fluctuation time when switching from the fast-digesting probabilistic time-shortening game state including the super-fast mode to the normal game state where the lottery digestion is slow. I have to. In order to reduce such discomfort, the fluctuation time set in the slow mode is the same as the fluctuation time of the loss of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state (for example, 10 seconds or 12 seconds) or a long fluctuation time (for example). 20 seconds) may be set.

In this way, in the super-high speed mode in which the hold of the second special symbol is digested at high speed, when the game ball is launched toward the right side area of the game area 1100, the flow speed of the game ball is maintained and the right side passage 2545. The second starting port 2102 on the route is continuously won at high speed, and each time the second starting port 2102 is won at high speed, the second special lottery for holding based on this high speed winning is continuously high speed. It will be digested. As a result, in the super-speed mode, the ball speed of the game ball in the game area until the second start port 2102 is won is increased to win the high speed, and the digestion speed required for the second special lottery is also the first. (2) Every time there is a high-speed winning of the starting port 2102, the second special lottery will be dramatically improved to the extent that it can be digested at high speed one after another. Therefore, in combination with the apparent speed (ball speed) of the game ball flowing down the right side area of the game area 1100, it is possible to give a strong impression that the progress speed of the game is dramatically increased. A game full of speed will suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, like the pachinko machine 1 in the present embodiment, after the jackpot game is completed, there is a probability close to this even if it is not 100% or 100%, and only until a predetermined number of special lottery is performed. In the pachinko machine 1 controlled to the state, when the special lottery is performed a predetermined number of times, the probability change time shortening game state ends and the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to the normal game state. A player who plays a game with such a pachinko machine 1 has a smaller remaining number of times controlled as a time-saving short-time game state (the remaining number of times of the second special lottery when both the probability-changing function and the time-saving function are activated). , It is normal to feel frustrated that the jackpot game may not be performed and the game may shift to the normal game state. When the player feels such a feeling of frustration, the monotony of the game in the probabilistic time-shortening game state is reduced. However, even though the probabilistic time-saving game state ends when the special lottery is performed a predetermined number of times, immediately after the jackpot game ends and the probabilistic time-shortening game state starts, the game shifts to the normal game state without winning the special lottery. There is a tendency not to be so conscious of doing this (the short game state of the probability change time ends). In this way, the game tends to be monotonous as long as the player is not so conscious of shifting to the normal game state without winning the special lottery. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, after the jackpot game is completed, the game is controlled to the probabilistic change time short game state, but the specified number of times (for example, 20 times) is less than the predetermined number of times (for example, 85 times). ), The fluctuation time of the second special symbol (the time when the second special lottery is digested) is controlled to the super-speed mode, which is extremely short. As a result, while reducing the monotony of the game in the probabilistic time-short game state, it is possible to maintain the feeling of frustration that can be given to the player when the remaining number of times in the probabilistic time-short game state is reduced, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. It becomes possible to do.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming state from the end of the jackpot game to the time when the special lottery is performed a predetermined number of times is controlled to the probabilistic time-short game state, but it is not always probable. The time saving function is not limited to the one controlled by the time saving game state, and the probability change function is operated until the special lottery is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 85 times), but the time saving function is performed a number of times less than the above predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times). ) It may be operated until it is performed. In this case, the length of the period during which the time saving function is finished is changed by, for example, a lottery, and it is difficult to grasp from the appearance whether or not the probability change function is working after the time saving function is finished. It may be a latent probability change. As described above, in a pachinko machine in which the time saving function can be deactivated before the probability change function, it is preferable to set the specified period immediately before the operation of the time saving function is completed to the slow mode.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game state after the jackpot game is completed is executed in the order of super speed mode, normal speed mode, and slow speed mode, but the game state is not necessarily limited to this, and for example, normal speed. The mode, the super speed mode, the normal speed mode, and the slow speed mode may be executed in this order. In other words, the period during which the player feels frustrated that the jackpot game may not be performed and the game shifts to the normal game state (a specific period prior to the end of the probabilistic time-shortened game state) is super-fast. It may not be controlled by the mode (controlled by the normal speed mode or the slow speed mode).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the super-speed mode is controlled immediately after the jackpot game is completed, but in such a pachinko machine, even in the super-speed mode after the jackpot game is finished, It is preferable that the effect during the jackpot game performed by the liquid crystal display device 1900 is continuously executed during the jackpot game. That is, even if the jackpot game ends, the peripheral control unit 4140 does not perform a display effect indicating that the jackpot game has ended, and the display effect performed during the jackpot game continues to be performed even in the super-speed mode. When the mode shifts from the super-speed mode to the normal-speed mode, it is controlled so that a display effect indicating that the jackpot game is completed is performed. In the super speed mode, not only the probability of winning the special lottery is increased, but also the second special symbol is changed in an extremely short time as described above, so that the result of the second special lottery can be a big hit during the super speed mode. Highly probable. When the result of the second special lottery in the super-speed mode is a big hit, it is difficult to grasp from the appearance that the big hit game is finished, although the big hit game is finished internally. Therefore, also in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the display effect indicating that the jackpot game has ended is not immediately performed, but is put on hold, and when the super-speed mode ends, a display effect that can be grasped that the jackpot game has ended is performed. , The display effect during the jackpot game up to that point is changed to the display effect in the normal game state. As a result, when the result of the second special lottery becomes a big hit during the super-speed mode, it is as if a super-long big hit game exceeding the specified number of rounds was executed instead of the conventional big hit game such as 15 rounds. It is possible to show, reduce the monotonous game that simply plays a predetermined game, and provide a novel pachinko machine that has never been seen before.

In addition, the above-mentioned pachinko machine, that is, when the jackpot game ends, the display effect indicating that the jackpot game has ended is not performed, and even in the super-speed mode, the display effect during the jackpot game that has been performed so far is displayed. For pachinko machines that continue to perform and display that the jackpot game has ended when shifting from super-speed mode to normal-speed mode, the super-speed mode ends and shifts to normal-speed mode. The gaming state after that is the probabilistic time-shortening gaming state in the conventional pachinko machine.

In addition, when the jackpot game is completed, the display effect indicating that the jackpot game is completed is not performed, and the display effect during the jackpot game that has been performed so far is continuously performed even in the super-speed mode. For pachinko machines that display that the jackpot game has ended when shifting from the super-speed mode to the normal-speed mode, the probability variation time-shortening game is not necessarily limited to a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game ends. It is not limited to those controlled by the state. That is, if it is controlled to the super-speed mode only a specified number of times after the jackpot game state ends (excluding pachinko machines that are controlled to the super-speed mode for a long time so that it can be grasped that the jackpot game has ended). , It may be controlled to a probabilistic time-shortening gaming state until a special lottery is won.

[Liquid Crystal Display Device] Next, the liquid crystal display device 1900 in the game board 4 of this example will be described. The liquid crystal display device 1900 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000, and can display a predetermined effect image according to the game state. As shown in FIG. 118 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 includes a fixing piece 1902 protruding outward from both the left and right sides, and can be attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 via the fixing piece 1902. ing.

Specifically, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is inserted from the rear side into the liquid crystal insertion portion 3010d formed on the rear side of the rear wall 3010a in the back box 3010, and protrudes from the right side in the front view. One fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the two liquid crystal fixing portions 3010e on the left side of the rear view of the back box 3010, and the opposite fixing piece 1902 is inserted into the insertion slot formed by the lock mechanism 3050. The liquid crystal display device 1900 can be locked and attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the lock mechanism 3050 downward to close the insertion slot.

Further, as shown in FIG. 117 and the like, the liquid crystal display device 1900 is viewed from the peripheral control board box 1910 containing the peripheral control unit 4140, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 (see FIG. 119), and the like, and from the lower part of the peripheral control board box 1910. It has a volume 1912 that extends rearward. By rotating the volume 1912 in an appropriate direction, the volume output from the speakers 130, 222, 262 provided in the door frame 5 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3 can be adjusted. It has become.

The liquid crystal display device 1900 is said to use a light-luminance white LED as a backlight.

[Various Substrates] Subsequently, a control substrate that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 119. FIG. 119 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main board 4000 and a group of the peripheral control boards 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of the main board 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls the game operation (progress of the game) and a payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of the game ball and the like. Further, the group of the peripheral control board 4010 is the peripheral control unit 4140 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 4100, and the liquid crystal display device 1900 based on the command from the peripheral control board 4140. It includes a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the display of the effect image.

[Main Control Board] As shown in FIG. 119, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. Drives the main control MPU 4100a, the main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), the main control input circuit 4100f to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and various solenoids. Main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g for this purpose, and RAM clear switch 4100c for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM 4100e (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in RAM 4100e") built in the main control MPU 4100a. , Is equipped. In addition to the built-in ROM 4100d (hereinafter, also referred to as "main control built-in ROM 4100d") and the main control built-in RAM 4100e, the main control MPU 4100a has a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and for preventing fraud. Functions etc. are also built-in.

The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a first start port sensor 3131 that detects a game ball received by the first start port 2101 and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received by the second start port 2102. Detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3133 that detects the game ball received into the 3132 and the general winning opening 2201 are input via the main control I / O port 4100b, respectively, or the gate sensor 2302 and the general winning opening sensor 2123. , The detection signal from the count sensor 2122 and the magnetic detection sensor 3134 attached to the back unit 3000 is input via the panel relay board 3040 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b. It has become like.

The main control MPU 4100a outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 4100b to the main control solenoid drive circuit 4100g based on these detection signals, thereby transmitting the start port solenoid 2114 and the attacker solenoid via the panel relay board 3040. A drive signal is output to the 2121 and the receiving drive motor 2558, and the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display are displayed via the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3040, and the function display board 1191. 1186, 1st special symbol storage display 1184, 2nd special symbol storage display 1187, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol storage display 1188, game status display 1183, round display 1190 To do.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3131, the second start port sensor 3132, the gate sensor 2302, and the count sensor 2122 use a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch. A contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 2123, 3133. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2101 and the second start port 2102 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2301, so that the first start port sensor 3131, the second start port sensor 3132, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2302 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first start port sensor 3131, the second start port sensor 3132, and the gate sensor 2302. Further, when a big hit game state that is advantageous for the player occurs, the big winning opening 2103 is opened and the game ball frequently enters, so that the count sensor 2122 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 2122 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensors 2123 and 3133 do not frequently detect the general winning openings 2104 and 2201 in which the game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 2123, 3133.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 4110, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110. Or something. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b. (The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control unit 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a will be described in detail later, but when it receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 4110, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 4140.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 851. The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 4100 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. Described.) BC0 is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM 4100e in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated at the time of turning on the power, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM 4100e. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c is also output to the payout control board 4110.

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 851, and when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is output as a power failure warning. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 4110 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[Pachinko Control Board] As shown in FIG. 119, the payout control board 4110 that controls the payout of game balls, etc., performs launch control by the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout, and the launch solenoid 654, and also feeds the ball. A launch control unit 4120 that controls ball feeding by the solenoid 585, an error LED display 4130 that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, and an error release switch 860a for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display 4130. , The prize ball tank 720, the tank rail 731, and the ball removal switch 860b for discharging the game ball in the prize ball device 740 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removal operation.

[Payout Control Unit] As shown in FIG. 119, the payout control unit 4111 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 4110 includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. The payout control MPU4111a, which is a built-in microprocessor, the payout control I / O port 4111b as an I / O device, and the external watchdog timer 4111c for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU4111a is operating normally ( Hereinafter, it will be referred to as “external WDT4111c”), the payout motor drive circuit 4111d for outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740, and the payout to which the detection signals from various detection switches related to the payout are input. It includes a control input circuit 4111e. In addition to the built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") and RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM"), the payout control MPU 4111a is used to prevent fraud. It also has built-in functions.

The payout control MPU4111a of the payout control unit 4111 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port 4111b, or the main control board. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 4100c from the 4100 being input via the payout control I / O port 4111b, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 is input, or the ball out switch 750. , The detection signals from the counting sensor 751 and the rotation angle sensor 752 are input via the prize ball relay board 754.

A ball-out switch 750 that detects the presence or absence of a game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740, and a game ball flowing down in the prize ball passage 741c formed in the unit base 741 are detected. The detection signal from the counting sensor 751 is first input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the prize ball relay board 754 of the prize ball device 740, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b. .. The detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752 for detecting the detection slit 749a formed in the rotation detection board 749 of the prize ball device 740 first passes through the sensor board 753 of the prize ball device 740 and the prize ball relay board 754. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 are first sent out from the payout control input circuit 4111e. Is input to the payout control MPU4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 550 that detects whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is stored is full is first the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal. It is input to the payout control input circuit 4111e via the plate 880, and is input to the payout control MPU 4111a via the payout control I / O port 4111b.

The payout control MPU4111a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 744 to the payout motor 744 via the payout control I / O 4111b and the prize ball relay board 754, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 as an error LED display. A signal for displaying on the 4130 is output to the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4111b, and a command for indicating the state of the pachinko play 1 is sent via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The number of game balls actually paid out is transmitted to the main control board 4100 in a serial manner, or the number of actually paid out game balls is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port 4111b. The external terminal plate 784 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the amusement park (hall). This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 4100). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 4110 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the switch 750, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740), and when the number "2" is displayed, "ball is seen". (Specifically, the payout rotating body 748 at the entrance of the distribution space 741b communicating with the supply passage 741a formed in the unit base 741 of the prize ball device 740 based on the detection signal from the rotation angle sensor 752. And the game ball are engaged near the entrance to notify that the payout rotating body 748 is difficult to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it means that it is a "counting switch error" (specifically). Notifies that the counting sensor 751 has a problem based on the detection signal from the counting sensor 751), and when the number "5" is displayed, it means that it is a "retry error" (specifically, Notifies that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached the preset upper limit value), and when the number "6" is displayed, it means that the tank is "full" (specifically, from the full tank detection sensor 550). Based on the detection signal of, the accommodation space 546 of the foul cover unit 540 is notified that the stored game ball is full), and when the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected". Notifies that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 4110 to the CR unit 6), and when the number "9" is displayed, it means that it is "in stock" (specifically). Has notified that the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending switch 365a and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return switch 365b are first sent to the ball lending unit board 366, the main relay terminal board 880, and the CR unit connection terminal board 874. It is designed to be input to the CR unit 6 via. The CR unit 6 serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 4110 via the CR unit connection terminal plate 874, and this signal is used for the payout control I / O. It is received at port 4111b and input to the payout control MPU4111a. Further, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the remaining degree display 365c, which is a CR unit connection terminal. It is output to the board 874, the main relay terminal board 880, and the ball rental unit board 366, and this signal is input to the residual frequency indicator 365c.

[Launch Control Unit] As shown in FIG. 119, the launch control unit 4120, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 654 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 585, receives detection signals from various detection switches related to launch. Launch control input circuit 4120a, oscillation circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game area 1100 based on this clock signal. The 4120c, the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 654 based on the launch reference pulse, and the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 585 based on the launch reference pulse. It has. The firing timing control circuit 4120c generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 1100 per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit 4120b, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d. At the same time, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e.

A detection signal from the touch sensor 516 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle body 504, and the launch stop switch 518 that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. Is first input to the launch control input circuit 4120a via the handle device relay board 192 and the main relay terminal plate 880, and is input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. When the CR unit 6 and the CR unit connection terminal plate 874 are electrically connected, they are input as a CR connection signal to the launch control input circuit 4120a and input to the launch timing control circuit 4120c. The signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 1100 according to the rotation position of the handle body 504 is first the handle device relay board 192 and then the main relay terminal plate 880. Is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d via.

Based on the signal from the rotation position detection sensor 512, the firing solenoid drive circuit 4120d uses a firing reference pulse to generate a driving current for launching the game ball toward the game region 1100 with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle body 504. Is input to the firing solenoid 654 to output the current. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e applies a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 585 via the main relay terminal plate 880 and the handle device relay board 192 when the ball feed reference pulse is input. By outputting, the ball feed member 584 of the ball feed unit 580 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300, and the constant current is triggered when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is completed. By stopping the output of the ball feed member 584, the game ball received by the ball feed member 584 is sent to the ball launching device 650 side. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit 4120d to the launch solenoid 654 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit 4120e to the ball feed solenoid 585 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 851 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 4110 includes a capacitor BC1 as a backup power source for supplying power to the payout control board 4110 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With the capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU4111a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch 4100c of the main control board 4100 is operated at the time of turning on the power, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[Peripheral control board] As shown in FIG. 119, the peripheral control board 4010 is based on a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100 and control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. It includes a liquid crystal display device 1900 and a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls drawing of the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Peripheral Control Unit] As shown in FIG. 119, the peripheral control unit 4140 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 4010 includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, and the peripheral control ROM 4140b. It includes a sound source IC 4140c that performs high-quality sound performance, and a sound ROM 4140d that stores sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c.

The peripheral control MPU 4140a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each decorative board of the game board 4 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the lamp drive board 3041 or the game board. A motor mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to output the drive data on the game board side for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various production units provided in 4. Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive board 3045 and outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 5 and provided on each decorative board of the door frame 5. Door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to color LEDs, etc., and door-side drive light emission data composed of frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to peripheral panel Control data (display command) indicating a screen to be transmitted to the door frame base board 194 via the relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 or to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252 is liquid crystal. In addition to transmitting data from the serial I / O port for the control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, control signals (sound commands) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d are output to the sound source IC 4140c.

The detection signals from the various in-situ detection sensors for detecting the in-situs of the various production units provided on the game board 4 are input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the motor drive board 3045 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010. Has been done. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b for detecting the rotation of the dial operation unit 401 of the operation unit 400 provided on the door frame 5 and the pressure detection sensor 432c for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 are the door frame base substrate. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a via 194, the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, and the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is monitored based on this operation signal. doing.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU4140a, and is provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872 and the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. The lower speaker 821 controls the flow of music and sound effects according to various effects, and the door frame 5 is connected to the peripheral panel relay terminal plate 872, the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame base board 194. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects are played from the provided speakers 130, 222, 262 and the lower speaker 821 provided in the main body frame 3. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume 1912 mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 and protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1910.

In addition to the watchdog timer built into the peripheral control MPU 4140a (hereinafter, referred to as “WDT with built-in peripheral control”), the peripheral control unit 4140 includes an external watchdog timer (hereinafter, “external peripheral control”) (not shown). It is also described as "WDT"), and the peripheral control MPU4140a diagnoses whether or not its own system is out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT together.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (k). ) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, and the movable body drive command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010. , It is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 mounted on the rear surface of the back box 3010 send a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command via the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882. Output to the LED of each decorative board 214, 216, 254, 256, 288, 290, 322, 430, 432, etc. provided in 5, or output the lighting signal or blinking signal based on the received game board side lighting blinking command. It outputs to LEDs of each decorative substrate 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546, etc. provided in the game board 4. Further, the panel relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 sends a drive signal based on the received drive command of the movable body to the dial drive motor provided on the door frame 5 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882. It outputs to 414, each drive motor 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508, etc. provided in the game board 4, and each solenoid.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, or in the operation unit 400 provided in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5. The detection signals from the rotation detection sensors 432a and 432b that detect the rotation operation of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection sensor 432c that detects the operation of the pressure operation unit 405 in the operation unit 400 are the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 and the back box. Input is performed via the lamp drive board 3041 or the motor drive board 3045 mounted on the rear surface of the 3010.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and mounts the lamp drive board 3041 and the motor drive board 3045 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the peripheral relay terminal board. The lower speaker 821 of the main body frame 3 from the side speaker 130 or the upper speaker 222, 262 of the door frame 5 via 882, or via the lamp drive board 3041 or the motor drive board 3045 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. Therefore, control is performed so that music, sound effects, etc. that match various effects are played. In this example, as described above, the side speakers arranged on the left and right sides of the lower side of the game window 101, the upper speakers 222 and 262 arranged on the upper side of the game window 101, and the lower part of the main body frame 3 are provided. Sending an acoustic signal as sound information (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal to which the lower speaker 391 described later is added, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) is sent to the lower speaker 821 for bass. Therefore, it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

[Measures to Prevent Abnormal Sound Generation] The door frame 5 is equipped with various audio equipment, LEDs, sensors, and other equipment that require electric power, and a door frame base board 194 is attached to the back surface of the door frame 5. FIG. 25). The door frame base substrate 194 includes side speakers 130, upper speakers 222 and 262 (FIGS. 29 and 32) of the left and right side decoration units, and lower speakers 821 (FIG. 68) in the speaker box 820 provided in the main body frame 3. It is connected to the bass speaker) (FIG. 90) and is also connected to the peripheral control board 4010 provided in the game board 4, and amplifies the audio signal sent from the peripheral control board 4010 and outputs it to each speaker. It is equipped with an amplifier circuit (digital amplifier circuit).

Further, on the door frame base board 194, wirings for connecting various audio equipment, LEDs, sensors, etc. to the payout control board 4110, peripheral control board 4010, etc. are aggregated and bundled, and then extended rearward. It is connected to the main relay terminal board 880 and the peripheral relay terminal board 882 of the main body frame 3 (FIGS. 68 and 90). The rear side of the door frame base substrate 194 is covered with the door frame base substrate cover 195 (FIG. 23).

Further, in the place (rear side) where the door frame base board cover 195 is arranged, the game ball paid out from the prize ball unit 700 or the game area 1100 even though it is fired by the hit ball launching device 650. A foul cover unit 540 (a molded product of transparent polycarbonate) that guides a game ball (foul ball) that has not reached to the upper plate 301 or the lower plate 302 of the plate unit is provided in close proximity (FIG. 23).

Since the ball passage 542b of the foul cover unit 540 passes through the ball passage 542b at a high speed while the game ball (metal) is in contact with the passage wall surface, electrostatic charges are accumulated in the polycarbonate of this portion, and it may reach 10 kV. There is (at most 3-4 kV even if you feel pain due to the discharge of the accumulated electrostatic charge). Also, unlike metal, the electric charge accumulated in the resin escapes only in the immediate vicinity even if it is grounded, and most of it remains.

Then, due to electrostatic induction by this electric charge, a digital amplifier circuit (not shown) of the door frame base substrate 194 in the vicinity of the electrostatic induction circuit may malfunction. In this case, an abnormal audio signal that continues for a certain period of time may be input to the voice coil of the speaker, or the audio signal from the digital amplifier circuit may be extremely amplified and exceed the appropriate amplification width (when the AC voltage becomes excessive). Occur. In that case, for example, a cracked sound such as a rattling sound is generated from the speaker, or the sound reproduced by the speaker becomes a loud unpleasant sound (an abnormal sound is generated), and the player becomes an unpleasant sound. You will feel it. In addition, the speaker may be damaged, which is not good for the speaker. Although the digital amplifier circuit has a DC voltage cut function on the input side, it is usually not on the output side.

Since the woofer of the lower speaker 821 is hard to hear, there is a tendency to set a large output.

An embodiment described below detects whether or not the audio signal output from the door frame base board 194 to the lower speaker 821 is the above-mentioned abnormal audio signal, and if it is an abnormal audio signal, The present invention relates to an abnormal audio signal blocking substrate (described later) that blocks an abnormal audio signal from being input to the lower speaker 821.

Regarding audio output, as described above, the peripheral control MPU4140a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, these various commands are used. Based on this, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM 4140d is output to the sound source IC 4140c (FIG. 119).

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and is provided on the main body frame 3 via the peripheral relay terminal plate 882, the door frame base board 194, or the like. Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from the speaker 821, the side speakers 130 provided on the door frame 5, and the upper speakers 222 and 262 (see FIGS. 119 and 121).

[Abnormal Audio Signal Blocking Board] Next, the abnormal audio signal blocking board will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. 121 is a block diagram of a door frame base board 194, a peripheral relay terminal board 882, an abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, and a lower speaker 821. FIG. 122 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884.

As shown in FIG. 121, the door frame base board 194 arranged on the door frame 5 and the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 arranged on the main body frame 3 are connected by wiring 196, and are connected from the door frame base board 194 to the periphery. A + 24V voltage, a woofer + signal and a woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821 amplified by the door frame base board 194, are output to the side relay terminal board 882, and are output to the peripheral side relay terminal board 882 through wiring 196. It is designed to be transmitted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 121, in the main body frame 3, an abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 is provided between the peripheral side relay terminal plate 882 and the lower speaker 821 housed in the speaker box 820, and the peripheral side relay terminal is provided. The plate 882 and the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 are connected by a speaker protection harness 883, and the abnormal sound signal blocking board 884 and the lower speaker 821 are connected by a lower speaker harness 819.

In FIG. 122, from the peripheral relay terminal plate 882 to the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884, the ground GND, the + 24V voltage, and the woofer + signal and the woofer which are the audio signals for the lower speaker 821 output from the door frame base substrate 194. -The signal is relay-output and transmitted to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883.

Further, the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 outputs the woofer + signal and the woofer signal, which are audio signals for the lower speaker 821, to the lower speaker 821, and is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. Has been done. In this way, the audio signal output from the door frame base substrate 194 through the abnormal audio signal blocking substrate 884 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821.

By the way, it is desirable that the location of the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 in the main body frame 3 is a location that is not easily affected by electrostatic noise. In the present embodiment, the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 is arranged at a location far away from the foul cover unit 540, for example, inside the speaker box 820 shown in FIG. 68. In this way, by arranging the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 in a place that is not easily affected by electrostatic noise, it is possible to stably suppress the input of an abnormal audio signal to the lower speaker 821.

[Circuit of abnormal audio signal blocking board] The abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 detects whether or not the audio signal supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the speaker protection harness 883 is an abnormal audio signal, and is abnormal. In the case of a normal audio signal, the abnormal audio signal is blocked from being input to the lower speaker 821.

As shown in FIG. 122, the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 is composed of an abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 that detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormality detection signal, and an abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885. When receiving the output abnormality detection signal, it is provided with an abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 that cuts off the supply of the abnormal voice signal to the lower speaker 821.

The + 24V voltage supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the + 24V supply line 886 on the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884. Further, the ground GND supplied through the speaker protection harness 883 is supplied to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the ground line 887 on the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884.

The woofer + signal, which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two on the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, one is input to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895 through the woofer + signal line 888, and the other is input to the abnormal audio signal blocking circuit 895. It is input to the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885.

Further, the woofer signal, which is an audio signal supplied through the speaker protection harness 883, is branched into two at the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884, and one is relayed at the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 through the woofer signal line 889. It is connected to the external lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819. The other is input to the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885.

[Abnormal audio signal detection circuit] The abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 is a rectifier bridge circuit formed by connecting four diodes SD1 to SD4 in a bridge type, a resistor SR1 (47 kΩ) arranged after the rectifier bridge circuit, and an electrolytic capacitor. It mainly comprises an SC1 (capacitance 47 μF in this embodiment), a transistor STR1, a transistor STR2, and an infrared LED of a photocoupler SPC1 (incorporating an infrared LED and a phototransistor).

The cathode terminal of the diode SD4 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD2, and the other woofer + signal of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD4 and the anode terminal of the diode SD2. .. Further, the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD1, and the woofer signal of the other of the two branches is input to the connection point between the cathode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD1. ing.

Further, the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 and the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 are electrically connected, and the anode terminal of the diode SD3 and the anode terminal of the diode SD4 are electrically connected to form a rectifying bridge circuit. A + voltage line 890 that supplies a positive voltage rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit to the subsequent stage is connected to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2, while a rectifying bridge is connected to the anode terminal of the diode SD4 to the subsequent stage. A 0V line 891 that supplies 0V whose negative voltage is cut by the circuit and whose voltage is substantially 0V is connected.

Then, in the subsequent stage of the rectifier bridge circuit, one end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, the other end of the resistor SR1 is connected to the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1, and the-terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is connected to the 0V line 891. It is connected.

That is, the woofer + signal rectified by the rectifying bridge circuit and the woofer signal (the waveform of the + voltage in which the high and low peaks of the audio signal waveform are continuously connected to each other with 0V as the connection point) are electrolyzed via the resistor SR1. By being applied to the + terminal of the capacitor SC1, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak, and during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0V. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is designed to discharge. The time constants of charging and discharging in the series circuit (smoothing circuit) of the resistance SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 are determined by the resistance value of the resistance SR1 and the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor SC1.

At the subsequent stage of the connection point of the resistor SR1 of the + voltage line 890, one end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the other end of the capacitor SC2 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR1. The base terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the other end of the capacitor SC2, and is also connected to the other end of the resistor SR3 whose one end is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1. That is, the voltage of the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR1 via the resistor SR3. Further, the capacitor SC2 removes the ripple of the + voltage waveform and smoothes it.

At the subsequent stage of the connection point of the capacitor SC2 of the + voltage line 890, the collector terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the woofer signal smoothed after rectification, that is, the + voltage is applied. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR2, the other end of the resistor SR2 is connected to one end of the resistor SR4, and the other end of the resistor SR4 is connected to the 0V line 891. The resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4 are voltage dividing resistors.

One end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, the other end of the resistor SR5 is connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1, and the anode terminal of the Zener diode SZD1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR6. , The other end of the resistor SR6 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2. Further, one end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the base terminal of the transistor STR2, and the other end of the resistor SR7 is connected to the 0V line 891.

That is, the voltage at one end of the resistor SR7 that appears based on the output voltage of the emitter of the transistor STR1 is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2.

On the other hand, in the subsequent stage of the connection point of the + voltage line 890 with the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the anode terminal of the diode SD5 is connected to the + voltage line 890, and the cathode terminal of the diode SD5 is the anode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1. It is connected to the. Further, the cathode terminal of the infrared diode of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR2, and the emitter terminal of the transistor STR2 is connected to the 0V line 891.

That is, when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on.

[Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit] The abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895 mainly comprises a phototransistor of a photocoupler SPC1, a transistor STR3, and a relay SRL1. That is, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895 are connected through the photocoupler SPC1.

In the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895, the 24V supply line 886 is branched into two, one is connected to the collector terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 and the other is connected to the 8th terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1. Has been done. The emitter terminal of the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is connected to one end of the resistor SR8, the other end of the resistor SR8 is connected to one end of the resistor SR9, and the other end of the resistor SR9 is connected to the ground line 887. The resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9 are voltage dividing resistors.

The base terminal of the transistor STR3 for relay operation is connected to the connection point between the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9, and one end of the capacitor SC3 whose other end is connected to the ground line 887 is connected. The emitter terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the ground line 887, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is connected to the first terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 and the third terminal (one of the A contacts) of the relay SRL1.

Further, the 4th terminal (the other side of the A contact) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the ground line 887. Further, the 5th terminal (one of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is connected to the woofer + signal line 888, and the 6th terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1 is the lower speaker harness 819 as an external output of the woofer + signal. It is connected to the external lower speaker 821 through.

Further, a varistor SZNR1 for inductive current bypass by self-induction action is connected in parallel between the 8th terminal (coil + input) of the relay SRL1 and the 1st terminal (coil-input) of the relay SRL1 to form the 5th relay SRL1. A varistor SZNR2 for contact protection is connected in parallel between the terminal (one of the B contacts) and the sixth terminal (the other of the B contacts) of the relay SRL1.

Since the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 and the abnormal voice signal blocking circuit 895 are signal-connected by the photocoupler SPC1, electrical noise does not directly enter the abnormal voice signal blocking circuit 895 from the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885. It has become like.

Next, the operation of the circuit of the abnormal audio signal blocking board 884 configured as described above will be described.

[Operation when a normal audio signal is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885> When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage with different amplitude peaks) is input, rectification of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 In the bridge circuit, in the case of a woofer + signal, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 are conducted, a current flows from top to bottom through the resistor SR1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 122, and the peak of the peak from 0V of the + voltage waveform. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period until the voltage is reached.

When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage rise due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is not turned on and remains off.

Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0V, and the electric charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is transferred to the cathode terminal of the diode SD2 through the resistor SR1.

In the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 are conductive, and in FIG. 122, a current flows from top to bottom through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 to reach the peak voltage of the peak from 0V of the + voltage waveform. During the period, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged.

When a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the voltage rise due to the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 does not reach the base terminal voltage for operating the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is not turned on and remains off.

Next, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is discharged during the period from the peak voltage of the peak of the + voltage waveform to 0V, and the electric charge accumulated in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is transferred to the cathode terminal of the diode SD1 through the resistor SR1.

In this way, when a normal audio signal (waveform of AC voltage having different amplitude peaks) is input, the transistor STR1 of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 is maintained in the off state. Therefore, the infrared LED (photocoupler) of the transistor STR2 and the photocoupler SPC1 also keeps off, and the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 does not actually turn on.

<Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895> On the other hand, in the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895, the transistor STR3 also keeps the off state by keeping the photocoupler SPC1 off. Further, the relay SRL1 is in an inactive state. Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in a non-excited state, and the B contact (contact is closed) between the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 is inactive, and the 3rd and 4th terminals are inactive. It is an A contact (contact is open). Therefore, the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 are in a conductive state, and the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 is supplied and input to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819.

[When an abnormal voice signal that continues for a certain period of time is input] [Operation when an abnormal voice signal is input due to a fixed DC voltage] <Abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885> Abnormality due to a fixed DC voltage When a positive audio signal (for example, a constant voltage such as + 24V, + 18V, + 1.5V) is continuously input, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 are conducted in the rectifying bridge circuit of the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885, and FIG. 122 In, a charging current flows from top to bottom in the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1, and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 continues to be charged.

When an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the voltage rise at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 due to the increase in the charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 is applied over time. It approaches the constant voltage, and reaches the base terminal voltage that operates the transistor STR1. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

When the transistor STR1 is turned on, a current flows through the collector terminal of the transistor STR1, the emitter terminal of the transistor STR1, the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR4 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR2 and the resistor SR4) causes the current to flow. , Current flows through the resistor SR5, Zener diode SZD1, resistor SR6, and resistor SR7, and the voltage applied to the resistor SR7 (the voltage that appears at the connection point between the resistor SR6 and the resistor SR7) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR2 in the subsequent stage. This turns on the transistor STR2.

When the transistor STR2 is turned on, the collector voltage of the transistor STR2 is lowered to the 0V line 891 side, and the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on through the diode SD5. That is, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. Here, turning on the infrared LED of the photocoupler SPC1 corresponds to outputting the abnormality detection signal according to claim 1. The diode SD5 limits the current flowing through the infrared LED.

<Abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895> When the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, and a current flows to the ground through the phototransistor, the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9 of the photocoupler SPC1. Here, turning on the phototransistor of the photocoupler SPC1 means receiving an abnormality detection signal. The voltage applied to the resistor SR9 (the voltage appearing at the connection point between the resistor SR8 and the resistor SR9) is applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3, and the transistor STR3 is turned on. The voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor STR3 is smoothed by removing noise by the capacitor SC3.

When the transistor STR3 is turned on, the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, and the 1st terminal of the relay SRL1 connected to the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 is pulled down to the ground side, so that the 8th terminal and 1 of the relay SRL1 are pulled down. The coil inside the relay SRL1 between the terminal and the terminal is energized, and the relay SRL1 operates.

Therefore, the coil of the relay SRL1 is in the excited state, and the B contact (contact is open) between the 5th terminal and the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 in the operating state, and the operating state between the 3rd terminal and the 4th terminal. It becomes A contact (contact is closed). Therefore, the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 shift to the cutoff state, and the output of the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off.

Further, the 3rd and 4th terminals of the relay SRL1 shift to the conductive state, the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 is pulled down to the ground, and the collector terminal of the transistor STR3 connected to the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 becomes the ground. It is pulled down and the transistor STR3 is turned off.

On the other hand, the 1st terminal of the relay connected in parallel to the 3rd terminal of the relay SRL1 is also pulled down to the ground, so that the current flows through the 8th terminal, the 1st terminal, the 3rd terminal, the 4th terminal, and the ground line 887. It shifts to the flowing conductive state and the energized state of the coil is maintained. Therefore, the output of the UFA + signal from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 remains cut off.

In this way, when an abnormal audio signal with a fixed constant voltage is input, the abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885 detects that the audio signal is an abnormal audio signal and outputs an abnormality detection signal (photocoupler). Turns on). When the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 receives the abnormality detection signal output from the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 (when the photocoupler is turned on), the relay SRL1 operates to supply the abnormal voice signal to the lower speaker 821. To shut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the speaker from being damaged due to the continuous application of a fixed DC voltage to the speaker.

In the above-described embodiment, when an abnormal sound is input, the energized state of the coil of the relay SRL1 is maintained, and the output of the woofer + signal from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is kept cut off. Ultimately, safety measures are taken with the highest priority being to prevent damage to the speaker. Therefore, when the cause of the abnormal audio signal can be grasped by the staff or the like, or when the audio output stop state is confirmed, the operating state of the relay SRL1 is released by turning on the power of the gaming machine again. It is possible to return to the normal initial state.

[Operation when an abnormal audio signal due to an excessive AC voltage is input] <Abnormal audio signal detection circuit 885> When an abnormal audio signal due to an excessive AC voltage is input, that is, the audio signal is extremely amplified. When an excessive AC voltage exceeding the appropriate amplification width is input, for example, in the case of a woofer + signal, the diode SD2 and the diode SD3 are conducted, and in FIG. 122, the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is connected from top to bottom through the resistor SR1. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period from 0V of the + voltage waveform to the peak voltage of the peak when the charging current flows.

Further, for example, in the case of a woofer signal, the diode SD1 and the diode SD4 are conductive, and a charging current flows from top to bottom through the resistor SR1 through the resistor SR1 in FIG. 122, and the charging current flows from 0V to the peak of the + voltage waveform. The electrolytic capacitor SC1 is charged during the period up to the peak voltage.

In this case, since the peak voltage of the abnormal voice signal is extremely higher than the peak voltage of the normal voice signal, the resistance SR1 even if the width of the mountain-shaped waveform is the same between the normal waveform and the abnormal waveform. A charging current rapidly flows through the electrolytic capacitor SC1 and the electrolytic capacitor SC1 is rapidly charged.

Therefore, the electric charge stored in the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 through the resistor SR1 increases rapidly. Due to this rapid increase in electric charge, the voltage at the + terminal of the electrolytic capacitor SC1 rises and reaches the base terminal voltage at which the transistor STR1 is operated. Therefore, the transistor STR1 is turned on.

The operation of the abnormal voice signal detection circuit 885 and the operation of the abnormal voice signal cutoff circuit 895 after the transistor STR1 is turned on are the same as the operation when the abnormal voice signal due to the fixed DC voltage described above is input. Yes, I will explain it briefly.

When the transistor STR1 is turned on, the transistor STR2 is turned on, and when the transistor STR2 is turned on, the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on. In the abnormal audio signal cutoff circuit 895, when the photocoupler SPC1 is turned on, the transistor STR3 is turned on, and when the transistor STR3 is turned on, the relay SRL1 is activated and the 5th and 6th terminals of the relay SRL1 are cut off. The state shifts to the state, and the output of the woofer + signal of the woofer + signal line 888 from the 6th terminal of the relay SRL1 is cut off. As a result, the supply of the abnormal woofer + signal to the lower speaker 821 through the lower speaker harness 819 is cut off. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the generation of abnormal sound due to an abnormal voice signal having an excessive AC voltage that is extremely amplified and exceeds the appropriate amplification width. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from making an unpleasant sound.

[Liquid Crystal Control Unit] Next, as shown in FIG. 119, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 on the peripheral control board 4010 is the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor. , A liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c that displays and controls the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 described above, and a liquid crystal display device 1900. It is provided with a character ROM 4150d for storing various data of the screen displayed on the screen, and a character RAM 4150e for transferring and copying various data stored in the character ROM 4150d.

This liquid crystal control MPU4150a has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls the VDP4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to control the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the first. (Ii) Drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 3252 is performed. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. Further, the liquid crystal control MPU4150a receives an execution signal described later from the VDP4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252, as well as control data (display commands) from the peripheral control board 4010 and corresponding schedule data. A plurality of non-resident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display command) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e is defined.

The liquid crystal control MPU4150a extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4010 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP4150c, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and output to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU4150a is input, the VDP4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1900. Further, when the VDP4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU4150a, the VDP4150c outputs an executing signal to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU4150a. The VDP4150c employs a line buffer method. This "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left-right direction of the liquid crystal display device 1900 is held in the line buffer, and one line of drawing data held in the line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. This is a method of outputting to the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the character ROM 4150d, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1900 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1900. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the liquid crystal display device 1900. For example, when displaying various people on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are arranged on the screen and have a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "sprite superposition order"), and the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device is set. It is drawn on 3252.

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it can be expressed using a total of 6 characters arranged in, for example, horizontal 2 x vertical 3. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 intersect with a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels in order from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in the direction of movement. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1900, the main scanning is from left to right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the second liquid crystal display device 3252. And sequentially output to each line of pixels. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252 shift to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, this next line Based on the drawing data of the minutes, the main scanning is sequentially output to the pixels of one line from the left to the right when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1900 and the second liquid crystal display device 3252.

[Control Processing on Main Control Board] Next, an example of control processing executed on the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 to 132. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing a start opening winning process. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during fluctuation. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game start process. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game process. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100.

[About the main process] In the main process, as shown in FIG. 123, when the supply of electric power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU4100a executes the power-on process (step S1). In this power-on processing, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a) is normal (whether it is the set value at the time of power failure), and if it is normal. For example, according to the backup data stored in the RAM, the process of returning to the state at the time of power failure (processing at the time of power recovery) is executed, and if the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the device settings around the CPU (normal initial settings). , Setting the interruption timing, etc.).

If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM as backup data. If the RAM clear switch 4100c, which instructs the clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM in the power-on processing, is on, the RAM is cleared and the normal initial setting is performed. Further, in the power-on processing, if the backup data is not saved in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and the normal initial setting is performed.

Further, in the power-on processing, a process of setting a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been started to the peripheral control unit 4140 when the normal initial setting is executed is also executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control unit 4140 of the progress of the game such as the activation of the main control board 4100 and the game state when the power is cut off. Even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again supplied. When the supply is started, the power-on processing is executed.

When the power-on processing is completed, the main control MPU4100a starts a loop processing for repeatedly executing each processing for the game. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate at different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from the external power supply is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board, and then each of them is used. Supplying equipment. Then, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure warning signal indicating that the power supply voltage supply from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped is output. Will be sent. Then, when the power failure warning signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, the power failure occurrence processing is executed (step S4).

In this power failure processing, when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is in the state before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of power failure in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) as backup data in order to start from. The details of the processing will be described later, but in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing when a power failure occurs is not an interrupt processing but a branch processing executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the presence or absence of detection of a power failure warning signal. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power source is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step). S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

[Processing at the time of power failure] Next, as shown in FIG. 124, the process at the time of power failure is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. The main control MPU4100a first sets the interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether the contents of the RAM before the power failure are retained at the time of power recovery.

Subsequently, the main control MPU4100a sets a default value indicating that the power failure occurrence processing has been performed in the backup flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM (step S4c). After completing the above processing, the main control MPU4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), enters an infinite loop, and prepares for stopping the power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power outage or the like (hereinafter referred to as "instantaneous power failure"), the process when a power failure occurs is actually started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, the above process may not be able to recover from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically while the processing is normally performed, but the processing is started when a power failure occurs and the update is not performed. As a result, even if the process when the power is cut off occurs due to the momentary power failure and the infinite loop is entered, the reset is performed after a predetermined period of time elapses, and the main control MPU 4100a is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[About timer interrupt processing] Next, in the timer interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process. As shown in 125, the main control MPU4100a executes the process of steps S11 to S18 after executing the register save process (step S10). In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-mentioned switch (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated by the random number update process 1 and the random number updated by the random number update process 2 described above are different. The random number will be described later, but the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may also be updated in the random number update process 1. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

Further, in the special control process of step S14, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variablely displayed on the special symbol display 1185 and 1186 based on the progress state of the game, and the special electric accessory (that is, the attacker solenoid 2121) is used. The opening / closing member 2106) that opens / closes the large winning opening 2103 is controlled, and a process of changing the opening / closing state of the large winning opening 2103 is executed.

In step S15, a normal control process including a lottery process for winning a normal hit, which triggers the operation of the movable piece 2305, is executed. In this normal control process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game. Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is subjected to the lottery process so that the drive frequency of the movable piece 2305 becomes higher when a specific condition (ON of the time saving flag) is satisfied after the end of the jackpot game state. Is configured to execute (so-called time saving state). In this embodiment, the time required for controlling the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is shortened by a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game state, and the operating time when the movable piece 2305 is operated is set to a long time. By doing so, it is possible to realize a time-saving state in which the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2102 is easier than in the normal state (non-time-saving state).

In the output data setting process of the following step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating the game state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer, etc.) and a drive signal are output to a special figure start storage display (not shown). Execute processing, etc. In the command transmission process in step S17, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control unit 4140 is executed. Further, in the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control unit 4140 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processing of steps S11 to S17 is executed, the register restoration processing (step S18) is executed, and the processing ends.

Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the above-mentioned random number update process 1 (step S12) and random number update process 2 (step S3) will be described. In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, a random number for jackpot determination used for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state (also called a jackpot determination or a jackpot lottery), and a jackpot game state in the jackpot determination are used. Random numbers for jackpot symbols used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is determined to generate, and whether to perform high-expected effects such as reach production when it is judged that it is not a jackpot (loss) in the jackpot lottery Reach judgment random number used for judgment (reach judgment) of whether or not, variable display pattern random number used for determining fluctuation display pattern (variation time, etc.) of special symbol displayed on special symbol display 1185, 1186 (Random number for variable time), round determination random number used to determine the opening mode (number of rounds, etc.) of the big winning opening 2103 in the jackpot game (special bonus game), a pair of movable opening and closing of the second starting opening 2102 There are random numbers for normal hit determination used for determining whether or not to control the piece 2105 in the open state (normal lottery hit determination).

In addition, the random number for the jackpot symbol is also used for determining the state type of the jackpot (whether or not to activate the probability fluctuation function or the time saving function) that is performed when it is determined that the jackpot has been won.

Among these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, whether or not to control the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the round determination random number, and the pair of movable pieces 2105 related to the occurrence of the big hit game state in the open state. The random number for judgment per normal symbol involved is updated. That is, the random numbers used for the occurrence of the jackpot game state and the determination as to whether or not to control the pair of movable pieces 2105 to the open state are updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability of each random number in a predetermined period (probability of determining that a jackpot game state is generated, probability of determining that a pair of movable pieces 2105 is controlled in an open state) can be made constant. , It is possible to prevent the player from being in a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the jackpot game state is generated, the reach determination random number not related to the normal lottery, the variable display pattern random number, and the like are updated.

Although not shown in FIG. 125, in the timer interrupt process, the receiving unit 2550 (more specifically, the movable valve 2551 fixed to the front end of the movable shaft 2552) is periodically rotated regardless of the gaming state. The drive control process of the receiving drive motor 2558 to be generated is also performed.

[About the special control process] Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process.

In this special control process, first, the first and second starting port winning processes (step S110) are performed. In the first and second starting port winning processes, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102. Then, after the first and second start opening winning processes (step S110) are performed, among the plurality of processes (steps S120 to S230) shown in the figure, the process according to the state of the process flag is selectively selected. Will be done.

More specifically, when the first and second start opening winning processes (step S110) are completed, it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and if the processing flag is 0 (step S120). YES) in step S120) and the fluctuation start process (step S130) are executed. In this fluctuation start processing (step S130), the processing flag is updated to "1" after the setting for starting the fluctuation display of the special symbol is made based on the result of the lottery for winning the jackpot. ..

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 (first special symbol display 1185 or second special symbol display). After the variation time from the start of the variation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display in any of 1186 is determined), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). As a result, if the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the variable processing (step S180) is executed. In this variable processing, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and based on the time-out, the special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 is used. Stop the variable display of the symbol. After that, when it is determined in the fluctuation start process (step S130) that the jackpot has been won, the process selection flag is updated to "3". On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot has been lost (missing), the process selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing (step S130) is restarted.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S170), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S190). As a result, if the processing flag is 3 (YES in step S190), the jackpot game start processing (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, a condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is operated to perform a process of determining the mode of the jackpot game, and the determined mode of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds). ) Is set, and the accessory continuous operation device, which is one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game, is activated to update the processing flag to "4". On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

If the processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S190), the jackpot game processing (step S210) is executed assuming that the processing flag is 4. In this jackpot game process, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled based on the mode of the jackpot game set in the jackpot game mode determining process (step S607). Further, when the jackpot game is completed, the processing flag is updated to "0" after the processing for stopping the operation of the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing (step S130) is restarted.

As described above, when any of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S180, step S200, and step S210 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag, the special control process is terminated.

[About the first and second starting port winning processes] Next, the first and second starting port winning processes (processing in step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second starting port winning processes.

In the first and second starting port winning processes (step S110), the processing related to determining whether or not a game ball has been won in the first starting port 2101 and the second starting port 2102 and the winning process are largely performed. On the condition that it is determined that there was, the process for updating the pending state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed.

Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a first determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 3132. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting port sensor 3132, it is determined that the game ball has won the second starting port 2102 (YES in step S201), and then The process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second special symbol lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbols, etc.) are acquired, and the second is provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a). It is determined whether or not the value of the hold number counter is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold count counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a first, as the second start hold storage process (step S203), various data (random numbers for jackpot determination, for jackpot symbols) acquired by winning a game ball in the second start port 2102. Random numbers, etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of holding. Next, as the hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM.

In the process of step 203, a winning notification command indicating that the game ball has won the second starting port 2102 (more accurately, the type of special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set, and thus The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140, when the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like displays the hold display on the second starting port 2102 side, it can be quickly updated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 3132 is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second hold count counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the value is 4, then, as the process of step S205, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 3131. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting port sensor 3131, it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 2101 (YES in step S205), and then The process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first jackpot lottery (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbol, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU4100a is the upper limit. Judgment is made as to whether or not the value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold count counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a first, as the first start hold storage process (step S207), various data (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbol) acquired by winning a prize in the first start port 2101. Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the type of special symbol and the holding order. Next, as the hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM.

Also in the process of step 207, a winning notification command indicating that the game ball has won the first starting port 2101 (more accurately, the type of the special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set, and thus the winning notification command is set. The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, through control by the peripheral control unit 4140, it is possible to quickly update the case where the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like displays the hold display on the first start port 2101 side.

On the other hand, in the process of step S205, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first starting port 2101, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number has reached 4, the first and second starting port winning processes are terminated at this point.

In this embodiment, after the winning process for the second starting port 2102 (steps S201 to S204) is executed, the winning process for the first starting port 2101 (steps S205 to step S208) is executed. There is. However, instead of this, there may be a mode in which the winning process for the first starting port 2101 is executed and then the winning process for the second starting port 2102 is executed.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute the advance determination process based on the acquired various random numbers, and further transmit a command indicating the result of the advance determination process to the peripheral control unit 4140 as a winning notification command. The advance determination process is performed prior to the lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, the jackpot lottery, the probability variation lottery, and the determination of the variable display pattern described later), and the lottery result is determined in advance. Is. The advance determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the advance determination table. The advance determination table is the same table as the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the advance judgment process, by comparing the random number with the advance judgment table, the lottery result (win / miss of big hit, type of big hit, variable display pattern, etc.) when a lottery using the random number is performed is judged. (The determination made prior to the lottery in this way is also called "look-ahead determination"). Peripheral control unit 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received prize notification command (preceding determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is "look-ahead". Also called "directing").

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the preceding determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the contents of the prior determination table may be different from the contents of the table used for the lottery.

[Variation start processing] Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 128. FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation start processing.

In the fluctuation start process (step S130) executed when the process flag is "0", the main control MPU4100a first sets the values of the two hold count counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 (first start memory). It is determined whether or not both the number and the number of second start memories) are “0” (step S301). Here, the values in the two hold number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 1185 and 1186 are the disturbances stored in the storage areas (special symbol hold storage means 4214 and 4224) related to the first start storage and the second start storage. Therefore, if the values of the hold number counters are all "0" in this step S301 (YES), the variation processing of the first special symbol and the variation processing of the second special symbol are related. It is determined that none of the start conditions are satisfied, and then, as the process of step S318, the variation start process ends when the process flag is updated to "1".

On the other hand, if neither the first start memory number nor the second start memory number is "0" (NO in step S301), it is determined that the start condition is satisfied, and the jackpot lottery that is in the pending state is executed. In order to update the order of the above, shift processing is performed in the special symbol holding storage means 4214 and 4224 (steps S302 to S310).

Incidentally, the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 are each provided with four storage areas. In each of these storage areas, a random number storage area for jackpot determination in which random numbers for jackpot determination are stored, and random number storage for jackpot symbols in which random numbers for jackpot symbols, reach determination random numbers, variable display pattern random numbers, etc. are stored. Areas are provided respectively.

That is, the main control MPU4100a appropriately manipulates the random numbers stored in the storage means 4214 and 4224 as shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area when the special symbol fluctuates. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the game is played in the case where the big hit is won in the lottery process on the first special symbol side and the case where the big hit is won in the lottery process on the second special symbol side. There is no difference in the expected value of the profit given to the person (such as the number of prize balls that can be obtained).

In the shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, the execution of the lottery of the first special symbol is always postponed, and the lottery based on the winning of the second starting port 2102 (lottery of the second special symbol) is performed. The random numbers stored in the storage means 4214 and 4224 are manipulated so that all of them are digested first.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 128, in the shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the processing of step S302, the second special symbol display 1186, which is the side that is preferentially digested. It is determined whether or not the value (second start storage number) of the hold number counter corresponding to is "0", that is, whether or not a random number is stored in the storage area of the second special symbol hold storage means 4224. As a result, when it is determined that the random number is stored in the storage area of the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 (NO in step S302), the random number related to the second special symbol is read from the storage area and stored. Acquire (step S303). That is, as will be described later, the random numbers read in this way (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbols, random numbers for reach determination, random number of variation display pattern) are not only processed for the lottery of jackpots, but also the variation pattern (variation) of the special symbol. A game to the second starting port 2102 by being subjected to a process for setting the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2106, a process for setting the gaming state, and the like. The second starting game can be advanced with the winning of the ball.

Next, the main control MPU4100a sets various random numbers stored in each nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas in order to update the digestion order related to the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side. Each shifts to the first storage area (step S304). As a result, at least the storage area becomes free, and new start information (holding) for the second special symbol can be stored in the free storage area.

After that, the main control MPU4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "1" so that the game on the second special symbol side (second start game) is in progress (step S305). ). Further, in order to update the number of holdings related to the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side, the holding number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is subtracted by "1" (step S306). At this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp 1187 so that the number of holds for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side updated in this way is reflected in the lighting mode of the second special symbol storage display 1187. Is done. The special symbol variation flag set to "1" in this way is reset after the variation start processing is completed, for example, when the processing flag is updated to "0".

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 128, when it is determined in the process of step S302 that the random number is not stored in the storage area of the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 (YES in step S302), the second (I) A random number related to the first special symbol is read from the storage area of the special symbol reservation storage means 4214 and acquired (step S307). That is, as will be described later, the random numbers read in this way are processed not only for the lottery of big hits, but also for the setting of the variation pattern of the special symbol, the processing for setting the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2106, and the setting of the gaming state. The first starting game can be advanced with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2101 as a result of being subjected to the processing related to the above.

Next, the main control MPU4100a sets various random numbers stored in the nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) storage areas in order to update the digestion order related to the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side. Each shifts to the first storage area (step S308). As a result, at least the storage area becomes free, and new start information (holding) for the first special symbol can be stored in the free storage area.

After that, the main control MPU4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "2" so that the game on the first special symbol side (first starting game) is in progress (step S309). ). Further, in order to update the number of holdings related to the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side, the holding number counter corresponding to the first special symbol is subtracted by "1" (step S310). At this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp 1184 so that the number of holds for the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side updated in this way is reflected in the lighting mode of the first special symbol storage display 1184. Is done. Similarly, the special symbol variation flag set to "2" is reset after the variation start processing is completed, for example, when the processing flag is updated to "0".

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation function is operating, that is, whether or not the probability fluctuation state is high (step S312), and if it is not in the probability fluctuation state (NO in step S312), when the probability fluctuation is not activated. Select the jackpot determination table, that is, the table in which the probability of becoming a jackpot is set low, while in the case of the probability fluctuation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of the probability fluctuation operation, that is, the probability of becoming a jackpot is Select a table with a high setting. In this example, the probability of winning a jackpot is set to 1/320 when the probability fluctuation is not activated (that is, normal time), and the probability of winning a jackpot is 10 when the probability fluctuation is activated (that is, when the probability is high). It is set to / 320.

After any table is selected in the process of step S313 or step S314, the jackpot determination random number related to any special symbol acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307 based on the table is a jackpot. It is determined whether or not it is a random number (big hit value) corresponding to (step S315). Then, in the case of a jackpot value (YES in step S315), the jackpot is probable based on the random number for the jackpot symbol related to any of the special symbols also acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307. It is determined whether or not the variable function or the time saving function is activated (state type related to the game state) (step S316). As a result, the flag corresponding to the jackpot state type determined in the process of step S316 is set to the ON state (set) (step S317), and the process proceeds to step S318. The jackpot symbol random number is, for example, a random number from 0 to 9, and when the jackpot symbol random number obtained from these is, for example, 7, the jackpot flag of a specific type is turned ON in step S317.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of whether the lottery is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the random number for the jackpot symbol is, for example, 0 to 299 as described above. A random number value to be generated is prepared, and in the process of step S303 or step S307, one of these random number values is acquired as a value of a random number for a jackpot symbol. Then, the acquired random number value is subjected to a process of determining whether or not it is a jackpot state type that activates the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function in the process of step S316.

[Regarding the variation pattern setting process] Next, the variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the lottery (step S315) for winning the jackpot will be described. FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

As shown in FIG. 129, in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is “1”, the main control MPU4100a first sets the jackpot flag to “ON” as the process of step S401. Judge whether or not. As a result, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is "ON" (YES in step S401), the jackpot fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed so that the fluctuation pattern when the jackpot is won is set. (Step S402).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S401 that the jackpot flag is not "ON", it is next determined whether or not to perform the reach effect as the process of step S403. As a result, when it is determined that the reach effect is to be performed (YES in step S403), the reach loss variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern of the reach effect is set, although it is a loss (step S404). ..

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S403 that the reach effect is not performed, the non-reach loss variation pattern table setting process is performed as the process of step S405 so that the loss effect is performed without performing the reach effect. I do.

The table set in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern table setting process is prepared in such a way that it is associated with each of a plurality of gaming states. For example, in the normal gaming state, the number of holdings is a predetermined value or more. At some point, shortening fluctuations are made.

Then, when the selection table related to the fluctuation pattern is set in any of the processes of step S402, step S404, and step S405, the main control MPU4100a then performs the set selection table as the process of step S410. The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on. Next, as the process of step S411, the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol thus determined is set as the effect command, and the winning information command (winning of the jackpot, etc.) is set.

Further, the value of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON (step S413). When this special symbol LED operation flag is set to ON, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol is based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variable display related to the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs as the display 1186 is started. After that, the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414), and the variation pattern setting process is completed.

By the way, the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 125 as an effect command set in the process of step S411. .. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the result of the jackpot lottery is shown based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command through the control by the peripheral control unit 4140 side. Display effects will be performed.

[About the fluctuating process] Next, the fluctuating process (step S180) executed when the processing flag is "2" will be described. FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 130, in the variable processing (step S180), the main control MPU4100a first sets the variable time in the timer in the processing of the above step S412 (see FIG. 129) as the processing of the step S501. Determines if the time is up. If the fluctuation time set in the timer has not timed up (NO in step S501), the processing during fluctuation is terminated.

If the fluctuation time set in the timer is timed up (YES in step S501), the special figure LED operation flag set to ON in the process of step S413 is set to OFF (step S502). When this special symbol LED operation flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol is based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variation display (variation of the special symbol) related to the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs as the display 1186 will be terminated. Further, in order to end the display effect of the jackpot lottery on the liquid crystal display device 1900, a confirmation stop command indicating to the peripheral control unit 4140 that the effect result of the display effect should be confirmed and displayed. Is set (step S503). The fixed stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control unit 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 125. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1900, the effect result in the display effect is confirmed and displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control unit 4140 side.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S504). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S504), the processing flag is updated to "3" as the special symbol is in the processing stage where the fluctuation is stopped so as to indicate that the jackpot has been won (step S505). , Ends the processing during the change. On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is not ON and the jackpot is lost (NO in step S504), it is assumed that the special symbol is in the processing stage where the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped so as to indicate that the jackpot was lost. Is updated to "0" (step S508), and the processing during the change is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation related to the special symbol is performed on condition that the interrupt is suspended and digested in the process of step S130.

[Regarding the jackpot game start process] Next, the jackpot game start process (step S200) executed when the processing flag is "3" will be described. FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game start process.

As shown in FIG. 131, in the jackpot game start process (step S200), the main control MPU4100a first starts the operation of the condition device as one of the conditions for executing the jackpot game (step S604). .. When the time saving function is operating (YES in step S605), the operation of the time saving function is stopped based on the start of the operation of the condition device (step S606). If it is determined in step S605 that the time saving function is not operating (NO in step S605), step S606 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S607.

In step S607, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game executed this time is a jackpot (per first special figure) as a result of the special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2101. To. If it is determined in step S607 that the first special figure is hit (YES in step S607), the number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) and the maximum opening time per round (for example, 30 sec) and the maximum opening time per round (for example, 30 sec) and The maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 balls) is set (step S608).

If it is determined in step S607 that it is not a second special figure hit (NO in step S607), the jackpot game executed this time is the result of a special lottery performed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2102. It is determined whether or not is a big hit (per second special figure) (step S609). If it is determined in step S609 that it is a second special figure (YES in step S609), the number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) and the maximum opening time per round (for example, 30 sec) and the maximum opening time per round (for example, 30 sec) and The maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 balls) is set (step S610). After that, the process proceeds to step S611, the processing flag is updated to "4", and the jackpot game start process is completed.

[Regarding the jackpot game process] Next, the jackpot game process (step S210) executed when the processing flag is "4" will be described. FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game process.

As shown in FIG. 132, in the jackpot game process (step S210), the main control MPU4100a first, as the process of step S801, first receives the jackpot game corresponding to the current jackpot game (first jackpot 2103 or first jackpot 2103 or first). It is determined whether or not the two major winning openings 2153) are open. When the corresponding large winning opening 2103, 2153 is open (YES in step S801), then, as the process of step S802, the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the corresponding large winning opening 2103, 2153 is set. It is determined whether or not the opening / closing operation time limit set in the process of step S608 or step S610 (see FIG. 131) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation time limit has elapsed (YES in step S802), the corresponding large winning openings 2103, 2153 are closed by closing the opening / closing members 2106, 2156 (step). S804).

However, even if it is determined in the process of step S802 that the set opening / closing operation time limit has not yet elapsed (NO in step S802), the corresponding large winning openings 2103 and 2153 are opened. The number of game balls that have entered the opened large winning openings 2103 and 2153 after being played exceeds the upper limit (for example, 9) set in the process of step S608 or step S610 (see FIG. 131). If this is the case (YES in step S803), the process proceeds to step S804 and the open large winning openings 2103 and 2153 are closed. On the other hand, the opening / closing operation time limit set above has not yet passed (NO in step S802), and the number of game balls that have entered the corresponding large winning openings 2103 and 2153 has not yet reached the upper limit. If not (NO in step S803), the corresponding large winning openings 2103 and 2153 are maintained in the open state until the conditions of step S802 or step S803 are satisfied. Then, when the conditions of step S802 or step S803 are satisfied, the jackpot game process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of step S801 that none of the big winning openings 2103 is being opened, the number of times of opening the corresponding large winning openings 2103 and 2153 (the number of round games) is set to the number of round games. It is determined whether or not the maximum number of rounds set in the process of step S610 (see FIG. 131) has been reached (step S805). If it has not reached (NO in step S805), the corresponding opening / closing members 2106 and 2156 are operated to open the corresponding large winning openings 2103 and 2153 (step S806), and the big hit game process is completed. ..

On the other hand, in the process of step S805, when it is determined that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is stopped, so that a big hit (a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device). ), The operation (big hit game) of the opening / closing members 2106, 2156, which is performed on the condition that the player is elected, will be disabled. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processes of steps S807 to S812 to execute the jackpot game stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a). Based on the winning type, the game state after the jackpot game is set, and then the jackpot game process is terminated. The winning species here refers to whether or not the winning species operates the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function.

In the process of step S805, when it is determined that the round game has already been performed for the maximum number of rounds (YES in step S805), first, the jackpot flag and the jackpot game in-game flag are operated to the OFF states (YES). Step S807). After that, the probability fluctuation function is activated (step S809), the time saving function is activated (step S810), and then the process proceeds to the process of step S811. Step S811 is a process of stopping the operation of the condition device. When the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S811), the jackpot game process ends when the processing flag is set to "0" (step S812).

According to such a jackpot game process, the corresponding jackpots 2103 and 2153 are opened according to the type of jackpot until it is determined in the process of step 805 that the round game has reached the maximum number of rounds. It will be repeatedly opened according to the mode (step S802, step S803, step S805), and eventually the prize ball according to the type of jackpot can be obtained by the player.

[Regarding the normal control process] FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the procedure for an example of the normal control process (step S15).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2302 is in the ON state in the process of step S901 and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2301, as shown in FIG. 133, the main control board 4100 As the process of step S902, the main control MPU4100a first executes a gate portion passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from a random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM.

Next, in the normal control process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. 1. 2. Normal symbol normal processing (step S903) in which a normal random number stored in the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a is read, and a lottery process for displaying the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is performed based on the read normal random number. Normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S904) in which a lottery process is performed for the fluctuation mode (variation time) of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1189 based on the normal symbol fluctuation random number. 3. Normal symbol fluctuation processing (step S905) that waits until the fluctuation display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1189 is stopped. Stop the fluctuation display of the normal symbol so that the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped, is displayed on the normal symbol display 1189. Normal symbol stop processing (step S906) 5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode suggesting "hit the normal figure", the movable piece 2305 is slid to the back side to move the game ball to the second starting port 2102. Ordinary electric accessory opening process (step S907) for executing a process for controlling acceptance.

The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S903) should be performed in the process of initializing the data stored in the various registers and the main control built-in RAM 4100e.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate portion passing process (step S902).

Now, assuming that the detection signal by the gate sensor 2302 is in the ON state in the process of step S901 and it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2301, as shown in FIG. 134, the main control board 4100 As the process of step S911, the main control MPU 4100a first acquires the counter value by the normal hold number counter from the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

In the process of step S911, when it is determined that the number of reserved symbols is not the maximum value, the following processes of steps S912 to S914 are performed in order to newly put the variable display control of the ordinary symbols into the pending state. Will be done. That is, first, as the process of step S912, the normal hold number counter is counted up (1 addition). Next, as the process of step S913, a normal random number and a normal random number are acquired from the random number counter. Next, as the process of step S914, each random number thus acquired is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal hold number counter in the storage area of the RAM 4100e of the main control MPU 4100a.

However, in the process of step S911, when it is determined that the number of reserved normal symbols is the maximum value, the fluctuation display control of the ordinary symbols is not newly suspended. That is, by not executing the processes of steps S912 to S914, the fluctuation display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S903).

When the normal control flag indicates that the normal symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 135, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first performs the normal hold number counter as the processing in step S921. Based on the counter value by, it is determined whether or not there is a fluctuation display control of the normal symbol in the pending state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU4100a is next as the process of step S922. Random numbers stored in the earliest storage area among random numbers (for example, ordinary random numbers and random numbers that fluctuate in the normal map) related to the display mode of Then, as the processing of steps S923 and S924, the normal hold number counter is counted down and the main control MPU410 is used.
First-in first-out (First-In First-Out) of random numbers (ordinary random numbers, ordinary symbol variable random numbers) related to the display mode when the variable display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal hold storage area of the RAM of 0a is stopped. Shift operation is performed according to the mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2301 are stored in order from the first (first) area. To do. Then, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 when the random number is stored in the nth (n = 1-3) storage area, the random number extracted in the n + 1th (n = 1-3) storage area is stored. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored. Various random numbers stored in are moved to the N-1st (N = 2-4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the hold of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs can be identifiable and stored, and the hold of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (hold that occurred first).

Next, if the current gaming state of the main control board 4100 is a time saving state (low probability time saving state, probability variation time saving gaming state) (step S926), the main control MPU 4100a is a collision detection table for the time saving (not shown). Is selected (step S926), and if the current gaming state is a non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S925), a non-time saving collision detection table (not shown). Is selected (step S927), and the selected normal symbol hit detection table is compared with the ordinary random number read in step S922 of the ordinary symbol normal processing (step S928).

The normal figure hit detection table is stored in the ROM 4100d of the main control MPU 4100a, and is used when the game state is a time saving time (low probability time saving state and probability variation time saving game state). It is provided with a non-time-saving collision detection table used when the game state is non-time-saving (low-probability non-time-saving state, high-probability non-time-saving state). Then, in the time-saving normal figure hit detection table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random numbers were won, and the normal figure The above-mentioned ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as not to match the deviation determination value in the normal figure indicating the deviation. In this way, in the short time, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301, it is always won and the movable piece 2305 is slid to the back side to move the game ball to the second starting port 2102. It controls the acceptance of.

In addition, in the non-time saving normal figure hit detection table referred to for comparison with the normal random numbers, it is possible that all 255 types of normal random numbers match the normal figure hit judgment value indicating that the normal random numbers have been won. However, ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value of the normal figure, which indicates that the normal figure is out of order. In this way, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 during non-time reduction, the movable piece 2305 is slid to the back side and the second starting port 2102 is not won. There is no control over the acceptance of game balls into. However, as described above, the winning of the normal symbol may be obtained even in the non-time saving state. In this case, the winning probability (for example, 50%) is lower than that of the time saving state, and the lottery result of the normal symbol is won. At that time, the movable piece 2305 of the second starting port 2102 is retracted for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, for 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received by the second starting port 2102, and then slid toward the front side again. The acceptance of the game ball into the second starting port 2102 may be disabled.

When the main control MPU4100a of the main control board 4100 is determined to be a normal figure hit as a result of comparison between the selected normal figure hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing (step S929). , After setting the normal symbol hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won per normal symbol (step S930), the normal symbol per symbol as the mode when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (the normal symbol stop symbol). (Step S931), on the other hand, if it is determined that the selected normal symbol hit determination table is out of the ordinary symbol as a result of comparison with the ordinary random number read in step S922 of the normal symbol normal processing, the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is performed. A symbol that is out of the ordinary symbol as a stop mode (stop symbol of the normal symbol) is determined (step S932). After that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S904) (step S933), this process ends.

[Control processing of peripheral control board] Next, a process executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 will be described. FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU4140a performs the initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4010 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, the loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU4140a generates an interrupt every 2 ms and executes a 2 ms steady state process. In the 2 ms steady processing, the process of counting up the 16 ms progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 ms progress monitor counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 ms progress monitor counter becomes 8, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, 16 ms has elapsed. Along with setting the flag T, the process of resetting (setting 0) the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 ms in the 2 ms steady processing, and is usually set (reset) to "0". When the 16 ms elapsed flag is set in step S1002 (16 ms elapsed flag T is “1”), after resetting the 16 ms elapsed flag (step S1003), 16 ms steady processing is performed (step S1004).

In this 16 ms steady processing, a process of controlling the liquid crystal display device 1900, the lamp / LED, the speakers 130, 222, 262 and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 4100. When the 16 ms steady processing is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and the above steps S1003 to S1004 are repeated every time the 16 mS progress flag T is set, that is, every 16 ms. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag T is not set in step S1002 (16 ms elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of a 16 ms steady-state process executed every 16 ms in the sub-main process. In the 16 ms steady-state process, the peripheral control MPU4140a executes the processes of steps S1101 to S1106. In the command analysis process of step S1101, the command received from the main control board 4100 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S1102, the control process related to the liquid crystal display device 1900 is executed based on the reception of the variation pattern command transmitted by setting the variation pattern (step S411).

Further, in the sound control process of step S1103, the control process related to the speakers 130, 222, 262 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S1104, the control process related to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S1105, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp drive board 3041 is executed. In the random number update process of step S1106, a process of updating the random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S1102) is executed.

The processing of steps S1101 to S1106 in the 16ms steady processing is completed within 16ms. Even if it takes 16 ms or more from the start of the 16 ms steady process to the end of the 16 ms steady process, the 16 ms steady process is immediately started from the beginning (command of step S1101) when 16 ms has passed since the start of the 16 ms steady process. Do not execute (from the analysis process). That is, when 16 ms elapses during the execution of the 16 ms steady state process, only the 16 ms progress flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1102 that the 16 ms progress flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady state process, the 16 ms steady process is performed. To start.

Further, in this embodiment, the random number update process (step S1106) is executed in the 16 ms steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) for updating various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop processing and the 16ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

[Game Content] The game content of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the main control board. First, a functional configuration related to game effect control on the main control board 4100 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 120 and the like. The functional configuration related to the payout of the game ball will be omitted. In the main control board 4100 of this example, various game controls, effect controls, and the like are realized by executing a predetermined program stored in advance in a ROM (not shown) by the main control MPU 4100a. When a game ball detection signal is input from the gate sensor 2302 to the main control board 4100, a normal random number generating means 4200 that generates a predetermined normal random number that is a lottery result for a normal symbol, and a generated normal random number are predetermined. The ROM of the main control board 4100 stores the normal symbol holding storage means 4202 that temporarily stores the normal symbol according to the conditions of the above and the normal symbol variation pattern corresponding to the normal random number that is stored and executed by the normal symbol holding storage means 4202. The normal symbol variation pattern selection means 4204 selected from the predetermined normal symbol variation pattern table stored in the normal symbol display control means for displaying the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 1189 in a variable manner based on the selected normal symbol variation pattern. When the ordinary random number (ordinary lottery result) displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1189 by the ordinary symbol display control means 4206 is "ordinary hit", the start port solenoid 2114 is driven to expand the pair of movable pieces 2105. It is provided with a start port opening / closing control means 4208 for causing the operation, and a normal symbol storage number display control means 4210 for displaying the number of ordinary symbol random numbers stored in the ordinary symbol hold storage means 4202 as a storage number on the ordinary symbol storage display 1188. There is.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol holding storage means 4202 uses a predetermined number (for example, four) of ordinary random numbers generated by the detection signal of the game ball from the gate sensor 2302 while the ordinary symbol is fluctuatingly displayed by the ordinary symbol display control means 4206. ), And the execution of the memorized ordinary random numbers is suspended until the variable display of the ordinary symbol becomes possible.

Further, the main control board 4100 has a predetermined first special lottery result for the first special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the first start port sensor 3131 due to the start winning of the first start port 2101. The first special random number generating means 4212 for generating a special random number, the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 for temporarily storing the first special random number generated in the first special random number generating means 4212 according to a predetermined condition, A predetermined special symbol variation display pattern stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100 for the first special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the first special random number stored and executed by the first special symbol reservation storage means 4214. The first special symbol of the first special symbol display 1185 is selected based on the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216 selected from the table and the first special symbol variation pattern selected by the first special symbol variation pattern selection means 4216. The first special symbol display control means 4218 for variable display and the first special symbol storage display 1184 for displaying the number of first special random numbers held and stored by the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 as stored numbers. A symbol storage number display control means 4220 is provided. Although not shown in FIG. 120, the main control board 4100 is further provided with a first jackpot symbol random number generating means and a second jackpot symbol random number generating means. When the result of the first special lottery is a big hit, the random number generated by the random number generation means for the first big hit symbol is acquired, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol is determined. Similarly, when the result of the second special lottery is a big hit, the random number generated by the random number generation means for the second big hit symbol is acquired, and the stop symbol of the second special symbol is determined.

Further, the main control board 4100 has a predetermined second special lottery result for the second special symbol based on the detection signal detected by the second start port sensor 3132 due to the start winning of the second start port 2102. A second special random number generating means 4222 for generating a special random number, a second special symbol holding storage means 4224 for temporarily storing the second special random number generated in the second special random number generating means 4222 according to a predetermined condition, A predetermined special symbol variation display pattern stored in advance in the ROM of the main control board 4100 for the second special symbol variation pattern corresponding to the second special random number executed after being stored in the second special symbol reservation storage means 4224. The second special symbol of the second special symbol display 1186 is selected based on the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226 selected from the table and the second special symbol variation pattern selected by the second special symbol variation pattern selection means 4226. The second special symbol display control means 4228 for variable display and the second special symbol storage display 1187 for displaying the number of the second special random numbers held and stored by the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 as a storage number. It is provided with a symbol storage number display control means 4230.

The first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 have new special symbols such as the first and second special symbols being variablely displayed by the first and second special symbol display control means 4218 and 4228. When the variable display cannot be performed, a predetermined number of first special random numbers and second special random numbers triggered by detection signals from the first start port sensor 3131 and the second start port sensor 3132 (for example, four each) ), And the execution of the memorized first special random number and second special random number is suspended until the variable display of the special symbol becomes possible.

In the main control board 4100, the first special random number and the second special random number held by the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 are given to the starting ports 2101, 1022 as a starting prize. It is provided with a priority hold digestion means 4231 that preferentially executes (digests) the second special random number over the timing, and the priority hold digestion means 4231 relates to the second special random number, that is, the second starting port 2102. The hold of the lottery result is prioritized and executed (digested).

Further, on the main control board 4100, the first special random number (first special lottery result) and the second special random number (second special lottery result) stored in the first special symbol holding storage means 4214 and the second special symbol holding storage means 4224 An advantageous game state generating means 4232 that generates an advantageous gaming state that gives the player an advantage based on the special lottery result), and an opening / closing member 2106 that closes the large winning opening 2103 based on an instruction from the advantageous gaming state generating means 4232. It is provided with a large winning opening opening / closing control means 4234 that controls the drive of the attacker solenoid 2121 so as to open / close in a predetermined pattern.

Further, on the main control board 4100, according to the first special random number and the second special random number (first special symbol variation pattern and second special symbol variation pattern) in which the advantageous gaming state is generated by the advantageous gaming state generating means 4232, Further, the variation pattern table changing means 4236 for changing the first special symbol variation pattern table and the second special symbol variation pattern table is provided. The fluctuation pattern table changing means 4236 may be changed to, for example, a fluctuation pattern table (for example, a high probability fluctuation pattern table) in which a fluctuation pattern in which an advantageous gaming state occurs is selected with a higher probability than a normal fluctuation pattern table (for example). Change to a fluctuation pattern table (for example, time reduction fluctuation pattern table) in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is shorter than that of the normal fluctuation pattern table (so-called probability variation) (so-called time reduction). It is changed to a variation pattern table (for example, a probability variation time reduction variation pattern table) in which the probability that an advantageous gaming state occurs is higher than usual and the variation time of the special symbol is short (so-called probability variation / time reduction).

Further, the main control board 4100 has a normal symbol variation pattern, a first symbol variation pattern, a second symbol variation pattern, and a first special symbol memory according to the ordinary random number, the first special random number, and the second special random number. Command generation means 4238 that generates commands for predetermined control such as effect commands based on the second special symbol memory, etc., and command transmission means 4240 that sends the commands generated by the command generation means 4238 to the peripheral control unit 4140. And have.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle device 500 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5, the game ball stored in the upper plate 301 of the plate unit 300 is a transparent game. It is driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 arranged on the front surface of the panel 1200, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 1100 will flow down in the game area 1100 on the upper left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle device 500, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the driving is possible. Further, in the game area 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in front of the game panel 1200 at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails so that the game ball flows down. While the speed is suppressed, various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500, the center is centered by a plurality of obstacle nails or the inclined upper surface of the peripheral wall portion 2503. You will be guided to the area on the left side of the accessory 2500. Further, when the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the right side of the highest portion of the peripheral wall portion 2503 of the center accessory 2500, it is guided to the gate portion 2301.

Then, when the game ball that has flowed down the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 enters and passes through the gate portion 2301 of the gate unit 2300 and is detected by the gate sensor 2302, it is mainly based on the detection signal. In the control board 4100, the ordinary random number generating means 4200 generates an ordinary random number as a result of the ordinary lottery. Then, based on the ordinary random number, the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 1189 in the function display unit 1180 is variablely displayed (the ordinary symbol display 1189 composed of one LED emits light alternately in red, green, and orange). After a predetermined time (for example, an extremely short time such as 0.08 seconds) elapses, the normal symbol extracted based on the normal random number (normal lottery result) is stopped and displayed (the normal symbol display 1189 emits light in either red or green). Ru. The variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed based on the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected from the predetermined ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table in the ordinary symbol variation pattern selection means 4204.

By the way, in this example, when the passage of the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 2302 while the normal symbol is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display 1189, the changing normal symbol is stopped and the normal symbol is generated and extracted first. Until the result of the random number is confirmed, the ordinary random number (including the ordinary symbol variation pattern) extracted based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2302 is temporarily stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage means 4202 and displayed. It is designed to be held, and the number of stored ordinary random numbers (also referred to as the number of held numbers) is displayed on the normal symbol storage display 1188. This ordinary symbol storage display 1188 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of stored LEDs is suggested by the number of each LED that lights up. In this example, up to four LEDs are stored and displayed. ing. When the number of stored items exceeds four, the ordinary random numbers extracted based on the detection signal of the gate sensor 2302 are discarded.

Further, the game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 and has flowed down the left side of the center accessory 2500 is moved to the center side of the game area 1100 under the center accessory 2500 by the shelves 2202 and 2203 of the front side unit 2200. It is supposed to be. Then, when a game ball wins a general winning opening 2104, 2201, starting opening 2101, 1022, and a large winning opening 2103, 2153 arranged below the center accessory 2500, and the winning is detected by various sensors, Based on the detection signal, the main control board 4100 transmits a predetermined payout command to the payout control board 4110, and the payout control board 4110 controls the payout motor 744 of the prize ball device 740 in response to the payout command. The number of game balls according to the winning destination is paid out to the upper plate 301.

The game ball driven into the game area 1100 is placed in any of the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, the first large winning opening 2103, and the second major winning opening 2153. If no prize is won, the game is discharged downward from the rear side of the game board 4 from the out port 1151 provided at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game area 1100. Further, no matter which of the general winning openings 2104 and 2201, the first starting opening 2101, the second starting opening 2102, the first major winning opening 2103, and the second major winning opening 2153, the game ball wins a prize. Is discharged downward on the rear side of the game board 4 without being returned to the game area 1100.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1185 and the second special symbol display 1186 is directly controlled by the main control board 4100. On the other hand (see FIG. 120), the variation display of the symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like is performed by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control based on the command related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control unit 4140. It is controlled by the unit 4150. As a result, since the peripheral control unit 4140 or the like controls the variation display of the symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like that the player pays particular attention to, there is a lottery result related to the lottery result transmitted from the main control board 4100. For one command, a plurality of symbol variation patterns can be prepared in advance to increase the number of symbol variation patterns in the liquid crystal display device 1900 or the like. Further, the "big hit game effect image" and the like displayed during the "big hit" game are also controlled by the peripheral control unit 4140 and the like, and various patterns of effect images are prepared in advance. As a result, it is possible to increase the display pattern of the effect image displayed without increasing the load of arithmetic processing on the main control board 4100, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be more entertaining to the player and less likely to get bored. It has become.

Further, one of the purposes of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is to further increase the number of game balls that can be obtained in one jackpot game (2000 pieces). It may have a loop performance that enables the jackpot game, which enables the payout of a large number of game balls, to be repeatedly executed at a high continuation rate. However, for example, in a game state in which the game can be executed under conditions favorable to the player in which both the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function are activated, the payout is possible per unit time. The performance will be excessive, and as a result, there is a possibility that the interest in the game will be excessively increased, and there is a concern that the burden on the hall side will be excessive.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in the probability variation time-shortening gaming state, the second special symbol is made easier to accept the game medium to the second starting port 2102 than to the first starting port 2101. While encouraging the lottery process on the side, the jackpot probability in the high probability state is slightly higher than the jackpot probability in the low probability state (less than twice the jackpot probability in the low probability state). Probability values (for example, less than 1/100), which are generally considered to be low probabilities (for example, less than 1/100), are to be adopted. More specifically, in the lottery process of the first special symbol, even if the jackpot is won, the low probability state and the high probability state are set even though the expected value of the quantity less than 500 is paid out. In any of these cases, a low jackpot probability of around "1/200", which is far from paying out such a quantity, is adopted. In addition, even in the lottery process on the second special symbol side, in both the low probability state and the high probability state, the low jackpot probability that is the same as that of the first special symbol side (low jackpot probability of around 1/200). ) Is adopted. According to such a configuration, even when the loop performance that can be repeatedly executed at a high continuation rate exceeding 50% of the jackpot game that can pay out a large number of game balls is provided. It will be possible to avoid excessive ball ejection performance that can be paid out per unit time.

However, the jackpot probability in the high-probability state is generally low, slightly higher than the jackpot probability in the low-probability state (less than twice the jackpot probability in the low-probability state). If the probability value (for example, less than 1/100), which is regarded as a probability, is simply adopted, the game or the production when the game is in an advantageous game state may be excessively delayed. There is a concern that the interest will decline. However, in the conventional game machine, even if the control for facilitating the acceptance of the game ball to the start port is executed (time saving state), the identification of each time the game ball is inserted into the start port. In many cases, the probability of entering the starting port was not set so high in order to avoid excessive payout of prize balls. That is, in this case, when the jackpot probability is set to the same low probability value in the low probability state and the high probability state, the game speed in the probabilistic time short game state cannot be sufficiently increased. Then, it is difficult to suppress the occurrence of an excessive delay in the game or the production when the game is in an advantageous game state.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, when even one game ball that has been driven into the game area 1100 but has not been accepted by the second starting port 2102 is generated, the game is played. The payout of the specific prize balls each time the game balls are accepted at the second starting port 2102 is set to "1" so that the total number of the specific prize balls does not exceed the total number of the game balls driven into the area 1100. Suppression control is to be performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an excessive total amount of starting prize balls paid out each time the ball is received at the second starting port 2102 (at the second starting port 2102). No matter how high the ball entry probability is, the player's ball will not increase due to the payout according to the entry.) Therefore, even in a time-saving state (probability variation time-saving gaming state, etc.), the probability of accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2102 can be increased without considering the balance with the specific prize ball. become. And, due to such a high acceptance probability, in a time saving state (probability variation time saving game state, etc.), the game balls are often accepted one after another in succession, which makes the game speed faster (variable time is faster). You will be able to (shorten).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in order to dramatically improve the probability of accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2102 when the time is shortened (probability variation time shortened game state, etc.). The second starting port 2102 is arranged in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100. Then, when the game balls are continuously driven into the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100, all of the game balls are fired at each other (0.6 seconds). It is decided to adopt a flow-down structure that is sequentially guided to the gate unit 2300 while maintaining the above.

That is, the gate unit 2300 according to this embodiment has a second starting port 2102 in which a game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2301 in the unit 2300 can win a prize by moving the movable piece 2305 according to the passage. , It has the following features so that a prize can be won through the passage from the gate portion 2301 to the second starting port 2102.

First, when it is detected by the gate sensor 2302 that the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2301, the main control board 4100 acquires a normal random number based on the information that this detection has occurred, and is thus acquired. A judgment (normal judgment) is made as to whether or not a normal hit is obtained based on a normal random number. Further, the main control board 4100 makes the normal symbol display fluctuate for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display 1189 based on the result of the normal determination. As a result, when it is determined by the normal determination that a normal hit is obtained (when a specific stop display mode appears as a result of variable display of the normal symbol for a predetermined time), the main control board 4100 is the first. (Ii) The movable piece 2305 is controlled to slide inward so that the starting port 2102 is in the open state.

In this respect, the guide passage having a predetermined length in the gate unit 2300 requires a game ball passing through the gate portion 2301 for almost a uniform time due to the structure integrally formed in the unit 2300. , It is sure to guide to the area (movable area of the movable piece 2305) that can be accepted by the second starting port 2102. On the other hand, in the time saving state (the game state in which the so-called opening extension function is activated), until the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2301 reaches the second starting port 2102 (while a substantially uniform time elapses). , The game in which the main control board 4100 has passed through the gate portion 2301 so as to obtain a normal hit by executing the above-mentioned normal determination, the variation display of the normal symbol, the drive control for opening the movable piece 2305, and the like. The ball itself is made acceptable to the second start port 2102.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control board 4100) according to this embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is always "0.08 seconds" in the time saving state, and the symbol of the normal symbol is confirmed and displayed. The time from when the movable piece 2305 is opened is "0.008 seconds", and the time when the movable piece 2305 is maintained in the open state is "5.5 seconds". The time (interval time) from when the movable piece 2305 is closed from the open state until the next start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2302) is allowed is "0.05 seconds". ing.

On the other hand, in the gate unit 2300 according to this embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2301 (after the normal symbol starts to fluctuate) until the movable piece 2305 is opened is "0". The unit is made to reach the second starting port 2102 by taking only .088 seconds (or the time "0.1 seconds" to which a slight margin time (for example, "12 ms") is added). We are trying to secure such time while trying to reduce the size as 2120.

As a result, when a hit is obtained in the ordinary lottery when the time is shortened, the game ball itself, which is the cause of the hit being obtained by passing through the gate portion 2301, is the guide path in the gate unit 2300. Through the movable piece 2305, the movable region opened by the movable piece 2305 is accepted into the second starting port 2102. Since such an open state is continued for a long time of "5.5 seconds", the game ball is in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 1100 for 0.6 seconds. When launched at intervals (100 game balls are launched sequentially at regular intervals per minute), the game balls are launched to the second starting port 2102 via the guide passage member or the gate unit 2300. It will be accepted one after another at the interval (0.6 second interval).

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (main control board 4100) according to this embodiment, in the super-speed mode in the probabilistic time-short game state, a lottery for the second special symbol corresponding to the acceptance to the second starting port 2102 is performed. If a loss is obtained, the symbol control period (addition time between the symbol fluctuation time and the symbol stop time) until the start of the fluctuation display control of the next second special symbol that is in the pending state comes first. Since the settings are made as described in (see paragraph 0694), even in a situation where the game balls launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds are accepted one after another at the second starting port 2102, those game balls are drawn by lottery. It is designed to prevent the waste from being discharged without being treated.

The symbol control period in the variable display control of the second special symbol in the super-speed mode can be set as follows, unlike the setting described above (paragraph 0694). (B) When the number of variable display control (lottery for the second special symbol) of the second special symbol that is in the hold state (the number of hold of the second special symbol) is "1", the hold is released ( If a loss is obtained as a result of a lottery for the second special symbol based on the fact that the number of holdings at this point is "0"), four game balls will start second as a variable time. "2.4 seconds" that can be accepted by the mouth 2102 is set, and "0.1 seconds" is set as the stop time (time for fixed stop) of the subsequent symbol. (B) When the number of variable display controls (lottery for the second special symbol) of the second special symbol that is in the hold state (the number of hold of the second special symbol) is "2", the hold is released () If a loss is obtained as a result of a lottery for the second special symbol based on the fact that the number of holdings at this point is "1"), three game balls will start second as a variable time. "1.8 seconds" that can be accepted by the mouth 2102 is set, and "0.2 seconds" is set as the stop time of the subsequent symbol. (C) When the number of variable display controls (lottery for the second special symbol) of the second special symbol that is in the hold state (the number of hold of the second special symbol) is "3", the hold is released (c). If a loss is obtained as a result of a lottery for the second special symbol based on the fact that the number of holdings at this point is "2"), the fluctuation time will be added to the stop time of the symbol. "0.101 seconds" is set so that the two game balls can be accepted by the second starting port 2102, and "0.5 seconds" is set as the stop time of the subsequent symbols. (D) When the number of variable display control (lottery for the second special symbol) of the second special symbol that is in the hold state (the number of hold of the second special symbol) is "4", the hold is released ( As a result of the lottery for the second special symbol based on the fact that the number of holdings at this point is "3"), if a loss is obtained, it will be launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds as a variable time. Even if the next game ball is continuously accepted by the second starting port 2102, "0.099 seconds" is set so that the timing of this acceptance can be reached after the symbol variation is completed. At the same time, "0.5 seconds" is set as the stop time of the subsequent symbol.

That is, according to this setting example, if a loss is obtained when the number of reserved second special symbols is "1" or "2", the number of reserved second special symbols is maximized. At least the required time is set as the variable time (configurations (a) and (b)). Therefore, while the second special symbol is fluctuating, as many game balls as necessary to maximize the number of holdings are accepted, and as a result, basically the number of holdings is maximized. You will be able to play the game. On the other hand, if a loss is obtained when the number of reserved second special symbols is "3" or "4", the next symbol change that has been put on hold by the game holding means is started. During the symbol control period (0.601 seconds, 0.599 seconds) up to (until the hold is released), the relatively short time (0.101 seconds, 0.099 seconds) of the symbol control period The variable state is terminated, and the symbol display is controlled to be maintained in the stopped state at the time of loss for a relatively long time (0.5 seconds) thereafter (configuration (c), (d). )). In particular, according to the above configuration (d), when a lottery is performed based on the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2102 and a loss is obtained, the firing interval of the game ball is 0.6. Since the symbol variation is completed in less than a second, the timing of this acceptance is even when the next game ball launched at 0.6 second intervals is continuously accepted by the second starting port 2102. Visit after the symbol change is completed. That is, in this case, in the probabilistic time-shortening game state in which the game balls can be continuously accepted by the second starting port 2102, each time the game balls are accepted, the jackpot probability is as low as in the case of the low probability state. However, the lottery on the second special symbol side can be digested one after another. As a result, in the probabilistic time-shortening game state, a certain amount of long time can be consumed by a fast-paced game using a game ball launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds and a symbol change (directing, etc.). As a result, even in the case of having a loop performance that can be repeatedly executed at a high continuation rate exceeding 50% of the jackpot game that allows a large amount of game balls to be paid out, the game entertainment is appropriate. Will be maintained at the level.

However, as a more specific effect when in such a probabilistic time-shortening game state, as will be described later, it is not something in which a lost symbol appears significantly each time a symbol is changed, but a plurality of symbol fluctuations. One big production that straddles (for example, using the time of multiple symbol fluctuations to play one production video) is made to appear so that a certain amount of long time can be consumed. Is important for maintaining an appropriate level.

Further, according to this setting example, in the symbol control at the time of loss (the number of reserved second special symbols is "3", "4") in the super-speed mode in the probabilistic time-short game state, it is included in the symbol control period. The variable state is terminated in a relatively short time, and the symbol display is maintained in the stopped state at the time of loss for a relatively long time after that (the fixed stop time is longer than the variable time of the symbol). In this way, even though it is in the symbol control period, the symbol display is maintained for a long time in the stopped state at the time of loss, so that the lost symbol appears as if it is waiting for the acceptance of a new game ball. It is often the case that the game ball is accepted when it is in a stopped state. Therefore, even if the game ball is accepted by the second starting port 2102 when the number of holdings is maximum (when a game ball is discharged without being subjected to the lottery process), the game ball is not to be accepted. It will be possible to make the game ball appear to be used for the lottery process.

Further, according to this setting example, in particular, in the symbol control at the time of loss (the number of reserved second special symbols is "3", "4") when in the super-speed mode in the probabilistic time-short game state, the game ball is launched. By ending the symbol fluctuation only in a time (0.101 seconds, 0.099 seconds) less than the interval (0.6 seconds), the next game ball launched at the interval of 0.6 seconds is sent to the second starting port 2102. Even in the case of continuous acceptance, the timing of this acceptance comes after the symbol change is completed. Therefore, even if the game ball is accepted by the second starting port 2102 when the number of holdings is maximum (when a game ball is discharged without being subjected to the lottery process), the game ball is not to be accepted. It will be possible to make the game ball appear to be used for the lottery process. As described above, the effect accompanied by the reach is not performed (or is difficult to be performed) in the symbol change at the time of losing the second special symbol in the time-saving state (probability change time-shortening game state, etc.). Therefore, when the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2102, if the lottery result of the second special symbol is lost, basically, the lost symbol of the second special symbol and the decorative symbol is derived and displayed immediately.

Furthermore, according to this setting example, when the number of held second special symbols is "4", which is the maximum number, the hold is released until the next symbol change in the held state is started. The symbol control period is less than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game ball (0.599 seconds). Therefore, even in a situation where the game balls launched at intervals of 0.6 seconds are accepted by the second start port 2102 one after another when the number of reserved second special symbols is the maximum number, those game balls It will be possible to prevent the waste from being discharged without being subjected to the lottery process. In addition, when the number of reserved second special symbols drops from the maximum number to "3", the symbols until the next symbol change that is in the pending state starts (until the hold is released). Since the control period is a time (0.601 seconds) slightly longer than the firing interval (0.6 seconds) of the game balls, the generation of the game balls that are discharged without being subjected to the lottery process is suppressed. At the same time, it becomes possible to maximize the number of reserved second special symbols.

Moreover, while making it possible for the symbol fluctuation to be repeated at the fastest speed (the speed at which the game ball is entered), it is unlikely that the symbol fluctuation will be interrupted. This also suppresses the decline in game entertainment.

In the symbol control period until the next symbol change that is in the hold state starts (until the hold is released), the stop time of the symbol does not depend on the number of holds of the second special symbol. In addition, it may be set at a fixed time (for example, "0.5 seconds").

According to the second unit 2120 having such a structure, in the time saving state (probability variation time saving game state, etc.), each time the game balls pass through the gate portion 2105, those game balls are left as they are at the second starting port 2102. There is a possibility that it will be accepted, and as a result, all the game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2105 can be involved in the jackpot lottery according to the winning of the second starting port 2102. As a result, even when the jackpot probability is set to the same low probability value in the low probability state and the high probability state, in the time saving state (probability change time saving game state, etc.), compared to the so-called conventional probability change state. Not only will it be possible to generate the next jackpot game in a moderate amount of time, which is slightly longer, but it is a waste with a sense of speed at least until the jackpot is won just by hitting the game ball. A game with few balls (balls that are not used in the lottery) will be realized.

In addition to controlling the effect image, the peripheral control unit 4140 controls the drive motors 3228, 3234, 3304, 3460, 3476, 3508 provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 based on the command related to the lottery result. Etc., and each solenoid and the like are appropriately operated, and each decorative substrate provided on the game board 4 is provided. 2116, 2125, 2569, 3113, 3114, 3115, 3123, 3124, 3266, 3320, 3322, 3426, 3536, 3546, The LEDs mounted on the 3690, 3692, etc. are made to emit light as appropriate, and the player can be entertained by the movable effect and the light emission effect.

Subsequently, an example of the effect in the super-speed mode among the probabilistic time-short game states will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 and 139. On the game board 4 of the present embodiment, shutter accessories 9000L and 9000R covering the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1900 are arranged on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1900. The shutter accessories 9000L and 9000R are provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the left-right direction on the front surface of the display area according to guide rails arranged along the upper and lower sides of the liquid crystal display device using a motor (not shown) as a drive source. During driving (standby), the center accessory 2500 and the game panel 1200 are housed behind the game panel 1200 in a difficult-to-see manner (state in FIG. 115), and both shutter accessories 9000L and 9000R are displayed on the liquid crystal display during driving. It appears in front of the 1900, and the display area is covered by both shutter accessories 9000L and 9000R at the time of maximum advancement. Further, the shutter accessories 9000L and 9000R are capable of vibrating as shown in FIG. 138 by the forward and reverse rotation of the motor at the non-driving position and the intermediate position up to the maximum advance.

In the present embodiment, the notification of the lottery result in the super-speed mode is a so-called symbol variation effect (a so-called symbol variation effect) in which the appearance of the symbol that is stopped after the variation of the decorative symbol (decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 115) is started is shown. Achievement type of whether or not the achievement condition that the shutter accessories 9000L and 9000R are closed and the shutter accessories 9000L and 9000R are closed is lost unless the shutter accessories are closed, instead of being performed by the design variation type effect). It will be done by directing. In the present embodiment, the achievement type effect using the shutter accessories 9000L and 9000R is adopted, but the display effect is such that a predetermined character defeats the enemy character as an achievement condition in the liquid crystal display device 1900. Achievement type production may be adopted. In short, other things may be adopted as long as it is a hit if the predetermined achievement conditions are satisfied.

In the present embodiment, the achievement-type effect is not performed for each change of the special symbol that is digested at high speed, but as a series of effects that continue throughout the fluctuations of the 20 lottery in which the super-speed mode continues. I try to do it. That is, if the loss continues 20 times, the shutter accessories 9000L and 9000R will not be closed even once, although the effect of inciting whether or not the shutter accessories 9000L and 9000R will be closed will be performed. On the other hand, when the lottery is won in the middle of the 20th time, the shutter accessories 9000L and 9000R are closed to indicate that the big hit is a big hit when the winning change is made.

In this super-speed mode, when the symbol variation effect is performed for each change of the special symbol digested at high speed and the decorative symbol is stopped for each variation to notify the lottery result, the end of one lottery is the end. When the symbol is stopped, it is clearly recognized by the player, and this is repeated at high speed, so that a strong sense of loss is given as the advantageous gaming state decreases one after another. In this aspect, in the present embodiment, the symbol variation effect is not adopted in the super-speed mode, and the achievement type effect of hitting when the shutter accessories 9000L and 9000R are closed is adopted. Therefore, one lottery is completed (variation) in appearance. It is difficult to feel the break), and it is possible to reduce the feeling of loss as the advantageous gaming state decreases one after another. In the present embodiment, it is decided not to perform the variable effect by the decorative symbol, but for example, the decorative symbol may be displayed in a small variation at the corner of the liquid crystal display device 1900. In short, it suffices to prevent the player from feeling lost due to the decrease in the advantageous gaming state, and if the player cannot grasp or grasp the mode, the decorative symbol may be changed.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the super-speed mode, the longest in the super-speed mode is performed by performing the above-mentioned achievement-type production as a series of productions using the fluctuation time (variation time for up to 20 times) corresponding to a plurality of lottery times. The variation of the special symbol related to the 20 lottery is shown as the variation effect of one lottery in the production. For this reason, if the jackpot is won in a lottery within 20 times in the probabilistic time-shortening game state after the jackpot ends, it is as if the jackpot was won in one lottery (first rotation) after the jackpot ends. Can be given, and the player can be given a feeling of a big hit. In particular, as in the present embodiment, in the super-speed mode, the fluctuations are made one after another in a form close to the firing interval as described above, so that the fluctuation times corresponding to the multiple lottery are collectively combined into one lottery. Even if it is made as if it is such a variable effect, the time does not become unnecessarily long, and it can be realized without a sense of discomfort. In addition, in the case where the purpose is only to give the feeling of a consecutive villa of such a big hit, it is sufficient if the number of lottery draws can be made to appear less than the actual number of lottery draws. Instead, a symbol variation display effect that shows the lottery result by changing or stopping the decorative symbol may be adopted. Further, in the above example, while the super-speed mode continues, the maximum 20th rotation is made to appear as if it is a variable effect for one lottery, but for example, the variable time according to five lottery. You may use to make it look like a variable effect for one lottery, and even in this case, you can show it in the form of reducing the number of lottery times, which was originally 20 times, to 4 times. It will be possible to give the impression that the next big hit has come immediately after the big hit is over. The point is that if one variable production is performed using the variable time corresponding to two or more multiple lottery, this makes it look like the number of lottery is less than the original number of lottery. Because it can be done, it becomes possible to enhance the feeling of a big hit in a row.

Further, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case as well, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Main body frame 4 Game board 5 Door frame 1100 Game area 1200 Game panel 1900 Liquid crystal display device 2000 Front unit 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3040 Panel relay board 3041 Lamp drive board 3045 Motor drive board 3141, 3142, 3143 Notch 4010 Peripheral control board (effect control means) 4140 Peripheral control unit (effect control means)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine having a lottery means for executing a lottery based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and an effect executing means for executing an effect based on the result of a lottery by the lottery means.
A variable display executing means that executes variable display based on the lottery of the lottery means, and
A movable structure that is operably provided in the standby position and the production position,
A special game execution means that can control a special game state that is advantageous to the player when a special result is derived as a lottery result by the lottery means.
After the special gaming state is executed, the advantageous gaming state control means capable of controlling the advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and
With
When controlled to the advantageous gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, the derivation of the lottery result by the lottery means is relatively shorter than the normal gaming state.
In the advantageous gaming state in which the derivation of the lottery result by the lottery means is relatively shorter than the normal game state, a series of display effects can be executed over a period in which the derivation of the lottery results is executed a plurality of times. Have a means,
In the period in which the series of display effect by the period effect execution means is capable of executing in the advantageous gaming state, and configured to execute a structure operation effect for operating said movable structure in the derivation of the extraction election results When the lottery result by the lottery means is the special result, the player is notified that the movable structure is operated to the effect position to be controlled to the special gaming state.
A series of display effects that can be executed by the period effect executing means over a period in which the derivation of the lottery result is executed a plurality of times during the advantageous game state is a series of display effects in a state where the timing to end is determined. Is started to run ,
In the advantageous gaming state, when the movable structure is operated to the effect position in order to notify the player that the special gaming state is controlled, the combination of decorative symbols becomes a specific combination in parallel. A game machine characterized in that it does not perform a pattern variation effect .